The URL can be used to link to this page

Report OFFICE COPY BORAEA/ED1 kir12019 CITY OF TIGA BUILDING DIVISION Project Manual TIGARD-TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS Byrom Elementary Durham Elementary Woodward Elementary Bid/Permit Set December 21, 2018 OFFICE COPY 1 I 1 1 OWCE COPY 1 720 SW Washington,Suite 800 Portland,Oregon 97205 503 226 1575 www.bora.co 1 BID/PERMIT SET ' PROJECT MANUAL TIGARD-TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS December 21, 2018 Project Number 16015 Owner Architect TIGARD-TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT BORA ARCHITECTS, INC. ' 6960 SW Sandburg St. 720 S.W. Washington St., Suite 800 Tigard, OR 97223 Portland, OR 97205 Superintendent Ernie Brown 503-226-1575 503-431-4007 John O'Toole, Principal in Charge I Christopher Linn, Design Principal Owner's Representative Eve Fagenstrom, Project Architect DAY CPM SERVICES Conor Sass, Project Team 12745 SW Beaverdam Rd., Suite 120 Mike Manzi, Specifications ' Beaverton, OR 97005 Debbie Pearson, Sr. Program Manager MEP Engineer 503-969-5454 MFIA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS Juliet Jacobson, Project Coordinator 2007 SE Ash St. 503-984-6801 Portland, OR 97214 Takato Baker, Project Manager Structural Engineer 503-234-0548 NISHKIAN DEAN 1022 SW Salmon St., Suite 300 Cost Estimating Portland, OR 97205 ACC COST CONSULTANTS, LLC Robert Aman, Project Manager 8060 SW Pfaffle St., Suite 110 503-445-8687 Tigard, OR 97223 Terrance Walton 503-718-0075 I • I THIS PROJECT MANUAL IS PRINTED ON RECYCLED PAPER ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O EMENTS SECTION 000110 122018 Page 1 of 3 ITABLE OF CONTENTS IDIVISION 0— PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section 000101 Project Title Page Section 000110 Table of Contents I Section 007200 Form General Conditions Agreement Between Contractor and Architect Concerning Use of Electronic Media IDIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 011000 Summary Section 012300 Alternates I Section 012500 Substitution Procedures Section 012600 Contract Modification Procedures Section 012900 Payment Procedures I Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation Section 013300 Submittal Procedures Section 014000 Quality Requirements I Section 014200 References Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 016000 Product Requirements Section 017300 Execution I Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section 017700 Closeout Procedures Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 Section 017839 Section 017900 Project Record Documents Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2—EXISTING CONDITIONS ISection 024119 Selective Demolition IDIVISION 3—CONCRETE Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete I DIVISION 5— METALS Section 055000 Metal Fabrications IDIVISION 6—WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES I Section 061000 Rough Carpentry Section 064000 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION I Section 072100 Thermal Insulation Section 072700 Air Barriers I Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 079200 Joint Sealants IDIVISION 8—OPENINGS Section 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames I Section 081400 Wood Doors TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 000110 I 122018 Page 2 of 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS I Section 083113 Access Doors and Frames Section 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Section 086300 Metal-Framed Skylights Section 087100 Door Hardware Section 088000 Glazing DIVISION 9—FINISHES II Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 092900 Gypsum Board Section 093000 Tiling Section 095100 Acoustical Ceilings I Section 096500 Resilient Flooring Section 096800 Carpeting Section 098400 Acoustic Room Components Section 099000 Painting and Coating I DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES Section 101100 Visual Display Units I Section 101400 Signage Section 102113 Toilet Compartments Section 102610 Wall Protection and Corner Guards Section 102813 Toilet Accessories Section 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT I Section 113013 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS Section 122413 Roller Window Shades I DIVISION 21 —FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 211300 Fire Suppression Sprinkler System I DIVISION 22—PLUMBING , Section 220500 Plumbing Materials and Methods Section 220700 Plumbing Insulation Section 221000 Plumbing Piping and Pumps I Section 224000 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) I Section 230500 HVAC Materials and Methods Section 230548 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control Section 230590 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing I Section 230700 HVAC Insulation Section 230923 DDC Controls Section 230993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls I Section 232300 Refrigerant Piping System Section 233000 Air Distribution Section 233400 HVAC Fans I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 000110 122018 Page 3 of 3 ITABLE OF CONTENTS Section 234000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices ISection 237400 Central Station HVAC Units DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL I Section 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical Section 260519 Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 260521 Metal-Clad Cable I Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems ISection 260923 Lighting Control Devices Section 262200 Transformers Section 262416 Panelboards I Section 262726 Wiring Devices Section 262800 Circuit Protective Devices Section 265000 Lighting IDIVISION 27—COMMUNICATIONS Section 270000 Project Overview I Section 270100 Basic Communications Requirements Section 270130 Administrative Requirements Section 270170 Testing, Identification, and Administration I Section 270180 Section 270190 Technology Documentation Support and Warranty Section 270530 Interior Communication Pathways Section 271116 Equipment and Telecommunication Room ISection 271500 Horizontal Copper Cabling Section 275113 Paging Systems IDIVISION 28— ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 280010 Basic Requirements ISection 283110 Fire Alarm and Detection System Modification END OF DOCUMENT I I I I I I Tigard -Tualatin School District No. 23J I GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR LARGE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS May 2016 TABLE OF SECTIONS I D.3 DUAL PAYMENT SOURCES SECTION A D.4 RETAINAGE IGENERAL PROVISIONS D.5 FINAL PAYMENT A.1 DEFINITION OF TERMS SECTION E A.2 SCOPE OF WORK JOB SITE CONDITIONS I A.3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS E.1 USE OF PREMISES A.4 EXAMINATION OF PLANS,SPECIFICATIONS, E.2 PROTECTION OF WORKERS,PROPERTY, AND SITE AND THE PUBLIC I A.5 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS E.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.6 RETIREMENT SYSTEM STATUS AND TAXES E.4 CLEANING UP A.7 GOVERNMENT EMPLOYMENT STATUS E.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATION E.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP SECTION B E.7 FORCE MAJEURE ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT SECTION F B.1 OWNER'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE INDEMNITY CONTRACT I B.2 CONTRACTOR'S MEANS AND METHODS; F.1 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES/INDEMNITY MITIGATION OF IMPACTS B.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP B.4 PERMITS I B.5 COMPLIANCE WITH GOVERNMENT LAWS AND SECTION G REGULATIONS SCHEDULE OF WORK B.6 SUPERINTENDENCE B.7 INSPECTION G.1 CONTRACT PERIOD B.8 ACCESS TO RECORDS G.2 SCHEDULE I B.9 SUBCONTRACTS AND ASSIGNMENT G.3 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE B.10 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK B.11 OTHER CONTRACTS B.12 ALLOWANCES SECTION H l B.13 SUBMITTALS,SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT CORRECTION OF WORK DATA,AND SAMPLES B.14 SUBSTITUTIONS H.1 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL B.15 USE OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS PAYMENT B.16 FUNDS AVAILABLE AND AUTHORIZED H.2 WARRANTY WORK IB.17 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE SECTION C SECTION I CHANGES IN THE WORK SUSPENSION AND/OR TERMINATION OF THE WORK IC.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 1.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK C.2 DELAYS 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES C.3 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCESS 1.3 COMPENSATION FOR SUSPENSION 1.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT I 1.5 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE SECTION D 1.6 ACTION UPON TERMINATION PAYMENTS I D.1 D.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1 I I I4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV ' SECTION J CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT J.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS J.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS J.3 AFFIDAVIT/RELEASE OF LIENS AND CLAIMS J.4 COMPLETION NOTICES J.5 TRAINING J.6 EXTRA MATERIALS J.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP J.8 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY J.9 OTHER CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES J.10 SURVIVAL r I 1 I 1 1 t I I 1 I 4837-9809-0062.1 ' I Part IV I TIGARD-TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT NO.23J GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT CONTRACTS SECTION A I GENERAL PROVISIONS A.1 DEFINITION OF TERMS FINAL COMPLETION,means the final completion of all requirements under the Contract, including Contract Close- ' In the Contract Documents the following terms shall be as defined below: Out as described in Section J but excluding Warranty Work as described in Section H.2,and the final payment and release of all retainage,if any,released. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER,means the Person appointed by Owner to make drawings and specifications and to provide FORCE MAJEURE,means an act,event,or occurrence I contract administration of the Work contemplated by the caused by fire,riot,war,acts of God, nature,sovereign or Contract to the extent provided herein or by supplemental public enemy,strikes,freight embargoes,or any other act, instruction of Owner(under which Owner may delegate event,or occurrence that is beyond the control of the party to responsibilities of Owner's Authorized Representative to the this Contract who is asserting Force Majeure. 1 Architect/Engineer), in accordance with ORS Chapter 671 (Architects)or ORS Chapter 672(Engineers)and NOTICE TO PROCEED,means the official written notice administrative rules adopted thereunder. from Owner stating that Contractor is to proceed with the Work defined in the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding CHANGE ORDER,means a written order issued by Owner's the Notice to Proceed,Contractor shall not be authorized to I Authorized Representative to Contractor requiring a change proceed with the Work until all initial Contract requirements, in the Work within the general scope of the Contract including the Contract,performance bond and payment Documents,issued under the changes provisions of Section bond,and certificates of insurance,have been fully executed C.1 in administering the Contract,including Owner's written and submitted to Owner in a suitable form. I change directives as well as changes reflected in a writing executed by the parties to this Contract and,if applicable, OFFER,means a bid in connection with an invitation to bid establishing a Contract Price or Contract Time adjustment and a proposal in connection with a request for proposals. for the changed Work. OFFEROR,means a bidder in connection with an invitation I CLAIM,means a demand by Contractor pursuant to to bid and a proposer in connection with a request for Section C.3 for review of the denial of Contractor's initial proposals. request for an adjustment of Contract terms, payment of money,extension of Contract Time or other relief,submitted OVERHEAD,means those items which may be included in 1 in accordance with the requirements and within the time Contractor's markup(general and administrative expense limits established for review of Claims in these General and profit)and that shall not be charged as Direct Cost of Conditions. the Work, including without limitation such Overhead expenses as wages or salary of personnel above the level of 1 CONTRACT,means the written agreement between Owner foreman(i.e.,superintendents and project managers),and and Contractor comprised of the Contract Documents which expenses of Contractor's offices at the job site(e.g.,job describe the Work to be done and the obligations between trailer), including expenses of personnel staffing the job site the parties. office. I CONTRACT PERIOD,as set forth in the Contract OWNER,means the Tigard Tualatin School District Documents, means the total period of time beginning with No.23J,acting by and through the governmental entity the issuance of the Notice to Proceed and concluding upon identified in the Solicitation Document. Final Completion. I OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE,means CONTRACT PRICE,means the total of the awarded Offer those individuals identified in writing by Owner to act on amount,as increased or decreased by the price of approved behalf of Owner for this project. Owner may elect,by written alternates and Change Orders. notice to Contractor,to delegate certain duties of Owner's I Authorized Representative to more than one party,including CONTRACT TIME,means any incremental period of time without limitation,to an Architect/Engineer. However, allowed under the Contract to complete any portion of the nothing in these General Conditions is intended to abrogate Work as reflected in the project schedule. the separate design professional responsibilities of Architects under ORS Chapter 671 or of Engineers under I CONTRACTOR,means the Person awarded the Contract ORS Chapter 672. for the Work contemplated. PERSON,means an entity doing business as a sole DAYS,are calendar days,including weekdays,weekends, proprietorship,a partnership,a joint venture,a corporation,a I and holidays,unless otherwise specified. limited liability company or partnership,or any other entity possessing the legal capacity to contract. DIRECT COSTS,means,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the cost of materials,including sales PLANS,means the drawings that show the location,type, tax;cost of delivery;cost of labor,including Social Security, dimensions,and details of the Work to be done under the I old age and unemployment insurance,and fringe benefits Contract. required by agreement or custom;Workers'Compensation insurance;project-specific insurance; bond premiums, rental PUNCHLIST,means the list of Work yet to be completed or cost of equipment,and machinery required for execution of deficiencies that need to be corrected in order to achieve I the Work;and the additional costs of field personnel directly Final Completion of the Contract. attributable to the Work. RECORD DOCUMENTS means the as-built Plans, Specifications,testing and inspection records,product data, 1 4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV ' samples,manufacturer and distributor/supplier warranties among the Contract Documents,interpretations will evidencing transfer to Owner,operational and maintenance be based on the following descending order of manuals,shop drawings,Change Orders,correspondence, precedence: certificate(s)of occupancy,and other documents listed in Subsection B.8.1 of these General Conditions,recording all 1. Contract amendments and Change Orders,with Services performed. those of later date having precedence over those of an earlier date; SOLICITATION DOCUMENT,means an invitation to bid or request for proposal or request for quotes. 2. The Supplemental General Conditions; SPECIFICATION, means any description of the physical or 3. The Tigard-Tualatin School District No.23J functional characteristics of the Work,or of the nature of a Contract for Construction; supply,service,or construction item. Specifications may include a description of any requirement for inspecting, 4. These General Conditions; testing,or preparing a supply,service,or construction item for delivery and the quantities or qualities of materials to be 5. The Plans and Specifications; furnished under the Contract. Specifications generally will state the results or products to be obtained and may,on 6. The Solicitation Document and any addenda occasion,describe the method and manner of doing the thereto;and work to be performed. Specifications may be incorporated by reference and/or may be attached to the Contract. 7. The accepted Offer. SUBCONTRACTOR,means a Person having a direct A.3.2 In the case of an inconsistency between Plans and contract with Contractor,or another Subcontractor,to Specifications or within either document not clarified perform one or more items of the Work. by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with Owner or SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, means the date when Owner's Authorized Representative's interpretation in Owner accepts in writing the construction,alteration,or writing. repair of the improvement to real property or any designated portion thereof as having reached that state of completion A.3.3 If Contractor finds discrepancies in,or omissions when it may be used or occupied for its intended purpose. from,the Contract Documents,or if Contractor is in Substantial Completion of facilities with operating systems doubt as to their meaning,Contractor shall at once occurs only after thirty(30)continuous Days of successful, notify Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative. trouble-free operation of the operating systems as provided Matters concerning performance under,and in Section J.4.2. interpretation of requirements of,the Contract Documents will be decided by Owner's Authorized SUBSTITUTIONS,means items that in function, Representative,who may delegate that duty in some 111performance,reliability,quality,and general configuration instances to the Architect/Engineer. Responses to are the same or better than the product(s)specified. Contractor's requests for interpretation of Contract Approval of any substitute item shall be solely determined by Documents will be made in writing by Owner's Owner's Authorized Representative. The decision of Authorized Representative(or the Owner's Authorized Representative is final. Architect/Engineer)within any time limits agreed to or otherwise with reasonable promptness. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS,means those Interpretations and decisions of Owner's Authorized conditions that remove from,add to,or modify these General Representative(or Architect/Engineer)will be Conditions. Supplemental General Conditions may be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable included in the Solicitation Document or may be a separate from the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not attachment to the Contract. proceed without direction in writing from Owner's Authorized Representative(or Architect/Engineer). WORK,means the furnishing of all materials,equipment, labor,transportation,services,and incidentals necessary to A.3.4 References to standard specifications,manuals,or successfully complete any individual item or the entire codes of any technical society,organization,or Contract and the carrying out of duties and obligations association,or to the laws or regulations of any imposed-by-the Contract Documents. - governmental authorityether such reference be specific or by implication,shall mean the latest A.2 SCOPE OF WORK standard specification,manual,code,laws,or regulations in effect in the jurisdiction where the The Work contemplated under this Contract project is occurring on the first published date of the includes all labor, materials,transportation,equipment,and Solicitation Document,except as may be otherwise services for,and incidental to,the completion of all specifically stated. construction work in connection with the project described in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall perform all Work necessary so that the project can be legally occupied and A.4 EXAMINATION OF PLANS,SPECIFICATIONS,AND fully used for the intended use as set forth in the Contract SITE Documents. A.4.1 It is understood that Contractor,before submitting an A.3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Offer, has made a careful examination of the Contract Documents;has become fully informed as A.3.1 Unless otherwise specifically defined in the Contract to the quality and quantity of materials and the Documents,words that have well-known technical character of the Work required;and has made a meanings or construction industry meanings are careful examination of the location and conditions of used in the Contract Documents in accordance with the Work and the sources of supply for materials. such recognized meanings. Contract Documents are Owner will in no case be responsible for any loss or intended to be complementary. Whatever is called for any unanticipated costs that may be suffered by for in one is interpreted to be called for in all. Contractor as a result of Contractor's failure to However,in the event of conflicts or discrepancies acquire full information in advance in regard to all 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV conditions pertaining to the Work. No oral This does not preclude Contractor from holding I agreement or conversation with any officer,agent,or another contract with the Federal Government. personnel of Owner,or with the Architect/Engineer either before or after the execution of this Contract, A.7.2 Contractor represents and warrants that Contractor shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations is not an employee of Owner for purposes of Iherein contained. performing Work under this Contract. A.4.2 Should the Plans or Specifications fail to particularly describe the materials,kind of goods,or details of SECTION B construction of any aspect of the Work,Contractor ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ' shall have the duty to make inquiry of Owner and Architect/Engineer as to what is required prior to B.1 OWNER'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT performance of the Work. Absent Specifications to the contrary,the materials or processes that would B.1.1 Owner's Authorized Representative will provide I normally be used to produce first-quality finished administration of the Contract as described in the Work shall be considered a part of the Contract Contract Documents(1)during construction,(2)until requirements. final payment is due,and(3)during the one-year period for correction of Work. Owner's Authorized A.4.3 Any design errors or omissions noted by Contractor Representative will act on behalf of Owner to the shall be reported promptly to Owner's Authorized extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless Representative,including without limitation any modified in writing in accordance with other nonconformity with applicable laws,statutes, provisions of the Contract. In performing these ordinances,building codes, rules,and regulations. tasks,Owner's Authorized Representative may rely on the Architect/Engineer or other consultants to A.4.4 If Contractor believes that additional cost or Contract perform some or all of these tasks. Time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by Owner's Authorized B.1.2 Owner's Authorized Representative will visit the site ' Representative(or Architect/Engineer)in response to at intervals appropriate to the stage of Contractor's Contractor's notices or requests for information, operations(1)to become generally familiar with and Contractor must submit a written request to Owner's to keep Owner informed about the progress and Authorized Representative,setting forth the nature quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to and specific extent of the request,including all time endeavor to guard Owner against defects and I and cost impacts against the Contract as soon as deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in possible,but no later than thirty(30)Days after general if the Work is being performed in a manner receipt by Contractor of the clarifications or indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will instructions issued. If Owner's Authorized be in accordance with the Contract Documents. I Representative denies Contractor's request for Owner's Authorized Representative will not make additional compensation,additional Contract Time, exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to or other relief that Contractor believes results from check the quality or quantity of the Work. Owner's the clarifications or instructions,Contractor may Authorized Representative will neither have control proceed to file a Claim under Section C.3,Claims over or charge of,nor be responsible for the Review Process. If Contractor fails to perform the construction means, methods,techniques, obligations of Sections A.4.1 to A.4.3,Contractor sequences,or procedures,or for the safety shall pay such costs and damages to Owner as precautions and programs in connection with the would have been avoided if Contractor had Work. Iperformed such obligations. 6.1.3 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract A.5 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS Documents or when direct communications have been specifically authorized,Owner and Contractor IThe service or services to be performed under this shall endeavor to communicate with each other Contract are those of an independent contractor as defined through Owner's Authorized Representative or in ORS 670.600. Contractor represents and warrants that it designee about matters arising out of or relating to is not an officer,employee,or agent of Owner. the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be through the II Architect/Engineer. Communications by and with A.6 RETIREMENT SYSTEM STATUS AND TAXES Subcontractors and materials suppliers shall be through Contractor. Communications by and with Contractor represents and warrants that it is not a separate contractors shall be through Owner's 1 contributing member of the Public Employees'Retirement Authorized Representative. System and will be responsible for any federal or state taxes applicable to payment received under this Contract. B.1.4 Based on the Architect/Engineer's evaluations of Contractor will not be eligible for any benefits from these Contractor's Application for Payment,or unless IContract payments of federal Social Security,employment otherwise stipulated by Owner's Authorized insurance,Workers'Compensation,or the Public Representative,the Architect/Engineer will review Employees'Retirement System,except as a self-employed and certify the amounts due Contractor and will issue individual. Unless Contractor is subject to backup Certificates for Payment in such amounts. withholding,Owner will not withhold from such payments any I amount(s)to cover Contractor's federal or state tax obligations. B.2 CONTRACTOR'S MEANS AND METHODS; MITIGATION OF IMPACTS A.7 GOVERNMENT EMPLOYMENT STATUS B.2.1 Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using Contractor's best skill and attention. Contractor shall A.7.1 If this payment is to be charged against federal be solely responsible for and have control over funds,Contractor represents and warrants that it is construction means,methods,techniques, not currently employed by the Federal Government. sequences,and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the I4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I Contract Documents give other specific instructions save harmless and blameless from loss,on account thereof, concerning these matters. If the Contract Owner and its departments,divisions,members,and I Documents give specific instructions concerning employees. construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures,Contractor shall evaluate B.5 COMPLIANCE WITH GOVERNMENT LAWS AND the job site safety thereof and,except as stated REGULATIONS below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the job site safety of such means,methods,techniques, B.5.1 Contractor shall comply with all federal,state,and sequences,or procedures. local laws,codes,regulations,and ordinances applicable to the Work and the Contract. Failure to B.2.2 Contractor is responsible to protect and maintain the comply with such requirements shall constitute a Work during the course of construction and to breach of contract and shall be grounds for Contract mitigate any adverse impacts to the project, including termination. Without limiting the generality of the those caused by authorized changes,which may foregoing,Contractor expressly agrees to comply affect cost,schedule,or quality. with the following as applicable: (i)Title VI and VII of Civil Rights Act of 1964,as amended;(ii)Sections B.2.3 Contractor is responsible for the actions of all its 503 and 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973,as personnel,laborers,suppliers,and Subcontractors amended;(iii)the Health Insurance Portability and on the project. Contractor shall enforce strict Accountability Act of 1996;(iv)the Americans with discipline and good order among Contractor's Disabilities Act of 1990,as amended;(v)ORS employees and other persons carrying out the Work. Chapter 659A,as amended(vi)all regulations and Contractor shall not permit employment of persons administrative rules established pursuant to the who are unfit or unskilled for the tasks assigned to foregoing laws;and(vii)all other applicable them. requirements of federal and state civil rights and rehabilitation statutes, rules,and regulations. B.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP B.5.2 Contractor shall comply with all applicable requirements of federal and state civil rights and B.3.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide rehabilitation statutes,rules,and regulations,and for the construction and completion in every detail of Contractor shall maintain,in current and valid form, the Work described. All Work shall be performed in all licenses and certificates required by law, a professional manner and unless the means or regulation,or this Contract when performing the methods of performing a task are specified Work. i elsewhere in the Contract Documents,Contractor shall employ methods that are generally accepted B.5.3 The following notice is applicable to Contractors who and used by the industry,in accordance with industry perform excavation Work. ATTENTION: Oregon law standards. requires you to follow rules adopted by the Oregon Utility Notification Center. Those rules are set forth B.3.2 Contractor is responsible to perform the Work as in OAR 952-001-0010 through OAR 952-001-0090. required by the Contract Documents. Defective You may obtain copies of the rules by calling the Work shall be corrected at Contractor's expense. Oregon Utility Notification Center at(503)232-1987. B.3.3 Work done and materials furnished shall be subject B.5.4 Failure to comply with any or all of the requirements to inspection and/or observation and testing by of B.5.1 through B.5.4 shall be a breach of contract Owner's Authorized Representative to determine if and constitute grounds for Contract termination. they conform to the Contract Documents. Inspection Damages or costs resulting from such of the Work by Owner's Authorized Representative noncompliance shall be the responsibility of111 does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for the Contractor. Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B.3.4 Contractor shall furnish adequate facilities,as B.6 SUPERINTENDENCE I required,for Owner's Authorized Representative to have safe access to the Work,including without Contractor shall keep on the site,during the progress of limitationwalkways,railings,ladder .,,.� ,,,e,�a�� ,a •_ , . , _ ....- -• •- - .-• -•• -• necessary platforms. Producers,suppliers,and fabricators shall assistants who shall be satisfactory to Owner and who shall also provide proper facilities and access to their represent Contractor on the site. Directions given to the facilities. superintendent by Owner's Authorized Representative shall be confirmed in writing to Contractor. B.3.5 Contractor shall furnish Samples of materials for I testing by Owner's Authorized Representative and B.7 INSPECTION include the cost of the Samples in the Contract Price. B.7.1 Owner's Authorized Representative shall have B.4 PERMITS access to the Work at all times. , Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary B.7.2 Inspection of the Work will be made by Owner's permits and licenses,except for those specifically excluded Authorized Representative at its discretion. Owner's in the Supplemental General Conditions,for the construction Authorized Representative will have authority to of the Work,for temporary obstructions,enclosures,opening reject Work that does not conform to the Contract I of streets for pipes,walls, utilities,environmental work,etc., Documents. Any Work found to be not in as required for the project. Contractor shall be responsible conformance with the Contract Documents,in the for all violations of the law in connection with the discretion of Owner's Authorized Representative, construction or caused by obstructing streets,sidewalks,or shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's otherwise. Contractor shall give all requisite notices to expense. public authorities. Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for B.7.3 Contractor shall make or obtain at the appropriate infringement of any patent or other proprietary rights and time all tests,inspections,and approvals of portions 1 4837-9809-0062.1 1 Part IV of the Work required by the Contract Documents or B.8.2 Contractor shall retain and Owner and its duly I by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,or orders of authorized representatives shall have access to,for public authorities having jurisdiction. Unless a period not less than six(6)years,all Record otherwise provided,Contractor shall make Documents,financial and accounting records,and arrangements for such tests, inspections,and other books,documents, papers,and records of 111 approvals with an independent testing laboratory or Contractor that are pertinent to the Contract, entity acceptable to Owner,or with the appropriate including records pertaining to Overhead and indirect public authority,and shall bear all related costs of costs,for the purpose of making audit examination tests,inspections,and approvals. Tests or excerpts and transcripts. If for any reason,any part inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract of the Contract is involved in litigation,Contractor I Documents shall be made promptly to avoid shall retain all such records until all litigation is unreasonable delay in the Work. Contractor shall resolved. Owner and/or its agents shall continue to give Owner's Authorized Representative timely be provided full access to the records during notice of when and where tests and inspections are litigation. 1 to be made so that Owner's Authorized Representative may be present for such procedures. B.9 SUBCONTRACTS AND ASSIGNMENT Required certificates of testing,inspection,or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the 6.9.1 Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the Contract Documents, be secured by Contractor and extent of the Work to be performed by the promptly delivered to Owner's Authorized Subcontractor,to be bound by the terms and Representative. conditions of these General Conditions and the Contract,and to assume toward Contractor all of the B.7.4 As required by the Contract Documents,Work done obligations and responsibilities that Contractor I or material used without inspection or testing by assumes toward Owner thereunder, unless(1)the Owner's Authorized Representative may be ordered same are clearly inapplicable to the subcontract at removed at Contractor's expense. issue because of legal requirements or industry practices,or(2)specific exceptions are requested by I B.7.5 If directed to do so any time before the Work is Contractor and approved in writing by Owner. accepted,Contractor shall uncover portions of the Where appropriate,Contractor shall require each completed Work for inspection. After inspection, Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Contractor shall restore such portions of Work to the sub-subcontractors at any level. standard required by the Contract. If the Work uncovered is unacceptable or was done without B.9.2 At Owner's request,Contractor shall submit to sufficient notice to Owner's Authorized Owner prior to their execution either Contractor's Representative,the uncovering and restoration shall form of subcontract,or the subcontract to be be done at Contractor's expense. If the Work executed with any particular Subcontractor. If Owner I uncovered is acceptable and was done with sufficient disapproves such form,Contractor shall not execute notice to Owner's Authorized Representative,the the form until the matters disapproved are resolved uncovering and restoration will be paid for as a to Owner's satisfaction. Owner's review,comment Change Order. upon,or approval of any such form shall not relieve Contractor of its obligations under this Agreement or B.7.6 If any testing or inspection reveals failure of the be deemed a waiver of such obligations of portions of the Work to comply with requirements Contractor. established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure,including those of B.9.3 Contractor shall not assign,sell,or transfer its rights, I repeated procedures and compensation for Owner's or delegate its responsibilities under this Contract,in Authorized Representative's and whole or in part,without the prior written approval of Architect/Engineer's services and expenses,shall be Owner. No such written approval shall relieve at Contractor's expense. Contractor of any obligations of this Contract,and any transferee shall be considered the agent of B.7.7 When the United States government participates in Contractor and bound to perform in accordance with the cost of the Work,or Owner has an agreement the Contract Documents. Contractor shall remain with other public or private organizations,or if any liable as between the original parties to the Contract portion of the Work is being performed for a third as if no assignment had occurred. II party or in close proximity to third-party facilities, representatives of these organizations have the right B.10 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK to inspect the Work affecting their interests or property. Their right to inspect shall not make them Owner reserves the right to perform other or additional a party to the Contract and shall not interfere with the work at or near the project site with other forces than those rights of the parties of the Contract. Instructions or of Contractor. If such work takes place within or next to the orders of such parties shall be transmitted to project site,Contractor will coordinate work with the other Contractor through Owner's Authorized contractors or forces,cooperate with all other contractors or Representative. forces,carry out the Work in a way that will minimize interference and delay for all forces involved,place and B.8 ACCESS TO RECORDS dispose of materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of another,and join the Work with the work of B.8.1 Contractor shall keep,at all times on the Work site, the others in an acceptable manner and perform it in proper one record copy of the complete Contract Documents,including the Plans,Specifications, sequence to that of the others. Owner's Authorized Representative will resolve any disagreements that may Change Orders,and addenda,in good order and arise between or among Contractor and the other marked currently to record field changes and contractors over the method or order of doing all work I selections made during construction,and one record (including the Work). In case of unavoidable interference, copy of Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples,and Owner's Authorized Representative will establish work similar submittals,and shall at all times give Owner's priority(including the Work)which generally will be in the Authorized Representative access thereto. sequence that the contracts were awarded. I4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I B.11 OTHER CONTRACTS establish standards by which the Work will be judged. In all cases and at any time,Owner has the right to execute other contracts related to or unrelated to the Work of B.13.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples and similar this Contract. Contractor of this Contract will fully submittals are not Contract Documents. The cooperate with any and all other contractors without purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those additional cost to Owner in the manner described in section portions of the Work for which submittals are B.10. required by the Contract Documents the way by 111 which Contractor proposes to conform to the B.12 ALLOWANCES information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of submittals by B.12.1 Contractor shall include in the Contract Price all the Architect/Engineer is not conducted for the allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items purpose of determining the accuracy and covered by allowances shall be supplied for such completeness of other details,such as dimensions amounts and by such persons or entities as Owner and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for may direct. installation or performance of equipment or systems, or for approval of safety precautions or,unless B.12.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract otherwise specifically stated by the Documents: Architect/Engineer,of any construction means, methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures,all (a) when finally reconciled,allowances shall cover of which remain the responsibility of Contractor as the cost to Contractor of materials and required by the Contract Documents. The equipment delivered at the site and all required Architect/Engineer's review of Contractor's taxes,less applicable trade discounts; submittals shall not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. The (b) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at Architect/Engineer's approval of a specific item shall the site,labor,installation costs,Overhead, not indicate approval of an assembly of which the profit,and other expenses contemplated for item is a component. Informational submittals upon stated allowance amounts shall be included in which the Architect/Engineer is not expected to take the Contract Price but not in the allowances; responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not (c) whenever costs are more than or less than required by the Contract Documents may be allowances,the Contract Price shall be adjusted returned by the Architect/Engineer without action. accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(i)the difference B.13.3 Contractor shall review for compliance with the between actual costs and the allowances under Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Section B.12.2(a)and(ii)changes in Architect/Engineer Shop Drawings, Product Data, I Contractor's costs under Section B.12.2(b); Samples,and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness (d) Unless Owner requests otherwise,Contractor and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the shall provide to Owner a proposed fixed price Work or in the activities of Owner or of separate for any allowance work prior to its performance. contractors. Submittals that are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by Contractor may be B.13 SUBMITTALS,SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT returned by the Architect/Engineer without action. DATA,AND SAMPLES I B.13.4 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, 8.13.1 Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals, Architect/Engineer's approval(or for the approval of Contractor represents that Contractor has Owner's Authorized Representative if approval determined and verified materials,field ' authority has not been delegated to the measurements,and field construction criteria related Architect/Engineer),a schedule and list of submittals thereto,or will do so,and has checked and which are coordinated with Contractor's construction coordinated the information contained within such schedule and allows the Architect/Fn0inaer submittals with the requirements of the Work and of_ reasonable time to review submittals. Owner the Contract Documents. reserves the right to finally approve the schedule and list of submittals. Submittals include,without 8.13.5 Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for limitation,Shop Drawings, Product Data,and which the Contract Documents require submittal and Samples which are described below: review of Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals until the respective submittal has (a) Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams, been approved by the Architect/Engineer. schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor B.13.6 The Work shall be in accordance with approved (including any sub-subcontractor), submittals except that Contractor shall not be manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate relieved of responsibility for deviations from some portion of the Work. requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect/Engineer's review or approval of Shop (b) Product Data are illustrations,standard Drawings, Product Data,Samples,or similar 111schedules,performance charts, instructions, submittals unless Contractor has specifically brochures,diagrams,and other information informed the Architect/Engineer in writing of such furnished by Contractor to illustrate materials or deviation at the time of submittal and(i)the equipment for some portion of the Work. Architect/Engineer has given written approval to the 111specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or (c) Samples are physical examples that illustrate (ii)a Change Order has been executed by Owner materials,equipment,or workmanship and authorizing the deviation. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in 4837-9809-0062.1 I Part IV Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar C.1 CHANGES IN WORK I submittals by the Architect/Engineer's review or approval thereof. C.1.1 The terms of this Contract shall not be waived, altered,modified,supplemented,or amended in any B.13.7 In the event that Owner elects not to have the manner whatsoever without prior written approval of I obligations and duties described under this Owner's Authorized Representative,and then only in Section B.13 performed by the Architect/Engineer,or a manner consistent with the Change Order in the event no Architect/Engineer is employed by provisions of this Section C.1 and after any Owner on the project,all obligations and duties necessary approvals required by public contracting assigned to the Architect/Engineer hereunder shall laws have been obtained. Otherwise,a formal III be performed by Owner's Authorized Representative. contract amendment is required,which shall not be effective until its execution by the parties to this B.14 SUBSTITUTIONS Contract and all approvals required by public contracting laws have been obtained. IContractor may make Substitutions only with the consent of Owner,after evaluation by Owner's Authorized C.1.2 It is mutually agreed that changes in Plans, Representative and only in accordance with a Change quantities,or details of construction are inherent in Order. Substitutions shall be subject to the requirements of the nature of construction and may be necessary or the bid documents. By making requests for Substitutions, desirable during the course of construction. Within Contractor represents that Contractor has personally the general scope of this Contract,Owner's investigated the proposed substitute product;represents that Authorized Representative may at any time,without Contractor will provide the same warranty for the notice to the sureties and without impairing the Substitution that Contractor would for the product originally Contract,require changes consistent with this 111 specified unless approved otherwise;certifies that the cost Section Cl.. All Change Order Work shall be data presented is complete and includes all related costs executed under the conditions of the Contract under this Contract,including redesign costs,and waives all Documents. Such changes may include, but are not claims for additional costs related to the Substitution which limited to: I subsequently become apparent;and will coordinate the installation of the accepted Substitution,making such (a) Modification of specifications and design; changes as may be required for the Work to be completed in all respects. (b) Increases or decreases in quantities; I B.15 USE OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (c) Increases or decreases to the amount of Work; Plans,Specifications,and related Contract Documents furnished to Contractor by Owner or Owner's (d) Addition or elimination of any Work item; I Architect/Engineer shall be used solely for the performance of the Work under this Contract. Contractor and its (e) Change in the duration of the project; Subcontractors and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of such documents (f) Acceleration or delay in performance of ' appropriate to the execution of the Work,but shall not claim Work;and any ownership or other interest in them beyond the scope of this Contract,and no such interest shall attach. Unless (g) Deductive changes. otherwise indicated,all common law,statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to copyrights,are retained by Deductive changes are those that reduce the scope 111 Owner. of the Work,and shall be made by mutual agreement whenever feasible. In cases of suspension or partial B.16 FUNDS AVAILABLE AND AUTHORIZED termination under Section I,Owner reserves the right to unilaterally impose a deductive change and to self- ' Owner reasonably believes at the time of entering into perform such Work,for which the provisions of B.10 this Contract that sufficient funds are available and (Owner's Right to Do Work)shall then apply. authorized for expenditure to finance the cost of this Contract within Owner's appropriation or limitation. Adjustments in compensation shall be made under Contractor understands and agrees that,to the extent that the provisions of Section C.1.3, in which costs for sufficient funds are not available and authorized for deductive changes shall be based on a Direct Costs expenditure to finance the cost of this Contract,Owner's adjustment together with the related percentage payment of amounts under this Contract attributable to markup specified for profit,Overhead,and other Services performed after the last day of the current biennium indirect costs,unless otherwise agreed to by Owner. is contingent on Owner receiving from Owner's Board of Directors appropriations,limitations,or other expenditure C.1.3 Owner and Contractor agree that Change Order authority sufficient to allow Owner,in the exercise of its Work shall be administered and compensated reasonable administrative discretion,to continue to make according to the following: payments under this Contract. ' B.17 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (a) Unit pricing may be utilized at Owner's option when unit prices or solicitation alternates were provided that established the cost for additional The District is committed to using e-Builder as the Work,and a binding obligation exists under the I primary communication and project management tool for the Contract on the parties covering the terms and Bond Projects.Contractor is responsible for attending conditions of the additional Work. District led e-Builder training and using e-Builder for all project communication as required by the District.Seats for (b) If Owner elects not to utilize unit pricing,or in I the Contractor will be purchased by the District. the event that unit pricing is not available or appropriate,fixed pricing may be used for SECTION C Change Order Work. In fixed pricing,the basis CHANGES IN THE WORK of payments or total price shall be agreed to in writing between the parties to the Contract,and 4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV 1 shall be established before the Work is done made,except as provided in Section C.1.5 for impact whenever feasible. The markups set forth in claims. C.1.3(c)shall be utilized by the parties as a guide in establishing fixed pricing,and will not C.1.5 If any Change Order Work under Section C.1.3 be exceeded by Owner without adequate causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost justification. Cost and price data relating to of,or the Contract Time required for the performance Change Orders shall be supplied by Contractor of,any other part of the Work under this Contract, to Owner upon request,but Owner shall be Contractor must submit a written request to Owner's under no obligation to make such requests. Authorized Representative,setting forth the nature and specific extent of the request,including all time (c) In the event that unit pricing and fixed pricing and cost impacts against the Contract as soon as are not utilized,then Change Order Work shall possible,but no later than thirty(30)Days after be performed on a cost reimbursement basis for receipt of the Change Order by Contractor. Direct Costs. Such Work shall be compensated on the basis of the actual,reasonable,and The thirty(30)Day time limit applies to claims of allowable cost of labor,equipment,and material Subcontractors,suppliers,or manufacturers that may furnished on the Work performed. In addition, be affected by the Change Order and that request the following markups shall be added to additional compensation or an extension of Contract Contractor's or Subcontractor's Direct Costs as Time to perform;Contractor has responsibility for full compensation for profit,Overhead,and contacting its Subcontractors,suppliers,or other indirect costs for Work directly performed manufacturers within the thirty(30)Day time limit, with Contractor's or Subcontractor's own forces: and including their requests with Contractor's requests. If the request involves Work to be On Labor 15% completed by Subcontractors,or materials to be On Equipment 10% furnished by suppliers or manufacturers,such On Materials 10% requests shall be submitted to Contractor in writing with full analysis and justification for the When Change Order Work under C.1.3(c)is invoiced compensation and additional Contract Time by an authorized Subcontractor at any level,each requested. Contractor will analyze and evaluate the ascending tier Subcontractor or Contractor will be merits of the requests submitted by Subcontractors, allowed a supplemental markup on each piece of suppliers,and manufacturers to Contractor before subcontract Work covered by such Change Order as including those requests and Contractor's analysis follows: and evaluation of those requests with Contractor's requests for additional compensation or Contract $0.00-$5,000.00 10%,and then Time that Contractor submits to Owner's Authorized Over$5,000.00 5% Representative. Failure of Subcontractors,suppliers, manufacturers,or others to submit their requests to Payments made to Contractor shall be complete Contractor for inclusion with Contractor's requests compensation for Overhead,profit,and all costs submitted to Owner's Authorized Representative incurred by Contractor or by other forces furnished within the time period and by the means described in by Contractor,including Subcontractors,for Change this section shall constitute a waiver of these Order Work. Owner may establish a maximum cost Subcontractor claims. Owner's Authorized for Change Order Work under this Section C.1.3(c), Representative and Owner will not consider direct which shall not be exceeded for reimbursement requests or claims from Subcontractors,suppliers, without additional written authorization from Owner. manufacturers,or others not a party to this Contract. Contractor shall not be required to complete such The consideration of such requests and claims under Change Order Work without additional authorization. this section does not give any person who is not a party to the Contract the right to bring a claim against C.1.4 Any necessary adjustment of Contract Time that may Owner,whether in this claims process,in litigation,or be required as a result of a Change Order must be in any dispute resolution process. agreed to by the parties before the start of the Change Order Work unless Owner's Authorized If Owner's Authorized Representative denies Representative authorizes Contractor to start the Contractor's request for additional compensation or Work before agreement on-Contract Time an exte sion of Contract Time,Contractor may adjustment. Contractor shall submit any request for proceed to file a Claim under Section C.3,Claims additional compensation(and additional Contract Review Process. Time if Contractor was authorized to start work before an adjustment of Contract Time was C.1.6 No request or Claim by Contractor for additional approved)as soon as possible but no later than thirty costs or an extension of Contract Time shall be (30)Days after receipt of the Change Order. If allowed if made after receipt of final payment Contractor's request for additional compensation or application under this Contract. Contractor agrees to adjustment of Contract Time is not made within the submit its final payment application within ninety(90) thirty(30)Day time limit,Contractor's requests Days after Substantial Completion, unless written pertaining to that Change Order are barred. The extension is granted by Owner. Contractor shall not thirty(30)Day time limit for making requests shall not delay final payment application for any reason, be extended for any reason,including without including without limitation nonpayment of limitation Contractor's claimed inability to determine Subcontractors,suppliers,manufacturers,or others the amount of additional compensation or adjustment not a party to this Contract,or lack of resolution of a of Contract Time,unless an extension is granted in dispute with Owner or any other person of matters writing by Owner. If Owner's Authorized arising out of or relating to the Contract. If Representative denies Contractor's request for Contractor fails to submit its final payment additional compensation or adjustment of Contract application within ninety(90)Days after Substantial Time,Contractor may proceed to file a Claim under Completion,and Contractor has not obtained written Section C.3,Claims Review Process. No other extension by Owner,all requests or Claims for reimbursement,compensation,or payment will be additional costs or an extension of Contract Time shall be waived. 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV Contractor may proceed to file a Claim under I C.1.7 It is understood that changes in the Work are Section C.3,Claims Review Process. inherent in construction of this type. The number of changes,the scope of those changes,and the effect (c) Caused by Force Majeure acts,events,or they have on the progress of the original Work occurrences that could not have been avoided I cannot be defined at this time. Contractor is notified by the exercise of care,prudence,foresight, that numerous changes may be required and that and diligence on the part of Contractor or its there will be no compensation made to Contractor Subcontractors. directly related to the number of changes. Each change will be evaluated for extension of Contract (d) Caused by adverse weather conditions. Any Time and increase or decrease in compensation adverse weather conditions must be based on its own merit. substantiated by documentary evidence that weather conditions were abnormal for the C.2 DELAYS specific time period claimed,could not have been anticipated by Contractor,and adversely C.2.1 Delays in construction include"Avoidable Delays," impacted the project in a manner that could not which are defined in Section C.2.1.1,and be avoided by rescheduling the Work or by "Unavoidable Delays,"which are defined in implementing measures to protect against the Section C.2.1.2. The effect of Avoidable Delays is weather so that the Work could proceed. A described in Section C.2.2 and the effect of rain,windstorm, high water,or other natural Unavoidable Delays is described in Section C.2.3. phenomenon for the specific locality of the Work,which might reasonably have been C.2.1.1 Avoidable Delays include any delays other than anticipated from the previous 10-year historical I Unavoidable Delays,and include delays that otherwise would be considered Unavoidable Delays records of the general locality of the Work,shall not be construed as abnormal. The parties but that: agree that rainfall greater than the following levels cannot be reasonably anticipated: I (a) Could have been avoided by the exercise of care,prudence,foresight,and diligence on the (i) Daily rainfall equal to,or greater than, part of Contractor or its Subcontractors. 0.50 inch during a month when the monthly rainfall exceeds the normal monthly average (b) Affect only a portion of the Work and do not by twenty-five percent(25%)or more. necessarily prevent or delay the prosecution of other parts of the Work nor the completion of (ii) daily rainfall equal to,or greater than, the whole Work within the Contract Time. 0.75 inch at any time. I (c) Do not impact activities on the accepted critical path schedule. The Office of the Environmental Data Service of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration of the U.S. Department of Commerce nearest the (d) Are associated with the reasonable interference project site shall be considered the official agency of of other contractors employed by Owner that do record for weather information. not necessarily prevent the completion of the whole Work within the Contract Time. C.2.2 Except as otherwise provided in ORS 279C.315, Contractor shall not be entitled to additional C.2.1.2 Unavoidable Delays include delays other than compensation or additional Contract Time for IAvoidable Delays that are: Avoidable Delays. (a) Caused by any actions of Owner,Owner's C.2.3 In the event of Unavoidable Delays, based on Authorized Representative,or any other principles of equitable adjustment,Contractor may employee or agent of Owner,or by separate be entitled to the following: contractor employed by Owner. (a) Contractor may be entitled to additional (b) Caused by any site conditions that differ compensation or additional Contract Time,or materially from what was represented in the both,for Unavoidable Delays described in I Contract Documents or from conditions that Section C.2.1.2(a)and(b). would normally be expected to exist and be inherent to the construction activities defined in (b) Contractor may be entitled to additional the Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify Contract Time for Unavoidable Delays 11 Owner's Authorized Representative described in Section C.2.1.2(c)and(d). immediately of differing site conditions before the area has been disturbed. Owner's In the event of any requests for additional Authorized Representative will investigate the compensation or additional Contract Time,or both, area and make a determination as to whether or as applicable,arising under this Section C.2.3 for not the conditions differ materially from either Unavoidable Delays,other than requests for the conditions stated in the Contract Documents additional compensation or additional Contract Time or those that could reasonably be expected in for differing site conditions for which a review execution of this particular Contract. If process is established under Section C.2.1.2(b), 111 Contractor and Owner's Authorized Contractor shall submit a written notification of the Representative agree that a differing site delay to Owner's Authorized Representative within condition exists,any additional compensation or two(2)Days of the occurrence of the cause of the additional Contract Time will be determined delay. This written notification shall state the cause 1 based on the process set forth in Section C.1.5 of the potential delay,the project components for Change Order Work. If Owner's Authorized impacted by the delay,and the anticipated additional Representative disagrees that a differing site Contract Time or the additional compensation,or condition exists and denies Contractor's request both,as applicable, resulting from the delay. Within for additional compensation or Contract Time, seven(7)Days after the cause of the delay has been I 4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I mitigated,or in no case more than thirty(30)Days fifteen(15)Days of the notice of appeal. After after the initial written notification,Contractor shall receiving the appeal documentation,Owner shall I submit to Owner's Authorized Representative a review the materials and render a decision within complete and detailed request for additional thirty(30)Days after receiving the appeal compensation or additional Contract Time,or both, documents. as applicable, resulting from the delay. If Contractor I does not concur with the decision of Owner's C.3.5 The decision of Owner shall be final and binding Authorized Representative and/or believes that it is unless Contractor delivers to Owner its requests for entitled to additional compensation,or additional mediation,which shall be a nonbinding process, Contract Time,or both,as applicable,Contractor within fifteen(15)Days of the date of Owner's may proceed to file a Claim under Section C.3, decision. The mediation process will be considered Claims Review Process. If Contractor does not to have commenced as of the date Contractor timely submit the notices required under this Section delivers the request. Both parties acknowledge and C.2.3,then unless otherwise prohibited by law, agree that participation in mediation is a prerequisite Contractor's Claim shall be barred. to commencement of litigation of any disputes relating to the Contract. Both parties further agree to C.3 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCESS exercise their best efforts in good faith to resolve all disputes within sixty(60)Days of the C.3.1 All Contractor Claims shall be referred to Owner's commencement of the mediation through the Authorized Representative for review. Contractor's mediation process set forth herein. Claims, including Claims for additional compensation or additional Contract Time,shall be submitted in In the event that a request for arbitration must be writing by Contractor to Owner's Authorized filed within this sixty(60)Day period in order to Representative within five(5)Days after a denial of preserve a claim,the parties agree that Contractor's initial request for an adjustment of notwithstanding the filing,they shall proceed III Contract terms,payment of money,extension of diligently with the mediation to its conclusion before Contract Time,or other relief,provided that such actively prosecuting the arbitration. initial request has been submitted in accordance with the requirements and within the time limits C.3.6 The mediator shall be an individual mutually established in these General Conditions. Within acceptable to both parties,but in the absence of thirty(30)Days after the initial Claim,Contractor agreement each party shall select a temporary shall submit to Owner's Authorized Representative a mediator,and the temporary mediators shall jointly complete and detailed description of the Claim(the select the permanent mediator. Each party shall pay "Detailed Notice")that includes all information its own costs for the time and effort involved in required by Section C.3.2. Unless the Claim is made mediation. The cost of the mediator shall be split in accordance with these time requirements,it shall equally between the two parties. Both parties agree be waived. to exercise their best effort in good faith to resolve all disputes in mediation. Participation in mediation is a C.3.2 The Detailed Notice of a Claim shall be submitted in mandatory requirement of both Owner and writing by Contractor and shall include a detailed, Contractor. The schedule,time,and place for factual statement of the basis of the Claim,pertinent mediation will be mutually acceptable,or,failing dates,Contract provisions that support or allow the mutual agreement,shall be as established by the Claim,reference to or copies of any documents that mediator. The parties agree to comply with Owner's support the Claim,the dollar value of the Claim,and administrative rules governing the confidentiality of the Contract Time extension requested for the Claim. mediation,if any,and shall execute all necessary If the Claim involves Work to be completed by documents to give effect to such confidentiality rules. Subcontractors,Contractor will analyze and evaluate In any event,the parties shall not subpoena the the merits of the Subcontractor claim prior to mediator or otherwise require the mediator to forwarding it and that analysis and evaluation to produce records,notes,or work product,or to testify Owner's Authorized Representative. Owner's in any future proceedings as to information disclosed Authorized Representative and Owner will not or representations made in the course of mediation, consider direct claims from Subcontractors, except to the extent disclosure is required by law. suppliers,manufacturers,or others not a party to this Contract. Contractor agrees that' - "• • - • a-•.• - 1.' - -• • • ,•- ' r i a . ed agreement,covenant,or assignment,nor will it Representative,Contractor shall proceed with the commit any other act that will permit or assist any Work while any Claim of Contractor is pending, Subcontractor,supplier,manufacturer,or other party including a Claim for additional compensation or to directly or indirectly make a claim against Owner. additional Contract Time resulting from Change Order Work. Regardless of the review period or the C.3.3 Owner's Authorized Representative will review all final decision of Owner's Authorized Representative, Claims and take one or more of the following Contractor shall continue to diligently pursue the preliminary actions within ten(10)Days of receipt of Work as identified in the Contract Documents. In no the Detailed Notice of a Claim: (1)request additional case is Contractor justified or allowed to cease Work supporting information from Contractor;(2)inform without a written stop-work order from Owner or Contractor and Owner in writing of the time required Owner's Authorized Representative. for adequate review and response;(3)reject the Claim in whole or in part and identify the reasons for rejection;(4)based on principles of equitable SECTION D adjustment, recommend approval of all or part of the PAYMENTS Claim;or(5)propose an alternate resolution. D.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES C.3.4 Owner's Authorized Representative's decision shall be final and binding on Contractor unless appealed Contractor shall submit,at least ten(10)Days prior to by written notice to Owner within fifteen(15)Days of submission of its first application for progress payment,a receipt of the decision. Contractor must present schedule of values("Schedule of Values")for the contracted written documentation supporting the Claim within Work. This Schedule of Values will provide a breakdown of 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV values for the contracted Work and will be the basis for I progress payments. The breakdown will demonstrate (a) The request for stored material shall be reasonable,identifiable,and measurable components of the submitted at least thirty(30)Days in advance of Work. Unless objected to by Owner's Authorized the application for payment on which it appears. Representative,this Schedule of Values shall be used as the Applications for payment shall be entertained basis for reviewing Contractor's applications for payment. If for major equipment,components,or 11 objected to by Owner's Authorized Representative, expenditures only. Contractor shall revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit the same for approval of Owner's Authorized (b) Contractor shall submit applications for Representative. payment showing the quantity and cost of the ID.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT material stored. (c) The material shall be stored in a bonded D.2.1 Owner shall make monthly progress payments on warehouse,and Owner's Authorized I the Contract as Work progresses. Payments shall Representative shall be granted the right to be based on estimates of Work completed and the access the material for the purpose of removal Schedule of Values. All payments shall be or inspection at any time during the Contract approved by Owner's Authorized Representative. A Period. progress payment shall not be considered acceptance or approval of any Work or waiver of any (d) Contractor shall name Owner as co-insured on defects therein. Owner shall pay to Contractor the insurance policy covering the full value of interest on the progress payment,not including the property while in the care and custody of retainage,due Contractor. The interest shall Contractor until it is installed. A certificate I commence thirty(30)Days after the receipt of noting this coverage shall be issued to Owner. invoice("application for payment")from Contractor or fifteen(15)Days after the payment is approved by (e) Payments shall be made for materials only. Owner's Authorized Representative,whichever is The submitted amount of the application for I earlier. The rate of interest shall equal three times payment shall be reduced by the cost of the discount rate on 90 Day commercial paper in transportation and for the cost of an inspector to effect at the Federal Reserve Bank in the Federal check the delivery at out-of-town storage sites. Reserve district that includes Oregon on the date The cost of said inspection shall be borne solely that is thirty(30)Days after receipt of the application by Contractor. 1 for payment from the Contract or fifteen(15)Days after the payment is approved by Owner,whichever (f) Within sixty(60)Days of the application for is earlier,but the rate of interest shall not exceed payment,Contractor shall submit evidence of thirty(30)percent. Notwithstanding the foregoing,in payment covering the material stored. I instances when an application for payment is filled out incorrectly,or when there is any defect or (g) Payment for stored materials shall in no way impropriety in any submitted application or when indicate acceptance of the materials or waive there is a good faith dispute,Owner shall so notify any rights under this Contract for the rejection Contractor within fifteen(15)Days stating the reason of the Work or materials not in conformance or reasons the application for payment is defective or with the Contract Documents. improper or the reasons for the dispute. A defective or improper application for payment,if corrected by (h) All required documentation must be submitted Contractor within seven(7)Days of being notified by with the respective application for payment. I Owner,shall not cause a payment to be made later than specified in this section unless interest is also D.2.4 Owner reserves the right to withhold all or part of a paid. Accrual of interest will be postponed when payment,or may nullify in whole or in part any payment on the principal is delayed because of payment previously made,to such extent as may be I disagreement between Owner and Contractor. necessary in Owner's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: D.2.2 Contractor shall submit to Owner's Authorized Representative an application for each payment and, (a) Work that is defective and not remedied,or that if required,receipts or other vouchers showing has been demonstrated or identified as failing to I payments for materials and labor, including conform with the Contract Documents; payments to Subcontractors. Contractor shall include,in its application for payment,a schedule of (b) third-party claims filed or evidence reasonably the percentages of the various parts of the Work indicating that such claims will likely be filed I completed,based on the Schedule of Values which unless security acceptable to Owner is provided shalt aggregate to the payment application total,and by Contractor; shall include,on the face of each copy thereof,a certificate in substantially the following form: (c) failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials,or "I,the undersigned, hereby certify that the above equipment(in which case Owner may issue bill is true and correct,and that the payment checks made payable jointly to Owner and such therefor has not been received. unpaid persons under this provision,or directly to Subcontractors and suppliers at any level; I Signed: (d) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the D.2.3 Generally,applications for payment will be accepted Contract Price; I only for materials that have been installed. Under special conditions,applications for payment for (e) damage to Owner or another contractor; stored materials will be accepted at Owner's sole discretion. Such a payment,if made,will be subject (f) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be to the following conditions: completed within the Contract Time required by 1 4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I the Contract,and that the unpaid balance would D.4 RETAINAGE not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; D.4.1 Retainage shall be withheld and released in accordance with ORS 279C.550 to 279C.580: (g) failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents;or D.4.1.1 Owner may reserve as retainage from any progress payment an amount not to exceed five (h) assessment of liquidated damages,when percent(5%)of the payment. As Work withholding is made for offset purposes. progresses,Owner may reduce the amount of the retainage and may eliminate retainage on D.2.5 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, any remaining monthly Contract payments after the amount of each progress payment shall be 50 percent(50%)of the Work under the computed as follows: Contract is completed if,in Owner's opinion, such Work is progressing satisfactorily. (a) Take that portion of the Contract Price properly Elimination or reduction of retainage shall be allocable to completed Work as determined by allowed only upon written application by multiplying the percentage completion of each Contractor,which application shall include portion of the Work by the share of the total written approval of Contractor's surety;except Contract Price allocated to that portion of the that when the Work is ninety-seven and one-half Work in the Schedule of Values,less retainage percent(97.5%)completed,Owner may,at its as provided in Section D.4. Pending final discretion and without application by Contractor, determination of cost to Owner of changes in reduce the retained amount to one hundred the Work,amounts not in the dispute may be percent(100%)of the value of the remaining included even though the Contract Price has Work. Upon receipt of written application by not yet been adjusted by Change Order; Contractor,Owner shall respond in writing within a reasonable time. (b) Add that portion of the Contract Price properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered D.4.1.2 In accordance with the provisions of and suitably stored at the site for subsequent ORS 279C.560 and any applicable incorporation in the completed construction(or, administrative rules,Contractor may request in if approved in advance by Owner pursuant to writing: Section D.2.3,suitably stored off the site at a location agreed on in writing),less retainage as (a) to be paid amounts that would otherwise have provided in Section D.4; been retained from progress payments where Contractor has deposited acceptable bonds and (c) Subtract the aggregate of previous payments securities of equal value with Owner or in a made by Owner;and custodial account or other mutually-agreed account satisfactory to Owner,with an (d) Subtract any amounts for which Owner's approved bank or trust company to be held in Authorized Representative has withheld or lieu of the cash retainage for the benefit of nullified payment as provided in the Contract Owner; Documents. (b) that retainage be deposited in an interest- D.2.6 Contractor's applications for payment may not bearing account,established through the State include requests for payment for portions of the Work Treasurer for state agencies,in a bank,savings for which Contractor does not intend to pay to a bank,trust company,or savings association for Subcontractor or material supplier. the benefit of Owner,with earnings from such account accruing to Contractor;or D.2.7 Contractor warrants to Owner that title to all Work covered by an application for payment will pass to (c) that Owner allow Contractor to deposit a surety Owner no later than the time of payment. Contractor bond for the benefit of Owner,in a form further warrants that upon submittal of an application acceptable to Owner,in lieu of all or a portion of for payment all Work for which payments are funds retained,or to be retained. Such bond received from Ownershall_be free and clear of liens, and any proceeds therefrom shall be made claims,security interests,or encumbrances in favor subject to all claims and liens in the manner and of Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or priority as set forth for retainage under other persons or entities making a claim by reason of ORS 279C.550 to ORS 279C.625. having provided labor, materials,and equipment relating to the Work. Where Owner has accepted Contractor's election of option(a)or(b),Owner may recover from Contractor D.2.8 If Contractor disputes any determination by Owner's any additional costs incurred through such election by Authorized Representative with regard to any reducing Contractor's final payment. Where Owner has application for payment,Contractor nevertheless agreed to Contractor's request for option(c),Contractor shall continue to prosecute expeditiously the Work. shall accept like bonds from Subcontractors and No payment made hereunder shall be or be suppliers on the project from which Contractor has construed to be final acceptance or approval of that required retainages. portion of the Work to which such partial payment relates or shall relieve Contractor of any of its D.4.1.3 The retainage held by Owner shall be included obligations hereunder. in and paid to Contractor as part of the final payment of the Contract Price. Owner shall pay D.3 DUAL PAYMENT SOURCES to Contractor interest at the rate of one and one- half percent(1.5%)per month on the final Contractor shall not be compensated for Work payment due Contractor,interest to commence performed under this Contract from any agency other than thirty(30)Days after the Work under the the agency that is a party to this Contract. Contract has 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV been completed and accepted and to run until pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and the date Contractor shall notify Owner in writing reasonable attorney fees. when the Contractor considers the Work complete and Owner shall,within fifteen(15) D.5.3 Acceptance of final payment by Contractor,a Days after receiving the written notice,either Subcontractor,or materials supplier shall constitute a 1 accept the Work or notify Contractor of Work yet waiver of claims by that payee except those to be performed on the Contract. If Owner does previously made in writing and identified by that not within the time allowed notify Contractor of payee as unsettled at the time of final application for Work yet to be performed to fulfill contractual payment. obligations,the interest provided by this I subsection shall commence to run thirty(30) Days after the end of the 15-Day period. SECTION E JOB SITE CONDITIONS D.4.1.5 Contractor agrees that if Contractor elects to 1 reserve a retainage from any progress payment El USE OF PREMISES due to any Subcontractor or supplier,such retainage shall not exceed five percent(5%)of Contractor shall confine equipment,storage of the payment,and such retainage withheld from materials,and operation of Work to the limits indicated by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be subject to the Contract Documents,law,ordinances,permits,or the same terms and conditions stated in directions of Owner's Authorized Representative. Contractor Subsection D.4 as apply to Owner's retainage shall follow Owner's Authorized Representative's instructions from any progress payment due to Contractor. regarding use of the premises, if any. I D.5 FINAL PAYMENT E.2 PROTECTION OF WORKERS,PROPERTY,AND THE PUBLIC D.5.1 Upon completion of all the Work under this Contract, Contractor shall notify Owner's Authorized E.2.1 Contractor shall maintain continuous and adequate I Representative,in writing,that Contractor has protection of all the Work from damage,and shall completed Contractor's part of the Contract and shall protect Owner's Authorized Representative and request final payment. Upon receipt of such notice, Owner's workers and property from injury or loss Owner's Authorized Representative will inspect the arising in connection with this Contract. Contractor Work,and if acceptable,submit to Owner a shall remedy acceptably to Owner any damage, I recommendation as to acceptance of the completed injury,or loss,except such as may be directly due to Work and as to the final estimate of the amount due errors in the Contract Documents or caused by Contractor. If the Work is not acceptable,Owner will authorized representatives or personnel of Owner. notify Contractor within fifteen(15)Days of Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property I Contractor's request for final payment. Upon as provided by law and the Contract Documents. approval of this final estimate by Owner and compliance by Contractor with provisions in Section E.2.2 Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for J.3,Affidavit/Release of Liens and Claims,and other the safety of all personnel on the job site,and shall provisions as may be applicable,Owner shall pay to comply with the Contract Documents and all Contractor all monies due under the provisions of applicable provisions of federal,state,and municipal these Contract Documents. safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on,about,or adjacent to the D.5.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained premises where the Work is being performed. 1 percentage shall become due until Contractor Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all submits to Owner's Authorized Representative(1)a times,as required by the conditions and progress of notarized affidavit/release of liens and claims in a the Work,all necessary safeguards for protection of form satisfactory to Owner that states that payrolls, workers and the public against any hazards created I bills for materials and equipment,and other by construction. Contractor shall designate a indebtedness connected with the Work for which responsible employee or associate on the Work site, Owner or Owner's property might be responsible or whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have name and position of the person designated shall be been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate reported to Owner's Authorized Representative. 1 evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Owner's Authorized Representative has no Documents to remain in force after final payment is responsibility for Work site safety. Work site safety is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed the responsibility of Contractor. to expire until at least thirty(30)Days'prior written I notice has been given to Owner,(3)a written E.2.3 Contractor shall not enter upon private property statement that Contractor knows of no substantial without first obtaining permission from the property reason that the insurance will not be renewable to owner or its duly authorized representative. cover the period required by the Contract Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation Documents,(4)consent of surety, if of all public and private property along and adjacent any,to final payment,and(5)if required by Owner, to the Work contemplated under the Contract and other data establishing payment or satisfaction of shall use every precaution necessary to prevent obligations,such as receipts,releases,and waivers damage thereto. In the event Contractor damages of liens,claims,security interests,or encumbrances any property,Contractor shall at once notify the arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such property owner and make,or arrange to make,full form as may be designated by Owner. If a restitution. Contractor shall report,immediately in Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver writing,to Owner's Authorized required by Owner,Contractor may furnish a bond Representative all pertinent facts relating to such I satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against property damage and the ultimate disposition of the such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after claim for damage. payments are made,Contractor shall refund to Owner all money that Owner may be compelled to E.2.4 Contractor is responsible for protection of adjacent work areas,including impacts brought about by I4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I activities,equipment,labor,utilities,and materials on the site. E.5.1.2 Contractor shall obtain Owner's written consent before bringing onto the Work site any(i) E.2.5 Contractor shall at all times direct its activities in environmental pollutants,or(ii)hazardous such a manner as to minimize adverse effects on the substances or materials,as the same or environment. Handling of all materials will be reasonably similar terms are used in any conducted so no release will occur that may pollute applicable federal,state,or local statutes,rules, or become hazardous. or ordinances. Notwithstanding such written consent from Owner,Contractor,at all times, E.2.6 In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the shall: Work or of adjoining property,Contractor,without special instruction or authorization from Owner's (a) properly handle,use,and dispose of all Authorized Representative,shall act reasonably to environmental pollutants and hazardous prevent threatened loss or injury,and shall so act, substances or materials brought onto the Work without appeal,if instructed by Owner's Authorized site in accordance with all applicable federal, Representative. Any compensation claimed by state,or local statutes, rules,or ordinances; Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined in accordance with (b) be responsible for any and all spills,releases, Section D. discharges,or leaks of(or from)environmental pollutants or hazardous substances or materials E.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING that Contractor has brought onto the Work site; and E.3.1 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all cutting,fitting,or patching of the Work to make its (c) promptly clean up,without cost to Owner,such several parts come together properly and fit to spills,releases,discharges,or leaks to Owner's receive or be received by work of other contractors satisfaction and in compliance with all or Subcontractors shown upon,or reasonably applicable federal,state,or local statutes,rules implied by,the Contract Documents. or ordinances. E.3.2 Contractor shall be responsible for restoring all cut, E.5.2 Contractor shall report all reportable quantity fitted,or patched surfaces to an original condition; releases to applicable federal,state,and local provided,however,that if a different condition is regulatory and emergency response agencies. specified in the Contract Documents,then Contractor Reportable quantities are found in 40 CFR Part 302, shall be responsible for restoring such surfaces to Table 302.4 for hazardous substances and in the condition specified in the Contract Documents. OAR Chapter 340,Division 108 for all products addressed therein. Upon discovery,regardless of E.4 CLEANING UP quantity,Contractor must telephonically report all releases to Owner. A written follow-up report shall From time to time as may be ordered by Owner, be submitted to Owner within 48 hours of the Contractor shall,at its own expense,clean up and telephonic report. Such written report shall contain, remove all refuse and unused materials of any kind resulting at a minimum: from the Work. If Contractor fails to do so within twenty-four hours after notification by Owner,the cleanup may be done (a) Description of items released(identity,quantity, by others and the cost charged to Contractor and deducted manifest number,and all other documentation from payment due Contractor. required by law); E.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATION (b) Whether amount of items released is EPA/DEQ reportable,and,if so,when it was reported; E.5.1 Contractor will be held responsible for and shall indemnify,defend(with counsel of Owner's choice), (c) Exact time and location of release, including a and hold harmless Owner from and against any description of the area involved; costs,expenses,damages,claims,and causes of action(including attorney fees),or any of them, (d) Containment procedures initiated; resulting from all spills--releases;-discharges,leaks, and disposal of environmental pollution,including (e) Summary of communications about the release storage,transportation,and handling during the Contractor has had with members of the press performance of the Contract that occur as a result of, or state officials other than Owner; or are contributed by,the negligence or actions of Contractor or its personnel,agents,or (f) Description of cleanup procedures employed or Subcontractors or any failure to perform in to be employed at the site,including disposalIII accordance with the Contract Documents(except to location of spill residue;and the extent otherwise void under ORS 30.140). Nothing in this Section E.5.1 shall limit Contractor's (g) Personnel injuries,if any, resulting from,or responsibility for obtaining insurance coverages aggravated by,the release. required under the Contract,and Contractor shall take no action that would void or impair such E.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP coverages. E.6.1 Unless disposition of environmental pollution is I E.5.1.1 Contractor agrees to promptly dispose of such specifically a part of this Contract,or was caused by spills,releases,discharge,or leaks to the Contractor(reference Section E.5 Environmental satisfaction of Owner and proper regulatory Contamination),Contractor shall immediately notify agencies in a manner that complies with Owner of any hazardous substance(s)that applicable federal,state,and local laws and Contractor discovers or encounters during regulations. Cleanup shall be at no cost to performance of the Work required by this Contract. Owner and be performed by properly qualified "Hazardous substance(s)"means any hazardous, personnel. toxic,or radioactive materials and those substances 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV defined as"hazardous substances,""hazardous or not such claim,damage,loss,or expense is caused materials,""hazardous wastes,""toxic substances," in part by a party indemnified hereunder(except to the or other similar designations in any federal,state,or extent otherwise void under ORS 30.140),and(e)any local law,regulation,or ordinance, including without lien filed upon the project or bond claim in connection limitation asbestos,polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), with the Work. Such obligation shall not be construed or petroleum,and any substances,materials,or to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or wastes regulated in 40 CFR, Part 261 and defined as obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as hazardous in 40 CFR Section 261.3. In addition to to a party or person described in this Section F.1.2. notifying Owner of any hazardous substance(s) discovered or encountered,Contractor shall F.1.3 In claims against any person or entity indemnified immediately cease working in any particular area of under this Section F.1.2 by an employee of Contractor, the project where a hazardous substance(s)has a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly been discovered or encountered if continued work in employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may such area would present a risk or danger to the be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section I health or well-being of Contractor's or any Subcontractor's work force. F.1.2 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,compensation,or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under Workers' E.6.2 Upon notification by Contractor of the presence of Compensation acts,disability benefit acts,or other I hazardous substance(s)on the project site,Owner employee benefit acts. shall arrange for the proper disposition of such hazardous substance(s). SECTION G E.7 FORCE MAJEURE SCHEDULE OF WORK IA party to this Contract shall not be held responsible for G.1 CONTRACT PERIOD delay or default due to Force Majeure acts,events,or occurrences unless such acts,events,or occurrences could G.1.1 Time is of the essence on this Contract. have been avoided by the exercise of reasonable care, Contractor shall at all times carry on the Work prudence,foresight,and diligence by that party. Owner may diligently,without delay and punctually fulfill all terminate this Contract upon written notice after determining requirements herein. Contractor shall commence that delay or default caused by Force Majeure acts,events, Work on the site within fifteen(15)Days of Notice to or occurrences will reasonably prevent successful Proceed, unless directed otherwise. performance of the Contract. G.1.2 Unless specifically extended by Change Order,all Work shall be complete by the date contained in the SECTION F Contract Documents. Owner shall have the right to I INDEMNITY accelerate the completion date of the Work,which may require the use of overtime. Such accelerated F.1 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES/INDEMNITY Work schedule shall be an acceleration in performance of Work under Section C.1.2(f)and F.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to shall be subject to the Change Order process of property,injury to persons,and loss,expense, Section C.1. inconvenience,and delay that may be caused by,or result from,the carrying out of the Work to be done G.1.3 Owner shall not waive any rights under the Contract under this Contract,or from any act,omission,or by permitting Contractor to continue or complete the I neglect of the Contractor,its Subcontractors, personnel,or agents. Work or any part of the Work after the date described in Section G.1.2 above. F.1.2 To the fullest extent permitted by law,Contractor shall G.2 SCHEDULE 111 indemnify,defend(with counsel approved by Owner) and hold harmless Owner,Owner's Authorized G.2.1 Contractor shall provide,by or before the pre Representative,Architect/Engineer, construction conference,a detailed schedule for Architect/Engineer's consultants,and their respective review and acceptance by Owner. The submitted officers,directors,agents,employees,partners, schedule must illustrate Work by significant project members,stockholders,and affiliated companies components,significant labor trades,and long lead (collectively"Indemnitees")from and against all items,broken down by building and/or floor where liabilities,damages, losses,claims,expenses applicable. Each schedule item shall account for no (including reasonable attorney fees),demands,and greater than five percent(5%)of the monetary value I actions of any nature whatsoever that arise out of, of the project or five percent(5%)of the available result from,or are related to(a)any damage,injury, Contract Time. Schedules with activities of less than loss,expense,inconvenience,or delay,(b)any one Day or valued at less than one percent(1%)of accident or occurrence that happens or is alleged to the Contract will be considered too detailed and will I have happened in or about the project site or any not be accepted. Schedules lacking adequate detail, place where the Work is being performed,or in the or unreasonably detailed,will be rejected. Included vicinity of either,at any time before the time the Work within the schedule are the following: Notice to is fully completed in all respects,(c)any failure of Proceed,Substantial Completion,and Final Contractor to observe or perform any duty or obligation Completion. Schedules will be updated monthly and I under the Contract Documents that is to be observed submitted with the monthly payment application. or performed by Contractor,or any breach of any Acceptance of the schedule by Owner does not agreement,representation,or warranty of Contractor constitute agreement by Owner as to Contractor's contained in the Contract Documents or in any sequencing,means,methods,or allocated Contract I subcontract, Time. Any positive difference between Contractor's (d)the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor,a scheduled completion and the Contract completion Subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly date is float owned by Owner. Owner reserves the employed by them or any one of them or anyone for right to negotiate the float if it is deemed to be in whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether Owner's best interest to do so. In no case shall 4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I Contractor make a request for additional Owner shall give Contractor notice of defects with compensation for delays if the Work is completed reasonable promptness. Contractor shall perform within the Contract Time but after Contractor's such warranty work within a reasonable time after scheduled completion. Owner's demand. If Contractor fails to complete the warranty work within such period as Owner G.3 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE determines reasonable,or at any time in the event of warranty work consisting of emergency repairs, G.3.1 Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially without affecting Contractor's obligations,Owner completed portion of the Work at any stage,provided may perform such work and Contractor shall such occupancy or use is consented to by public reimburse Owner all costs of the same within thirty authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such (30)Days after demand. partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided H.2.2 This provision does not negate guarantees or Owner and Contractor have reasonably accepted in warranties for periods longer than one year,including writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them without limitation such guarantees or warranties for payments,retainage,if any,security,insurance or required by other sections of the Contract111 self-insurance,maintenance,heat,utilities,and Documents for specific installations,materials, damage to the Work,and have agreed in writing processes,equipment,or fixtures. concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the H.2.3 In addition to Contractor's warranty,manufacturer's Contract Documents with respect to such portion of warranties shall pass to Owner and shall not take the Work. Approval by Contractor to partial effect until affected Work has been accepted in occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably writing by Owner's Authorized Representative. withheld. Immediately before such partial occupancy or use,Owner and Contractor shall jointly inspect the H.2.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be extended with respect to portions of Work performed used in order to determine and record the condition after Substantial Completion by the period of time of the Work. Partial occupancy or use of a portion or between Substantial Completion and the actual portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance performance of the Work,and shall be extended by of Work not complying with the requirements of the corrective Work performed by Contractor pursuant to Contract Documents. this Section H.2,as to the Work corrected. Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the SECTION H requirements of the Contract Documents and are CORRECTION OF WORK neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner. H.1 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT H.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section H.2 shall be Contractor warrants to Owner that materials and construed to establish a period of limitation with equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good respect to other obligations that Contractor might quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by have under the Contract Documents. Establishment the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from of the period for correction of Work as described in defects,and that the Work will conform to the requirements this Section H.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contract Documents. Work failing to conform to these of Contractor to correct the Work,and has no requirements shall be deemed defective. Contractor shall relationship to the time within which the obligation to promptly remove from the premises and replace all defective comply with the Contract Documents may be sought materials and equipment as determined by Owner's to be enforced,nor to the time within which Authorized Representative,whether incorporated in the proceedings may be commenced to establish Work or not. Removal and replacement shall be without loss Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's or expense to Owner,and Contractor shall bear the cost of obligations other than specifically to correct the repairing all Work destroyed or damaged by such removal or Work. replacement. Contractor shall be allowed a period of no longer than sixty(60)Days for completion of defective H.2.6 If Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in —(Puncbtist)woe uniess otheiwise_agreed. A -•- e •- ---e e-•-_ ' • •_ _°-' _••= s ofthe-Contract period,or earlier if requested by Contractor,Owner shall Documents,Owner may do so instead of requiring its arrange for inspection of the Work by the Architect/Engineer. removal and correction,in which case the Contract Should the Work not be complete,and all corrections made, Price will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. the costs for all subsequent re-inspections shall be borne by Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not Contractor. If Contractor fails to complete the Punchlist work final payment has been made. within the above time period,without affecting Contractor's obligations,Owner may perform such work and Contractor shall reimburse Owner all costs of the same within thirty(30) SECTION Days after demand. SUSPENSION AND/OR TERMINATION OF THE WORK H.2 WARRANTY WORK 1.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK H.2.1 Neither the final certificate of payment nor any 1.1.1 Owner and/or Owner's Authorized Representative provision of the Contract Documents shall relieve has the authority to suspend portions or all of the Contractor from responsibility for defective Work and, Work due to the following causes: unless a longer period is specified,Contractor shall correct all defects that appear in the Work within a (a) Failure of Contractor to correct unsafe period of one year from the date of issuance of the conditions; written notice of substantial completion by Owner except for latent defects,which will be remedied by (b) Failure of Contractor to carry out any provision Contractor at any time they become apparent. of the Contract; 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I Part IV (c) Failure of Contractor to carry out orders; otherwise fail to perform the Work in a timely manner; (d) Conditions,in the opinion of Owner's Authorized Representative,that are unsuitable for (e) If Contractor should repeatedly fail to make performing the Work; prompt payment to Subcontractors or for Imaterial or labor,or should disregard laws, (e) Time required to investigate differing site ordinances,or the instructions of Owner or its conditions; Authorized Representative;or (f) Any reason considered to be in the public (f) If Contractor is otherwise in material breach of interest. any part of the Contract. 1.1.2 Owner shall notify Contractor and its surety in writing 1.4.2 At any time that any of the above occurs,Owner may of the effective date and time of the suspension and exercise all rights and remedies available to Owner shall notify Contractor and its surety in writing to at law or in equity,and in addition,Owner may take resume Work. possession of the premises and of all materials and appliances and finish the Work by whatever method 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES it may deem expedient. In such case,Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until 1.2.1 During the period of the suspension,Contractor is the Work is completed. If Owner's cost of finishing responsible to continue maintenance at the project the Work exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract just as if the Work were in progress. This includes, Price,Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. but is not limited to,protection of completed Work, 1 maintenance of access,protection of stored 1.5 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE materials,temporary facilities,and cleanup. 1.5.1 Owner may terminate the Contract in whole or in part 1.2.2 When the Work is recommenced after the whenever Owner determines that termination of the I suspension,Contractor shall replace or renew any Contract is in the best interest of the public. Work damaged during the suspension,remove any materials or facilities used as part of temporary 1.5.2 Owner will provide Contractor with seven(7)Days' maintenance,and complete the project in every prior written notice of a termination for public respect as though its prosecution had been convenience. After such notice,Contractor shall I continuous and without suspension. provide Owner with immediate and peaceful possession of the premises and materials located on 1.3 COMPENSATION FOR SUSPENSION and off the premises for which Contractor received progress payments under Section D. Compensation I 1.3.1 Depending on the reason for suspension of the for Work terminated by Owner under this provision Work,Contractor or Owner may be due will be according to Section D. In no circumstance compensation by the other party. If the suspension shall Contractor be entitled to lost profits for Work not was required due to acts or omissions of Contractor, performed due to termination. Owner may assess Contractor actual costs of the I suspension in terms of administration,remedial work 1.6 ACTION UPON TERMINATION by Owner's forces or another contractor to correct the problem associated with the suspension,rent of 1.6.1 Upon receiving a notice of termination,and except as temporary facilities,and other actual costs related to directed otherwise by Owner,Contractor shall I the suspension. If the suspension was caused by immediately cease placing further subcontracts or acts or omissions of Owner,Contractor shall be due orders for materials,services,or facilities. In compensation which shall be defined using Section addition,Contractor shall terminate all subcontracts C,Changes in Work. If the suspension was required or orders to the extent they relate to the Work III through no fault of Contractor or Owner, neither party terminated and,with the prior written approval of owes the other for the impact. Owner,settle all outstanding liabilities and termination settlement proposals arising from the 1.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT termination of subcontracts and orders. 1.4.1 Owner may,without prejudice to any other right or 1.6.2 As directed by Owner,Contractor shall upon remedy,and after giving Contractor seven(7)Days' termination transfer title and deliver to Owner all written notice and an opportunity to cure, Record Documents,information,and other property terminate the Contract in whole or in part under the that,if the Contract had been completed,would have 1 following conditions: been required to be furnished to Owner. (a) If Contractor should voluntarily or involuntarily, seek protection under the United States SECTION J Bankruptcy Code and Contractor as debtor-in- CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT possession or the Trustee for the estate fails to assume the Contract within a reasonable time; J.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS (b) If Contractor should make a general assignment As a condition of final payment(refer also to Section I for the benefit of Contractor's creditors; D.5),Contractor shall comply with the following: Contractor (c) If a receiver should be appointed on account of shall provide to the District's Authorized Representative, Contractor's insolvency; Record Documents of the entire project. Record Documents shall depict the project as constructed and shall reflect each (d) If Contractor should repeatedly refuse or fail to and every change, modification,and deletion made during supply an adequate number of skilled workers the construction. Record Documents shall be provided in or proper materials to carry on the Work as the following format: BIM model(s), Revit model(s)and required by the Contract Documents,or hyperlinked pdfs. Record Documents are part of the Work and shall be provided before Owner's issuance of final I4837-9809-0062.1 Part IV I payment. Record Documents include all modifications to the Contract Documents unless otherwise directed.Media shall As part of the Work,and before submission of the be electronic in addition to a cloud-based storage for Owner request for final payment,Contractor shall schedule with future use. Owner's Authorized Representative training sessions for all equipment and systems,as required in the individual J.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS specifications sections. Contractor shall schedule training sessions at least two weeks in advance of the date of As part of the Work,Contractor shall submit two training to allow Owner's personnel adequate notice. completed operation and maintenance manuals("O&M The 0&M Manual shall be used as a basis for training. Manuals")for review by Owner's Authorized Representative Training shall be a formal session,held after the equipment before submission of any pay request for more than seventy- and/or system is completely installed and operational in its five percent(75%)of the Work. No payments beyond normal operating environment. seventy-five percent(75%)will be made by Owner until the 0 &M Manuals have been received. The 0&M Manuals shall J.6 EXTRA MATERIALS contain a complete set of all submittals;all product data as required by the specifications;training information;phone list As part of the Work,Contractor shall provide spare of consultants,manufacturers,installers,and suppliers; parts,extra maintenance materials,and other materials or manufacturer's printed data; record and shop drawings; products in the quantities specified in the specifications,prior schematic diagrams of systems;and appropriate equipment to final payment. Delivery point for extra materials shall be indices,warranties,and bonds. Owner's Authorized designated by Owner's Authorized Representative. Representative shall review and return one 0&M Manual for any modifications or additions required. Before J.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP submission of its final pay request,Contractor shall deliver three(3)complete and approved sets of 0&M Manuals to As part of the Final Completion notice,or as a separate Owner's Authorized Representative. written notice submitted with or before the notice of Final Completion,Contractor shall notify Owner that all J.3 AFFIDAVIT/RELEASE OF LIENS AND CLAIMS environmental pollution cleanup that was performed as a part of this Contract has been disposed of in accordance As a condition of final payment,Contractor shall submit with all applicable rules, regulations, laws,and statutes of all to Owner's Authorized Representative a notarized agencies having jurisdiction over such environmental affidavit/release of liens and claims form,in a form pollution. The Final Completion notice shall reaffirm the satisfactory to Owner,stating that all Subcontractors and indemnification given under Section F.1 above. suppliers have been paid in full,all disputes with property owners have been resolved,all obligations on the project J.8 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY have been satisfied,all monetary claims and indebtedness have been paid,and that,to the best of Contractor's Contractor shall not be granted Final Completion or knowledge,there are no claims of any kind outstanding receive final payment if Owner has not received an against the project. Contractor shall indemnify,defend(with unconditioned certificate of occupancy from the appropriate counsel of Owner's choice),and hold harmless Owner from state and/or local building officials,unless failure to obtain an all claims for labor and materials furnished under this unconditional certificate of occupancy is due to the fault or Contract. Contractor shall furnish complete and valid neglect of Owner. releases or waivers,satisfactory to Owner,of all liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. J.9 OTHER CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES111 J.4 COMPLETION NOTICES Contractor shall be responsible for returning to Owner all items issued during construction such as keys,security J.4.1 Contractor shall provide Owner notice of both passes,site admittance badges,and all other pertinent Substantial and Final Completion. The notice of items. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Substantial Completion shall state the date of appropriate utility companies to transfer utility charges from Substantial Completion,the responsibilities of Owner Contractor to Owner. The utility transfer date shall not be and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat, before Substantial Completion and may not be until Final utilities,damage to the Work,and insurance,and the Completion,if Owner does not take beneficial use of the time within which Contractor shall finish all items on facility and Contractor's forces continue with the Work. the Punchlist accompanying-the-notice:—Both completion notices must be signed by Contractor and J.10 SURVIVAL Owner to be valid. Owner shall provide the final signature on the notices. The notices shall take All warranty and indemnification provisions of this effect on the date they are signed by Owner. Contract,and all of Contractor's other obligations under this Contract that are not fully performed by the time of Final J.4.2 Substantial Completion of a facility with operating Completion or termination shall survive Final Completion or systems(e.g., mechanical,electrical,and HVAC) any termination of the Contract. shall be that degree of completion that has provided a minimum of thirty(30)continuous Days of successful,trouble-free operation,which period shall begin after all performance and acceptance testing END OF EXHIBIT A has been successfully demonstrated to Owner's Authorized Representative. All equipment contained in the Work,plus all other components necessary to enable Owner to operate the facility in the manner that was intended,shall be complete on the Substantial Completion date. Contractor may request that a Punchlist be prepared by Owner's Authorized Representative with submission of the request for the Substantial Completion notice. J.5 TRAINING 4837-9809-0062.1 1 I 111 BORA ELECTRONIC MEDIA AGREEMENT I I IAGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT CONCERNING USE OF ELECTRONIC MEDIA 1. Contractor has requested that Architect provide to it certain plans,specifications and other documents in electronic media or ICAD form("FILES")for TTSD Elementary Schools Improvements("PROJECT"). Contractor has requested that Architect furnish FILES in order for Contractor,its subcontractors,and other consultants to expedite their work. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the FILES are not intended to be used for construction;may not include all known or contemplated revisions at the time of transfer;are not Contract Documents under the terms of the Construction Contract;may be inaccurate as a result of electronic storage,transmission,technology compatibility or related issues;and may be revised by others without the knowledge I or consent of the Architect or,when plotted,may result in variances or corrupt files of the Contractor. 2. Architect is nevertheless willing to provide the FILES on the terms and conditions specified herein. I 3. Contractor agrees neither this Agreement nor the transfer of the FILES in any way restricts Architect's use of the FILES. Contractor agrees not to use the FILES for any purpose prohibited herein or project other than the Project for which it was prepared. The Contractor agrees to cease all use of the FILES by it and its subcontractors and consultants and return or destroy all such FILES in its possession or control upon written direction of Architect. I 4. Contractor acknowledges that the FILES are the property of the Architect and subject to the copyright of the Architect. The electronic media may be write-protected by Architect such that no data in such files can be manipulated. Architect will provide 1 to the Contractor only a working copy electronic media. Said working copy shall have all indices of the Architect's Ownership, professional name,and/or involvement in the PROJECT removed from the electronic display. Any use of any kind and/or changes to the FILES,including by Contractor,its subcontractors,and consultants,will be at the Contractor's sole risk,and without liability,risk or legal expense to the Architect. The Contractor and any other person or entity using the FILES agrees to I release and,to the fullest extent permitted by law,defend,indemnify,and hold harmless the Architect and its consultants and their partners,shareholders,agents and employees from and against any and all claims,demands,losses,expenses,damages, penalties and liabilities of any kind including without limitation,attorneys'fees arising out of or relating in any way to any such use of or change to the FILES or breach of this Agreement. I5. Under no circumstance shall the transfer of the FILES for use of the Contractor be deemed a sale by the Architect,and the Architect makes no warranties,either expressed or implied,of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. 6. Contractor agrees,as a condition of forwarding the FILES to its subcontractors or any other consultant,person or entity,to I obtain the prior written approval of Architect for each recipient and to require such third party to agree in writing to the terms and conditions of this Architect's Agreement Concerning Use of Electronic Media and provide evidence of such agreement to the Architect before forwarding the FILES. I 7. Nothing with respect to this Agreement or the transfer of the FILES is intended to or does create a right of Contractor or its subcontractors or consultants to rely upon the FILES or implies review or approval of the FILES by the Architect. Contractor,its subcontractors and consultants are not third party beneficiaries of Architect's agreement with the Project Owner. READ AND ACCEPTED BY Bora Architects, Inc. I Architect Signature Contractor Signature 1 Date Date 1 720 SW Washington,Suite 800 Portland,Oregon 97205 503 226 1575 www.bora.co I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 011000 121918 Page 1 of 3 SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work covered by Contract Documents. 2. Work by Owner or under separate contracts. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. I 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Remodel and maintenance work at Byrom, Durham and Woodward elementary schools under the 2016 TTSD Bond Program. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.3 WORK BY OWNER OR UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner or separate contractors so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner or separate contractor. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner or under separate contracts. B. Concurrent Work: Owner or separate contractor will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. Il. Roof restoration. 2. Cleaning, touch-up painting, and other maintenance in areas not affected by the Work. C. Subsequent Work: Owner or separate contractor will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Cleaning, touch-up painting, and other maintenance in areas affected by the Work after Contractor cleaning is complete and before school starts. 1 1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Wireless access points. 2. Toilet accessories as indicated in Section 102813 "Toilet Accessories." 3. Projectors. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. ' a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a Iweathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 011000 I 121918 Page 2 of 3 SUMMARY D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction , operations. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. I 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours7:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Obtain Owner's approval for work during weekend and early morning hours. 2. Comply with regulations by authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, '• . '• , . • I.• - _ , _-tat-in-high-levels-of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on Project site. I F. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Provide photo identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 011000 121918 Page 3 of 3 ISUMMARY 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words shall, "shall be," or"shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. I B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in I detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 1 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION i I I I 1 I i I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012300 121318 Page 1 of 1 IALTERNATES I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS I A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to I accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. IB. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each I alternate. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, alternates listed apply to each school. IPART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1, Condensing Unit Replacement. 1. Base Bid: Existing condensing units to remain. 2. Alternate: Replace existing condensing units and coils and associated roof curbs. See Mechanical Drawings and Division 23 specifications. a. Coordinate replacement of associated roof curbs with Roof Restoration work at Durham Elementary and Mary Woodward Elementary. B. Alternate No. 2, Mechanical Upgrades. 1. Base Bid: Existing pneumatics to remain. 2. Alternate: Replace pneumatics with electronic valves and damper actuators. See Mechanical Drawings and Division 23 specifications. I END OF SECTION I 1 I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012500 121318 Page 1 of 4 ISUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS I A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. I 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in Iorder to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit one copy of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or I installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use reproduction of form provided at the end of this Section. I 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the I Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work I specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. I d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. I f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names as well as addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with + products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract I Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. I 3. Architect's Action Prior to Bid: If, in the Architect's opinion, the proposed product is acceptable, the Architect will include it in a written addendum which will be issued to bidders. Proposed products not included by addendum are not acceptable. Acceptance of a Substitution Request does not relieve the I requestor from meeting the requirements, procedures, and warranties indicated in the Contract Documents. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012500 121318 Page 2 of 4 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES I 4. Architect's Action After Contract Award: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics equal to or better than those that specified product provided. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied.-If-the following conditions are not satisfie Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, sustainable design, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics equal to or better than those that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012500 121318 Page 3 of 4 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been ' coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I I 1 r I I I I 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST The Construction Specifications Institute Northwest Region ' TO: PROJECT: , SPECIFIED ITEM: Section No. Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of request including identifying applicable portions. I Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents that proposed substitution requires for proper installation. I Undersigned certifies that the following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. , 2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts are available locally or are readily obtainable for proposed substitution. Undersigned further certifies that function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. Undersigned agrees that, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in I Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by Name(Print) General Contractor(if after award of Contract) Signature For use by NE: , Firm Name —Approved Approved as Noted Not Approved Received-Teed-ate Address City,State,Zip By Date Date Telephone Fax Remarks Attachments 1999 Edition I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012600 121318 Page 1 of 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract ' modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710 or similar form. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the ' Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G709 or similar form. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect on a form approved by Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change ' on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. ' 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500"Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100"Allowances"for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. ' B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices"for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or similar form approved by Owner. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE ' A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 or similar form approved by Owner. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012600 121318 Page 2 of 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 1 END OF SECTION I 1 1 I 1 I I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012900 121318 Page 1 of 3 IPAYMENT PROCEDURES I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process I Applications for Payment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various I portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's I construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days I before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. I c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each I item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. I c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value. I g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. I 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of I Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for I Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 5. Overhead Costs: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item. I 6. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive. I 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. I B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 012900 121318 Page 2 of 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES ' 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 or similar forms approved by Owner for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit signed and notarized Application for Payment to Architect. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial unconditional waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with perfor -. - -- : -- -:' - -4 ::: ' • .6- -_+s-lawfully entI e 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment:Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 12 SECTION 0 900 121318 Page 3 of 3 ' PAYMENT PROCEDURES I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial ' Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s)of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for ' Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. ' 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706. 5. AIA Document G706A. 6. AIA Document G707. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of ' Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I 111 r I I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 1 of 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but ' not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of ' the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 1 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. I1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, in prominent location in [each] built facility, and, if used, in web-based Project software directory. Keep list current at all times. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES ' A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for ' required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. ' 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. ' 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page2of7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling, raised access floor, and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of m.'. • • - -, . = 0. __ •_ -, : • --, : 'acrs access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor-control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 3 of 7 IPROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) I A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by I Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and I the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. I 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. RFI subject. I 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. I 10. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, I coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. I C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or similar form approved by Owner and Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven U working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. I b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. I e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for I response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract I Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. II E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. I 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. I7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 4 of 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1 F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's BIM model or CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction. 1. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 2. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in Revit. 3. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in Project Manual. a. Subcontractors and other parties granted access by Contractor to Architect's digital data files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual. B. Web-Based Project Software: If web-based Project software is used, provide user licenses for use of the Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Owner's Representative, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users. 1. Web-based Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify, view, and print documents. c. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities. d. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide 111security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g. Processing and tracking of payment applications. h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. k. Management of construction progress photographs. I. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets. 2. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes. 3. Provide a web-based Project software package approved by Owner and Architect. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of111 date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. 1 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 5 of 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. ' 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Use of web-based Project software. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. i. Procedures for testing and inspecting. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. I. Submittal procedures. m. Preparation of record documents. n. Use of the premises and existing building. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. ' u. Construction waste management and recycling. v. Parking availability. w. Office, work, and storage areas. x. Equipment deliveries and priorities. ' y. First aid. z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning. ' 4. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the ' installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. l c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 6 of 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION I m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture,fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. 111 E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013100 121318 Page 7 of 7 IPROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to I ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. I 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Status of sustainable design documentation. I 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. I 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. I 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting I where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) IPART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) IEND OF SECTION 1 I I 1 I I I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013200 121318 Page 1 of 5 I CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction ' during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Progress photographs. I 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. I 7. Unusual event reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and I controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. I 2. Predecessor Activity:An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where I activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that I establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. I 1. Float time is for the exclusive use or benefit of Owner per the general contract for construction. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. I 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an activity as scheduled. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in PDF file format unless otherwise indicated. B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire I construction period. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original ' duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. I 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for each activity, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then by early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of activities sorted in ascending order of total float. I 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013200 121318 Page 2 of 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION , F. Progress Photographs: Submit at monthly intervals. 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Submit photos including copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and direction. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. 111d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. I J. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules and is approved by Owner. B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 111 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 5 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are no •, --•••• _ -, _•• - -, •- _•_ .•• -•rica#ian,_and-delive9r- 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal I Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 5 days for startup and testing. 5. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 5 days for commissioning. 6. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 14 days for completion of punch list items and II final completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: r TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013200 121318 Page 3 of 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use-of-premises restrictions. f. Seasonal variations. g. Environmental control. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: ' 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. G. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. H. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 7 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. M I. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 1.6 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node)format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 15 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' ' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use"one workday"as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup ' network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013200 121318 Page 4 of 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION , a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and inspection. j. Commissioning. k. Punch list and final completion. I. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 111 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 1.7 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS 1 A. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Formats and Media: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Metadata: Record accurate date and time, and GPS location data if available, from camera. 2. File Names: Name media files with date, Project area, and sequential numbering suffix. ' r TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013200 121318 Page 5 of 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, coinciding with the cutoff date 1 associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1.8 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Testing and inspection. 8. Accidents. 9. Meetings and significant decisions. 10. Unusual events. 11. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 12. Meter readings and similar recordings. 13. Emergency procedures. 14. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 15. Change Orders received and implemented. 16. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. ' 17. Services connected and disconnected. 18. Equipment or system tests and startups. 19. Partial completions and occupancies. 20. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. 1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 121318 Page 1 of 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. I1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. ' f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: I1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. a. Include Project identifier and Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier, separated by decimal points (e.g., PROJ.061000.01). b. Include another decimal point and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals (e.g., PROJ.061000.01.R1). 8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Indication of full or partial submittal. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 121318 Page 2 of 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I 13. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 14. Other necessary identification. 15. Remarks. 16. Signature of transmitter. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. 111 D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Architect. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital Project Record Document file. 2. Web-Based Project Software: If web-based Project software is used, prepare submittals in PDF form and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15-d I review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated or required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form as initial submittal. I 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exception Taken," or"Make Corrections Noted." E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked "No Exception Taken,"or"Make Corrections Noted." I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 121318 Page 3 of 6 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Shop Drawings and Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Fabrication and installation drawings. c. Wiring diagrams, including power, signal, and control wiring, differentiate field-installed wiring from manufacture-installed wiring. d. Schedules. e. Compliance with specified standards. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 1 g. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. h. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. i. Design calculations, where required. j. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. if. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Email or Web-Based Project Software Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 121318 Page 4 of 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one set with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates: 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature whereindicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 121318 Page 5 of 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use. 1.7 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit signed PDF file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. ' 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp or clear indication in web-based Project software. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval. 1.9 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action, as follows: 1. No Exception Taken, 2. Make Corrections Noted, or 3. Nonconforming, Resubmit. B. Informational Submittals:Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. 11 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 013300 I 121318 Page 6 of 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will return without review or discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. I F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action. 11/ PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 121318 Page 1 of 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL)according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 121318 Page 2 of 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1 with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect. 1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS I A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS 111 A. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS I A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. R,eg i ements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. I C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS I A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 121318 Page 3 of 6 IQUALITY REQUIREMENTS 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. I 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract I Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. I B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. I 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, I what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. I7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. I Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report. I 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. I 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; I individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient III production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications:A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. I 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 121318 Page 4 of 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. Maintain-mockups 6- ••• -••- ••• • • - •• - - •-6 can ' ' judging the completed Work. 8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1 ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 121318 Page 5 of 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. I a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least two days in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. I 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are II Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 1 responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 111 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control I service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 1 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation 1 of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. I Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 1 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. I H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality- control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. II. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. I 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014000 I 121318 Page 6 of 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to is Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG I A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 11 A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300"Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services END OF SECTION I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 1 of 6 IREFERENCES SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES IPART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS 1 A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. I C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as"directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in I Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and II rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. I G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS I A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. IB. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. I C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies Idirectly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract I Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. I 2. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.orq. 3. AAPFCO -Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO-American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. I 5. AATCC-American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA-American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA-American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. I 8. ACI -American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com. 9. ACPA-American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC-Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.orq. 11. AF&PA-American Forest& Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA-American Gas Association; www.aga.orq. 13. AHAM -Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI -Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 2 of 6 REFERENCES 15. Al -Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.orq. 16. AIA-American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.orq. I 11 18. AISI -American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC-American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 20. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI -American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.orq. 22. AOSA-Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA-APA-The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA-Architectural Precast Association;www.archprecast.org. 111 25. API -American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI -Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI -American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA-Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE-American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI -American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE -American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME-ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.orq. 33. ASSE -American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.orq. 34. ASSE -American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.orq. 35. ASTM -ASTM International; www.astm.orq. 36. ATIS-Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA-American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 111 38. AWI -Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC-Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA-American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS-American Welding Society; www.aws.orq. 42. AWWA-American Water Works Association; www.awwa.orq. 43. BHMA- Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA- Brick Industry Association (The); www.qobrick.com. 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA- BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC- Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF- Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 49. CDA-Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CE -Conformite Europeenne; http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking/ 51. CEA-Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 52. CEA-Consumer Electronics Association;-www.ce.org. 53. CFFA-Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 54. CFSEI -Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.orq. 55. CGA-Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 56. CIMA-Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 57. CISCA-Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.orq. 58. CISPI -Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 59. CLFMI -Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 60. CPA-Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 61. CRI -Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 62. CRRC -Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.orq. 63. CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 64. CSA-CSA Group;www.csa.ca. 65. CSA-CSA International; (Formerly: IAS- International Approval Services); www.csa-international.org. 66. CSI -Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 67. CSSB -Cedar Shake& Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 68. CTI -Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.orp. 69. CWC-Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 3 of 6 IREFERENCES 70. DASMA- Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. I 71. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 72. ECA- Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECAMA- Electronic Components Assemblies &Materials Association; (See ECIA). 74. ECIA- Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.orq. 75. EIA- Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 76. EIMA- EIFS Industry Members Association;www.eima.com. 77. EJMA- Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 78. ESD- ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. I 79. ESTA- Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 80. ETL- Intertek(See Intertek); www.intertek.com. 81. EVO- Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. I 82. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 83. FIBA- Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 84. FIVB- Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. I 85. FM Approvals- FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 86. FM Global- FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 87. FRSA- Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. I 88. FSA- Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 89. FSC- Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 90. GA-Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 91. GANA-Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 92. GS -Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 93. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. I 94. HI/GAMA- Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 95. HMMA- Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 96. HPVA- Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 97. HPW- H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 98. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 99. IAS- International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 100. IAS- International Approval Services; (See CSA). 101. ICBO- International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 102. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 103. ICEA- Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.n get. 104. ICPA- International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hg.org. I 105. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 106. IEC- International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 107. IEEE- Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. I 108. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 109. IESNA- Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 110. ZEST- Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. I 111. IGMA- Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 112. IGSHPA- International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 113. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 114. Intertek- Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 115. ISA- International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 116. ISAS- Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(The); (See ISA). I 117. ISFA- International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association);www.isfanow.orq. 118. ISO- International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.orq. 119. ISSFA- International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). I 120. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 121. KCMA- Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.orq. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 4 of 6 REFERENCES 122. LMA- Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 123. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.orq. 124.MBMA- Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 125.MCA-Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.orq. 126. MFMA- Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.orq. 127. MFMA-Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfq.orq. 128. MHIA- Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.orq. 129. MIA- Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 130.MMPA- Moulding &Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 131.MPI -Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 132. MSS -Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss- hq.org. 133. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 134. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 135. NADCA- National Air Duct Cleaners Association;www.nadca.com. 136. NAIMA- North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.orq. 137. NBGQA- National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 138. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildinqs.orq. 139. NCAA- National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 140. NCMA- National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 141. NEBB- National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 142. NECA- National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.orq. 143. NeLMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 144. NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 145. NETA- InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 146. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 147. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.orq. 148. NFPA- NFPA International; (See NFPA). 149. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 150. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 151. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 152. NOFMA- National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 153. NOMMA- National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 154. NRCA- National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 155. NRMCA- National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 156. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 157. NSPE- National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 158. NSSGA- National Stone, Sand &Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 159. NTMA- National Terrazzo&Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 160. NWFA- National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 161. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.orq. 162. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute;www.pdionline.orq. 163. PLASA- PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA- Entertainment Services and Technology Association); http://www.plasa.org. 164. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 165. RFC! - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 166. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 167. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.orq. 168.SCTE- Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 169.SDI -Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 170.SDI -Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 171.SEFA-Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 172. SEI/ASCE -Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 173. SIA-Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 174.SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.orq. 175.SMA-Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 5 of 6 REFERENCES 176.SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 177.SMPTE-Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 178.SPFA-Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance;www.sprayfoam.org. 179.SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 180. SPRI -Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 181. SRCC-Solar Rating &Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 182.SSINA-Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 183.SSPC-SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.orq. 184.STI -Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 185.SWI -Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 186.SWPA-Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 187.TCA-Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 188.TCNA-Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 189.TEMA-Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 190.TIA-Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA-Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.orq. 191.TIA/EIA-Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 192.TMS The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.orq. 193.TPI -Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 194.TPI -Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 195.TRI -Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 196. UL- Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; http://www.ul.com. 197. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.orq. 198. USAV- USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 199. USGBC- U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.orq. 200. USITT- United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 201.WA-Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org 202.WASTEC-Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 203.WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 204.WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 205.WDMA-Window& Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 206.WI Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.orq. 207.WSRCA-Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 208.WWPA-Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.orq. B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO- International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC- International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES- ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.orq. C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE-Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC-Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.ener ov. P 9Y, 9y 9 6. EPA- Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA- Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA-General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD- Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.qov. 11. LBL- Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA-Occupational Safety& Health Administration; www.osha.qov. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 014200 121318 Page 6 of 6 REFERENCES 13. SD- Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB-Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies;www.trb.orq. 15. USDA- Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA- Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.qov. 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; • www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.orq. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the 111 Contract Documents. 1. CFR-Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC- Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD- Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS- Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 111 a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC- Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation;www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calreqs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txfurestservice.tdn,u.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) I END OF SECTION I I i I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 121318 Page 1 of 7 ITEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. I 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the project to use temporary I services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for I use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services Ias required for construction operations. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS I A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the I Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility. C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content. I D. Erosion-and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. E. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. IF. Moisture-and Mold Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold. 1 G. Dust-and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 1 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste-handling procedures. I 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric I service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. I C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS IA. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 121318 Page2of7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 111 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. C. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. D. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. I E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. I C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, le . , c ee_•= e_- e = -• •__ - _ • •ie• •• G_= space-th - 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction. Clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 121318 Page 3 of 7 ITEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the I Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." I B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION I A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. I1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition Iexisting before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of I low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying. F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according I to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. I b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing I equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment. I G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service, as directed by Owner. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction I operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I I. Cell Phone Service: Install WiFi cell phone access equipment to serve each field office. 1. In each field office, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. II c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 121318 Page4of7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS I f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Processor: Intel Core i5 or i7. 2. Memory: 8 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 500 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: WXGA or higher. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 100mb Ethernet or higher. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional or higher. 8. Productivity Software: a. Microsoft Office Professional, 2010 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 11.0 or higher. 9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 3 Mbps upload and 10 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. I 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas, unless otherwise indicated. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. 4. Recondition-base a - -•••• = __-, -• _ _ irng-contaminated materiat,regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, as approved by Owner. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 ' 121318 Page5of7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. I1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"and not temporary facilities. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. I1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000"Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways. Comply with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. ' 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree-or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion-and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. I. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of ' construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. J. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. K. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. r TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 121318 Page 6 of 7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS L. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. M. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire- retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. N. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire- prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show 111procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers,when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building,when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. r TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 015000 ' 121318 Page 7 of 7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full ' operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing ' daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit ' availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar ' facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated r with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. ' 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION r r r r 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 016000 121318 Page 1 of 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; ' product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers'standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, ' physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named, including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product ' description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable ' products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. ' Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products"Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. ' B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. ' B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power- operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 016000 121318 Page 2 of 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700"Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION C ON 016000 121318 Page 3 of 3 IPRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the I Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 1 B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. I 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. I 4. Manufacturers List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on I Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics included in the Drawings and Specifications are based on the named product. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of I the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures"for substitutions for convenience. I 6. Other Products: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product I that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of I product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range"or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will I select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS I A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the I Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, sustainable design characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. I 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. I Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfysubmittal other a sub ttal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements. I PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page 1 of 7 1 EXECUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of ' subsequent work. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. l 1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting and patching to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations. c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate. ' d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations. 2. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts for Hazardous Materials: If hazardous waste is generated, submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit one copy signed by land surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and • 111 details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection ' 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include but are not limited to the following: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page 2 of 7 EXECUTION a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. 111c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. I. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1 B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that,when installed,will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page 3 of 7 EXECUTION 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: ' 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate ' fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation ' to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. ' 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. ' 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities ' having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more ' locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page4of7 EXECUTION , 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property)for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in spaces without a finished ceiling, unless otherwise noted. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no pail of llie Wolk is subjeuled to s or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. ' E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page 5 of 7 EXECUTION 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing ' anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints ' for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work. 1. Comply with Section 017700"Closeout Procedures"for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. ' 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." ' F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 1 G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. ' 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. ' 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials ' and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into ' retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ' 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page6of7 EXECUTION I color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS I A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work.Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017300 121318 Page 7 of 7 IEXECUTION I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the I remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed I or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING I A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. IC. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. IE. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." I 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. I B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017419 121918 Page 1 of 5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated spoil areas on Owner's property. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition and construction waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be ' uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information (a sample report form is available upon request): 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 1 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled)as a percentage of total waste. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, or individual employed and assigned by General Contractor, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. 1. Waste management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator. ' B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in ' Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management ' coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017419 121918 Page 2 of 5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. Sample forms are available upon request. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed I of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work in compliance with Section 024119 "Selective Demolition." 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphalt paving. b. Concrete. c. Concrete reinforcing steel. d. Brick. e. Wood studs. f. Wood joists. g. Plywood and oriented strand board. h. Wood paneling. i. Wood trim. j. Structural and miscellaneous steel. k. Rough hardware. I. Roofing. m. Insulation. n. Doors and frames. o. Door hardware. p. Metal studs. q. Gypsum board. r. Acoustical tile and panels. s. Carpet. 1 ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017419 121918 Page 3 of 5 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL t. Carpet pad. I u. Demountable partitions. v. Equipment. w. Cabinets. x. Plumbing fixtures. I y. Piping. z. Supports and hangers. aa. Valves. bb. Sprinklers. I cc. Mechanical equipment. dd. Refrigerants. ee. Electrical conduit. I ff. Copper wiring. gg. Lighting fixtures. hh. Lamps. ii. Ballasts. jj. Electrical devices. kk. Switchgear and panelboards. II. Transformers. I 2. Construction Waste: a. Masonry. b. Lumber. c. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. I g. Insulation. h. Carpet and pad. i. Gypsum board. j. Piping. I k. Electrical conduit. I. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. I 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Wood pallets. I 8) Plastic pails. m. Construction Office Waste: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following construction office waste materials: 1) Paper. I 2) Aluminum cans. 3) Glass containers. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, l transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." IB. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017419 121918 Page 4 of 5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL I C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged and recycled. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls"for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. ' 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. 1 B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017419 121918 Page5of5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor as ' often as required to prevent overfilling bins. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. ' B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. ' D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. E. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. F. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. G. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals. I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. J. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive. 1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by material and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by material and size. ' L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by material and size. M. Lamps: Separate lamps by type and store according to requirements in 40 CFR 273. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. D. Paint: Seal containers and store by type. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. ' B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. END OF SECTION TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121318 SECTION 017700 Page 1 of 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017700 121318 Page 2 of 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will I prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit final completion photographic documentation. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items(punch list). 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017700 121318 Page 3 of 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner by uploading to web-based project software site, and as ' paper copies with operations and maintenance manuals as indicated in 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the ' surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use ' products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. ' e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. ' Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing ' compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess ' lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of ' diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017700 121318 Page 4 of 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ' p. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000"Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over"UL"and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017823 121318 Page 1 of 5 ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance ' manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency information. 3. Systems and equipment operation information. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance information. 5. Product maintenance information. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. ' 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. ' 1. In addition to copies required by Architect, submit one copy to Commissioning Authority for concurrent review. 2. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operation and ' maintenance submittals is acceptable. 3. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect or by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. ' C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form when directed by Owner or Owner's Representative. Architect, through Owner's Representative, will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's, and Owner's Representative's comments. Submit each corrected manual prior to submission of final payment application. D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. ' 1.4 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. I1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document ' files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system ' and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017823 121318 Page2of5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, , subsystem, and equipment. Combine emergency, operation, and maintenance information for subsystems, equipment, and components of each system. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 1.6 EMERGENCY INFORMATION A. Emergency Information: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Content: Organize into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and-signats. Include- - •• '•'` - • :„ '- i.- : -: :- :- -- : -:tifieation-of-I-nstallef,-- supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION INFORMATION A. Systems and Equipment Operation Information:Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017823 121318 Page 3 of 5 IOPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual I Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. I 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. I 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. I 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. I 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. I 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. I 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. I 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. I 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. I E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. I 1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include I manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. I2. Prepare in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and I service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by I product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where I applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017823 121318 Page 4 of 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA , 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required I lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers'forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone I number of service agent. I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals. 1.9 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A. Product Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Content: Organize into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENT SECTION 017823 121318 Page 5 of 5 ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 1 E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017839 121318 Page 1 of 3 ' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL r 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the ' following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files. ' 2) Submit each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. ' C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS ' A. Record Drawings: Maintain annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled or one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record drawings to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record drawings. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. Ic. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record drawings to corresponding photographic documentation. ' 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. ' k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. ' n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017839 121318 Page2of3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' 4. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file as follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS" included in a prominent location. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. 1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. , 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract I Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017839 121318 Page 3 of 3 ' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I 1 1 I I 1 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017900 121318 Page 1 of 4 1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including ' the following: 1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Qualification Data: For facilitator or instructor and videographer. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of ' performance-based test. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording. ' 2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s)for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements,"experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to ' demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. ' 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. ' 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017900 121318 Page 2 of 4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect. 1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM 1 A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project record documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017900 121318 Page 3 of 4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. 1.7 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823"Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 1.8 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least two weeks' advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a performance-based test. F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner upon request or remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology. 1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive or by uploading to web-based Project software site. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 017900 I 121318 Page 4 of 4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING I 3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications. ' 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents: a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. Email address. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. 1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes. 111 a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment. D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required. E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration during, or dubbing audio narration after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. I G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) I PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION I I 1 I I 1 I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 024119 121718 Page 1 of 5 ISELECTIVE DEMOLITION I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: I 1. Section 011000 "Summary"for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution"for cutting and patching procedures. 1.2 DEFINITIONS IA. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. I B. Remove and Salvage: Detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse or store. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. ID. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. I E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. I 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. IB. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control, and for noise control. IIndicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each I activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. I 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with I requirements for Progress Photographs in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." Submit before the Work begins. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 024119 121718 Page 2 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION I F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is required. This work will be specified by Owner's hazardous material consultant. D. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 111 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. D. Coordinate hazardous material remediation with building demolition operations. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 024119 121718 Page 3 of 5 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings or preconstruction I photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION IA. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. I 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. I B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Coordinate with Owner and arrange to shut off indicated services/systems through Owner or utilities I with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of I services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug I remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment I and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. I g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 PROTECTION I A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. I 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. I 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in I Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 6. Protect existing site improvements and landscaping to remain. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. I C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 024119 121718 Page 4 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION I 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame- cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch in compliance with NFPA 51B for flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3._ Protect items from dam-•- • s :• ••• is • .•e, 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power- driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 024119 121718 Page 5 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Division 07 roofing sections for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION r 1 1 I I I 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 1 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. ' D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. F. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's"Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 2 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, inch, minimum. — C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 3 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 1 reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. H. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: a. Greenstreak. b. Williams Products, Inc. 2. Profile: Flat dumbbell with center bulb, unless otherwise noted, sized to suit joint. B. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free ' hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch. 1. Products: a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal. b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite. c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 4 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum water-vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck II 15 mil. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Product: BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Confilm. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating, for slabs that will not receive bonded floor coverings. 1. Products: a. The Euclid Chemical Company, an RPM company; Kurez DR-100. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. 2. VOC Content: VOC content of 100 g/L or less. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, for slabs that receive adhered floor coverings. Provide certification by curing compound manufacturer that curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering. 1. Products: a. Creteseal; CS2000. b. Sinak Corporation ; The Cure WCE. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Vocomp-20. 2. VOC Content: VOC content of 50 g/L or less. E. CS-1, Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: 111 a. Dayton Superior; Cure &Seal 1315 EF. b. The Euclid Chemical Company, an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX. c. SpecChem, LLC; Cure&Seal WB 25. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Vocomp-30. 2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. _ Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. , TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 5 of 11 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. I2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. I 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL I A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs I based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash I or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or I other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 1 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on Structural Drawings. I 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.42 for slabs, 0.50 for all other concrete. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours I to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, I and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. l C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. ID. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 6of11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE I E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 111 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits,joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 2. Lap over footings or seal to foundation walls. 3. Seal penetrations and repair damages per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 7 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction and Contraction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. I1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction and contraction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated, and no more than 20 feet on center where not indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants,"are indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 8 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 111 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 111 A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish . C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power- driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L)25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F)24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade that receive floor coverings. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. t ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 9 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION I A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. 1 B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. I 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing. I B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. I C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. I D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: I 1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. I 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. I 4. Do not use curing compounds to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments, paint, other concrete, mortar or plaster finishes, fluid applied waterproofing, adhered roofing, floor coverings, or other coverings that rely on forming a bond with concrete surface, unless curing compound manufacturer certifies that their product will not interfere with bonding of the covering product used on Project. a. Removal:After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound where required without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. III I 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by joint filler manufacturer, defer joint filling until concrete 1 has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. I3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. IB. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 10 of 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE I C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 033000 121718 Page 11 of 11 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of I each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. I 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. I 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231 M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. I 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. I 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. I b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of I concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted I by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine I adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance I of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. ID. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 1 I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 055000 121718 Page 1 of 4 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports not specified in other sections. 2. Fasteners. 3. Metal fences. 4. Embeds not specified in other sections. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers'written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for products used. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. II. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. ' C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight(Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts)complying with MFMA-4. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 055000 121718 Page 2 of 4 METAL FABRICATIONS 1. Size and thickness of Channels: As indicated, or if not indicated, as required to support attached or anticipated loads at spans indicated. 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Finish: Coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel in color indicated on Drawings; or hot-dip 111 galvanized after fabrication if no color is indicated. H. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209,Alloy 6061-T6. I I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T6. J. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. K. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. I B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with111 hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and flat washers; Alloy Group 1. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts,washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.-- Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specification# lded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. 1 C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. I it TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 055000 121718 Page 3 of 4 IMETAL FABRICATIONS D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. I E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. I F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. i G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar I items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. I 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 11 A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. I 2.7 METAL FENCES A. Decorative Metal Fences: Galvanized steel commercial ornamental fencing. 1. Product: Ameristar Fence Products; Aegis Plus. I 2. Style: Majestic. 3. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard double powder coat process. a. Color: To be selected by Architect. 2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete I construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL i A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. I 2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. I 1. For galvanized items scheduled to be painted, do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. 1 B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 055000 121718 Page 4 of 4 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. III Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 061000 121718 Page 1 of 5 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Shear wall panels. 3. Wood blocking, furring, cants, and nailers. 4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. I 5. Exterior sheathing. 6. Roof sheathing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS IA. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. I1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. I 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. I 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS I A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 111 2. Shear wall panels. 3. Power-driven fasteners. I 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 111 A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material a tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify I products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 1 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure"or"FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 061000 121718 Page 2 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. D. Wood Panel Products: 1. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. 2. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. E. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's"Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products"or shall be made with no added formaldehyde. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX)for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber and plywood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Load-Bearing and Non-Load-Bearing Partitions, Joists and Rafters: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a. Douglas Fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot- holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch; Select Structural or No. 1 grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 SHEAR WALL PANELS A. Gypsum Shear Wall Panels: ASTM C 1396 Type X gypsum board laminated to 0.027 inch thick ASTM A653, Grade 33, hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet. 1. Product: CEMCO; Sure-Board Series 200. 2. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer. I B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 061000 121718 Page 3 of 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including, but not limited to, blocking, nailers, furring, and rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species: I1. Douglas Fir or Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.7 EXTERIOR SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. a. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than required by span of structural members to which sheathing is applied. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than required by span of structural members to which sheathing is applied. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. For roof, parapet, and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with organic-polymer or other corrosion- 1 protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Adjacent to Stainless Steel: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. E. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002. F. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 061000 121718 Page4of5 ROUGH CARPENTRY G. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws that comply with ASTM C 954, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: 1. KC Metals Products, Inc. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 3. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 111 D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A(HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 1 B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. a_ Sheathing: 1. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. 2. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. 4. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. 5. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 061000 121718 Page 5 of 5 IROUGH CARPENTRY H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty I items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. 1 I. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I K. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening, complying with the I following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. I M. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. I3.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. I B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION IA. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. I B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. I 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8 inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain I moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. I 111 1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. I 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by Ispraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page 1 of 6 IARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Wood trim. 1 5. Shop finishing of architectural woodwork. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work I specified in other Sections, to ensure that architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS IA. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For architectural woodwork. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. I 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. 1 5. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples: 1 1. Lumber and Running Trim: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Paneling and Veneer: 12 inches square, for each species and cut, with veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used. Where applicable, include typical reveal details for each I required profile. 3. Finish Samples: Two sets for each species, finish system, and color, showing full range of grain, color, texture, and finish. i 4. Plastic Laminate: 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 5. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. I Mark top and face of fabric. 6. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS IA. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. I 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. I B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have I been completed in installation areas. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page2of6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions:Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume responsibility for production of architectural woodwork specified in this Section, including fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Manufacturers: 1. Alexander Manufacturing, Inc., 503-666-9491. 111 2. Anderson Woodworks, Ltd., 541-607-8456. 3. Artek Contracting, Inc., 503-641-6877. 4. Bert-Sher, Inc. 503-681-8446. 5. Burgeners Woodworking, 360-694-5571. 6. C.E. Snodgrass, 503-282-7255. 7. Custom Source Woodworking, Inc., 360-491-9365. 8. Faustrollean Fixture, 503-735-4469. 9. Fetzer's Inc., 801-484-6103. 10. Fremont Millwork Co., 541-884-5554. 11. Imperial Woodworking Co., 312-358-6920. 12. J.S. Perrott&Co., 503-234-1880. 13. Legend Custom Woodworking, Inc. 503-669-1000. 14. Master Woodworks, Inc., 503-364-6430. 15. Milltech Group, 800-755-3092. 16. Northwestern Design, 541-956-2312. 17. O.B. Williams Co., 206-623-2494. 18. Pacific Cabinets, Inc., 800-254-5546. 19. TMI Systems Design Corp., 701-456-6716. 20. Uncommon Cabinetry, Inc.541-929-2701. 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the"North American Architectural Woodwork Standards"for custom grade architectural woodwork for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Where the Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced woodwork quality standard, comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as"FSC Pure" or"FSC Mixed Credit"according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004. 2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Type of Construction: Frameless. B. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. C. WD-1, Wood for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Species: White oak. 2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn. 3, Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page 3 of 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match. 6. Core Material: Hardwood plywood or combination core with plywood interlayer. a. Thickness: 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 WOOD CASEWORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. WD-2, Wood for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Material: MDF, 3/4-inch thick. 2. Finish: Painted per Section 099000 "Painting and Coating." a. Colors: As indicated on Drawings. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Type of Construction: Frameless. B. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Products: a. PL-1: Formica Corporation; 2297-PX Terril Plex Finish. b. PL-3: Arpa; 0623 Erre Finish. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS. E. Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match materials indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. F. Core Material: Particleboard, 3/4-inch thick, unless otherwise noted. 1. Shelf Thickness: 3/4-inch for spans up to 32 inches, 1-inch for spans from 32 inches to 42 inches. G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. PL-2, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. 1. Product: Formica Corporation; Citadel Warp 5882-58, Matte finish. B. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. C. Core Material: Particleboard, 3/4-inch thick, unless otherwise noted. 1. Core material at sinks: Exterior-grade plywood, 3/4-inch thick. D. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.7 WOOD TRIM A. WB-1, Wood Base for Transparent Finish: 1. Species and Cut: Match WD-1. B. WB-2, Wood Base for Opaque Finish: Ii. Material and Finish: Match adjacent WD-2. C. For base wider than available lumber, glue for width. Do not use veneered construction. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page 4 of 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK I 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's"Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no added formaldehyde. 2. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea I formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Padding for Custom Seating: Flexible, cellular, slab polyurethane foam, ASTM D 3574, formulated without fire retardants per California Technical Bulletin 117-2013. 1. Color: White. 2. Density Range: High Resiliency(HR)as follows: a. Seats: 2.2 lbs/cu ft. b. Backs: 1.75 lbs/cu ft. 3. Firmness: Indentation Force Deflection (IFD)as follows, per 50 sq in on 20 inch by 20 inch by 4 inch thick specimen: a. Seats: 55 lbs. b. Backs: 36 lbs. 4. Airflow: a. Seats: 3.0 cfm average. b. Backs: 4.0 cfm average. E. UP-1, Upholstery for Custom Seating: 1. Product: Wolf Gordon; Portola. 2. Color/Pattern: Barberry. 3. Fiber Content: 100 percent polyurethane. 4. Backing: Polyester knit. 5. Width: 54 inches. F. UP-2, Upholstery for Custom Seating: 1. Product: Luum; Synaptic 4030-08. 2. Color/Pattern: Transmission. 3. Fiber Content: 100 percent polyurethane. 4. Backing: Polyester knit. 5. Width: 54 inches. 6. Repeat: 4.63 in- =- • • _ , • • -•, :••-= -•** _• match. G. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES I H. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, semiconcealed hinges for overlay doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. I. Back-Mounted Pulls: Doug Mockett& Company, Inc.; DP57B Wire Pull. J. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071. K. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; two-pin plastic with shelf hold-down clip. L. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD-100. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD-200. 5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1 HD-200. M. Locks: Keyed to room entry lockset. I Il TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page 5 of 6 IARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1. Manufacturer: Schlage. I 2. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 3. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. N. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. O. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for I wire passage. 1. Product: Doug Mockett& Company, Inc.; SG Series. 2. Color: Black. .11 P. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, unless otherwise noted, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 11 Q. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS I/ A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide I metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. I D. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.10 FABRICATION IA. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges and corners to 1/16 inch radius unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before I shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install 1 dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. I C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. I D. Wood Trim: Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING IA. General: Shop finish transparent-finished architectural woodwork at manufacturer's shop as specified in this Section. 1. Except where indicated to be shop-applied, refer to Section 099000 "Painting and Coating"for field finishing opaque-finished architectural woodwork. 2. Shop Priming: Shop apply prime coat including backpriming, for field and shop finished items. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk I fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. C. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of I woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. D. Transparent Finish: I1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 064000 121818 Page 6 of 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2. Finish: AWS System 12,water-based polyurethane. 3. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter according to ASTM D 523. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming of concealed surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble woodwork, and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during I` shop fabrication. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches, unless otherwise . indicated, using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 2. Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. G. Wood Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available)to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 2. Install wood trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 inches variation from a straight line. 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair damaged and defective architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in architectural woodwork being in compliance with referenced quality standard. B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective woodwork. C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work after installation of architectural woodwork. I 1. Fill nail holes with matching filler. 2. Apply specified finish coats to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. D. Field Finish: See Section 099000"Painting and Coating"for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. I B. Clean architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072100 121718 Page 1 of 2 ITHERMAL INSULATION I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Glass-fiber/glass mineral wool blanket. 2. Insulation for miscellaneous voids. B. Related Requirements: I 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board"for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustical insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. II 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: For spray-applied polyurethane foam, an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I2.1 GLASS-FIBER/GLASS MINERAL WOOL BLANKET(BATT) A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. I 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 4. Knauf Insulation. I5. Owens Corning. B. Provide glass-fiber or glass mineral wool insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic or bio-based binder and no formaldehyde. 1 C. Glass-Fiber/Glass Mineral Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to substrates. I B. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame- I spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. a. Product: lcynene Inc.; MD-C-200. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of Ipuncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072100 I 121718 Page 2 of 2 THERMAL INSULATION 1 B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION I I I I 1 4 I I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072700 121718 Page 1 of 5 AIR BARRIERS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY I A. Section includes: 1. Self-adhering sheet air barriers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. IB. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. I 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, air barrier Installer, air I barrier system manufacturer's representative, exterior cladding Installer, and other installers whose work interfaces with or affects air barrier. 2. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond 111 testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of products. B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies. I 1. Show locations and extent of air barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. I 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1 B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. 1 C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 4 A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. ii B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS IA. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 1 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072700 121718 Page 2 of 5 AIR BARRIERS I 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air-Barrier Performance:Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357. 2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER A. Vapor-Permeable Nonbituminous Sheet: Minimum 20-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of a breathable carrier film or fabric and an adhesive with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with VOC limits. 1. Products: a. Cosella-Dorken Products, Inc.; Delta-Vent SA. b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Perm-A-Barrier VPS. c. Henry Company; Blueskin VP 160. d. VaproShield; WrapShield SA. 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-Ibf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 40 Ibf; ASTM E 154/E 154M. c. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method. d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 Ibf/sq. in. when tested according to ASTM D 4541 as modified by ABAA. e. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 150 days according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.4 TRANSITION MEMBRANES A. Transition Membrane Selection: Where indicated or recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly, provide products listed below or comparable products by manufacturer of primary air barrier system. 1. Verify compatibility with air-barrier and adjoining materials. B. High-Temperature Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive membrane consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures. 1. Products: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Ultra. b. Henry Company;-_ -=- • - I i - c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT20XL Butyl. d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir HTF. 2. Use: Transition strip at metal copings and similar conditions susceptible to elevated temperatures. C. Foil-Faced Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive composite membrane composed of SBS rubberized asphalt and dual layers of high-strength polyethylene with surface layer of metallic aluminum film. 1. Products: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Perm-A-Barrier Aluminum Flashing. b. Henry Company; HE200AM Metal Clad Weather Barrier. 2. Use: Transition strip at openings. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips,joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials as indicated and as recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS 00 S IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072700 121718 Page 3 of 5 AIR BARRIERS 1. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less. ' C. Stainless-Steel Sheet:ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners. D. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One-or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5-to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer ' and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. E. Joint Sealant: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 1. For joints bordering self-adhering sheet membrane, use ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral- curing silicone; Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, A, 0, and indicated by sealant manufacturer to be compatible with self-adhering sheet membrane. a. Product: Dow Corning Corporation; 758. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier ' manufacturer. 3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. ' B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's ' written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. ' C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material. E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to ' form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air ' barrier. H. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's ' written instructions and details. 3.3 TRANSITION MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Install transition membranes and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written ' instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. 1. Coordinate air barrier installation with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required ' rate and allow it to dry. 4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072700 121718 Page 4 of 5 AIR BARRIERS B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. , E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. 1. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact. Roll transition strip firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Seal interior frame surfaces to transition strip according to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealant recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant. G. Seal around penetrations with termination mastic. H. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.4 SHEET AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135 to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering air- barrier sheet produced for low-temperature application. Do not install low-temperature sheet if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. 2. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 3. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. B. Prepare, treat, and seal inside and outside corners and vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with termin_ .. • •• • . - C. Apply and firmly adhere air barrier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation. 1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water. 2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate. D. Apply continuous air-barrier sheets over accessory strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage air barrier system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of transition membranes, air barrier membrane, flashings, and other components of the air barrier system. B. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components. D. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 072700 121718 Page 5 of 5 AIR BARRIERS E. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with ' requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. ' 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. ' 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. ' 8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 13. All penetrations have been sealed. ' F. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier. G. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above. H. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the ' overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer. ' B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. ' END OF SECTION r TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 076200 121718 Page 1 of 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM i PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes formed flashings and other sheet metal fabrications. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 072700 "Air Barriers"for membrane flashings and related accessory materials. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,joints, and ' seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation. ' 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. i B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, i clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. ' 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 12. Detail custom formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. i C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes. 1. Size: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 076200 121718 Page 2 of 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM I 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's"the NRCA Roofing Manual and SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a111 strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required with smooth, flat surface. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions: a. Color: Match storefront framing. 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. B. High-Temperature Flexible Flashing: As specified in Section 072700 "Air Barriers." C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 076200 121718 Page 3 of 5 ISHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied I coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. I2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release- paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. I E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. I2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal I thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance I requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line, levels, and slopes, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. I 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance I of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. I D. Sealed Joints: Where moveable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. IF. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. I G. Seams in Pre-Finished Metal: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS I A. Opening Flashings and Trim: Fabricate head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to extend beyond wall openings as detailed. Form head and sill flashing with 1-inch-high end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum, 0.032 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. I 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS L IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 076200 121718 Page 4 of 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ' 3. Verify that weather-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Apply slip sheet where required, wrinkle free, before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify I shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark aluminum or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel surfaces. ' B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 111 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions_Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 076200 121718 Page 5 of 5 ISHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION I A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of -wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. I B. Opening Flashings: Install continuous flashings as detailed. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in I 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION IA. Clean off excess sealants. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal I flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. I C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I 1 I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 1 of 7 ' JOINT SEALANTS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. ' 4. Acoustical joint sealants. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ' 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1. Include strips of custom color sealants when required. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint 1 sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: ' 1. Joint-sealant application,joint location, and designation. 2. Joint width and movement capability. 3. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 4. Joint-sealant formulation. 5. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. ' C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are ' needed for adhesion. D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation ' techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 2 of 7 JOINT SEALANTS 3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone, masonry, or other porous substrates. 4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS I A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealants: Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 3 of 7 ' JOINT SEALANTS 2.2 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint- sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Architectural sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match color of adjacent finish, using custom colors if necessary, unless otherwise indicated or approved in writing by Architect. Verify sealant color with Architect where sealant joint adjoins materials of different colors. 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. ' B. Joint Sealant Type 1, Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: 1 a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. C. Joint Sealant Type 2, Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; SilPruf NB. c. Pecora Corporation; 864NST or 895NST. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Joint Sealant Type 3, Silicone, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST. ' 2.5 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint Sealant Type 4: Select one of the following: 1. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent ' movement capability, traffic-and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. a. Products: 1) Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II SG or Urexpan NR 200 2) Tremco Incorporated; THC-900/901. 2. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic-and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade I NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT. a. Product: Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex- 15 LM. B. Joint Sealant Type 5, Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, ' plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic-and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I. 1. Products: a. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex 1cSL. b. Tremco Incorporated;Vutkem 45. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 4 of 7 JOINT SEALANTS , 2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint Sealant Type 6, Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint Sealant Type 7, Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Products: a. Hilti; CP 606 flexible firestop sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. c. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)Type 0 (open-cell material)Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 111 A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. ' TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 5 of 7 JOINT SEALANTS c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. 111 D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. 111 E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 6 of 7 JOINT SEALANTS B. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in I Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut -out,-remove, and repair !. 81-11'.11 •- . -• . • - -• • a-'lately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. I 3.8 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Type 1, Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT, for expansion and control joints with plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement. a. Joint Locations: 1) Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. 2) Joints between plant-precast concrete units. 3) Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 4) Joints in dimension stone cladding. 5) Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies. 6) Joints between different materials listed above. 7) Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 8) Joints bordering acrylic sheet or plastic. 9) Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant Type 2, Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. a. Joint Locations: i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 079200 121718 Page 7 of 7 JOINT SEALANTS 1) Joints between metal panels. 2) Perimeter joints bordering frames of doors, windows, and louvers. 3) Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 3. For joints bordering self adhering sheet membrane and transition assemblies, see Section 072700 "Air Barriers." B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Type 3, Silicone, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 25, NT. 2. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. ' c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Type 4, Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT. 2. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. e. Tile control and expansion joints. f. Control and expansion joints in brick, stone, and tile flooring. g. Joints between different materials listed above. h. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion. 1. Joint Sealant Type 5, Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 25, T, NT. 2. Joint Locations: a. Joints in pedestrian plazas. b. Joints in swimming pool decks. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Type 6, Acrylic Latex. 2. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and partitions. e. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and elevator entrances. g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Type 7,Acoustical Sealant. ' 2. Joint Location: a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION I . 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081113 121718 Page 1 of 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal doors and frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware"for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 COORDINATION 1 A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 111 A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door and frame type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical-and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081113 121718 Page 2 of 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements:Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Deansteel. 5. Door Components, Inc. 6. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 7. Security Metal Products Corp. 8. Steelcraft; an Allegion company. 9. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratingsindicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke-and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Relite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. II2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. I I B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861; SDI A250.4, Physical Performance Level A. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel stiffened. f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard core for fire-rated doors. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, except 0.067 inch for openings exceeding 4 feet wide. b. Sidelite Transom Frames: Fabricated from same material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861; SDI A250.4, Physical Performance Level A. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum G60 or A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. 11 TTSD ELEMENTARYH SC DOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081113 121718 Page3of5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. g. Core: Steel stiffened. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum G60 or A60 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 HOLLOW-METAL RELITES A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. B. Construction: Full profile welded. C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames. D. Provide countersunk, flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as adjacent door assemblies. 2.7 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. ' 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C. Material:ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1 E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow- metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.9 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Sidelite Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081113 121718 Page 4 of 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I 2. Provide countersunk, flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat-or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES I A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal-Frames::Co -: • ••• 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081113 121718 Page 5 of 5 IHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and I perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. I 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. I 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. I 3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. I B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting ISections. END OF SECTION I I 1 I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081400 121718 Page 1 of 3 WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Flush wood doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware"for door hardware for wood doors. 2. Section 088000 "Glazing"for glazing in wood doors. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction. 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door trim for openings. 5. Factory-machining criteria. 6. Factory-finishing or priming specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule including door location, type, size, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 4. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 5. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Requirements for veneer matching. 8. Doors to be factory finished or primed and application requirements. C. Samples: For each type of door and finish required. 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches,with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inchspan. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 081400 121718 Page 2 of 3 WOOD DOORS 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Manufacturers: 1. Eggers Industries. 2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Haley Brothers, Inc. 4. Island Precision Manufacturing Ltd. 5. Lynden Door. 6. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 7. Oregon Door. 8. Oshkosh Door Company. 9. Pacific Architectural Wood Products. 10. Vancouver Door Company. 11. VT Industries Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wood door from single manufacturer. 2.2 WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's"Architectural Woodwork Standards," Custom Grade. 1. Contract Documents may contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. ANSI/WDMA I.S.1A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 1. Extra Heavy Duty: Classrooms, restrooms, assembly spaces, and where indicated. B. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inchthick. C. Certified Wood: Wood doors shall be certified as"FSC Pure" or"FSC Mixed Credit"according to FSC STD- 01-00 and FSC STD-40-004. D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. E. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's"Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no added formaldehyde. F. Cores for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Particleboard-Core Doors: a. Particleboard:ANSFA208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde. b. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. 2. Structural-Composite-Lumber Core Doors: a. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. 1) Screw Withdrawal, Door Face: 550 Ibf. 2) Screw Withdrawal,Vertical Door Edge: 550 Ibf. 2.3 VENEER-FACED FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Species, Cut, Grade, and Matching: Match WD-1 per Section 064000 "Architectural Woodwork." 2. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces. 3. Core: Particleboard, glued wood stave, or structural composite lumber. 4. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTSE S CTION 081400 121718 Page 3 of 3 WOOD DOORS 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W and 1 hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on concealed surfaces. B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C. Transparent Finish: Match WD-1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION r I i I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 083113 121718 Page 1 of 2 IACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. I 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly I minimum 6 by 6 inches in size. C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS I A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of applicable room name and number in which access door is located. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by I a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: I 1. Babcock-Davis. 2. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 3. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. I 4. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Nystrom, Inc. B. Access Doors, General: I 1. Door Size: Minimum 24-inches by 24-inches for crawl access, other sizes as detailed or suitable for maintenance access to concealed equipment and devices. 2. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door, unless otherwise noted. I 3. Hinges: Continuous hinge, unless otherwise noted. 4. Hardware: Cylinder lock to match brand and keyway design of cylinder locks specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." I C. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 1 3. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage. D. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal; I with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door, and concealed hinge. 2. Locations: Fire-rated wall and ceiling. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that indicated for openings in fire-rated assembly penetrated, as I indicated on Code Plans. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage. 5. Latch: Self-latching door hardware with interior release. 2.3 MATERIALS IA. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet , i substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel(CS), exposed. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 083113 121718 Page 2 of 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ' C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead-and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. I 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. END OF SECTION I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121718 SECTION 084113 Page 1 of 5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront framing. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full- size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront. C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 084113 121718 Page 2 of 5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements,"to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. C. Structural Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330/E 330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. G. Water Penetration: Water penetration shall not occur when subjected to specified test procedures or environmental conditions. Water penetration is defined as any water observed on any surface intended to be dry within the system design. Water infiltration past a primary seal is thus considered water penetration for test purposes. 1. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static- TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 084113 121718 Page 3 of 5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement. I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have U-factor of not more than 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Condensation Resistance Factor: Not less than 56 for frame when tested to AAMA 1503. J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Kawneer North America, or comparable products from one of the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2: EFCO Corporation. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 4. United States Aluminum. 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded-or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Product: 451T. 2. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Glazing Plane: Front. 5. Finish: High-performance organic finish. 6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 8. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, I nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure-glazing system of black, one-piece, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets with factory molded corners, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. I 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. E. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip:ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 084113 111 121718 Page 4 of 5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS I 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip:ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 2.6 ACCESSORIES I A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. When exposed, use fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and111 containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Color: Match P-20 per Section 099000"Painting and Coating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 4 O 08 113 121718 Page 5 of 5 IALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration I and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting in 111 contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact I surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants,"to produce weathertight installation. I D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES I A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. I 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, I limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. I 1. Testing Extent: three areas as selected by Architect and testing agency. Test after perimeter sealants have cured at 10, 40, and 75 percent completion of the Work of this Section. 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements"Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. 3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105, modified such that definition of water penetration is same as that provided in Performance Requirements article. Water penetration tests shall be conducted at a static I test pressure equal to that identified in Performance Requirements article (no reduction in field test pressures allowed). C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and I inspections. 1. Correct deficiencies and retest areas of aluminum-framed storefronts until they pass tests and inspections. Test at least one additional area for each area that does not pass initial tests and inspections. ID. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 086 300 121718 Page 1 of 5 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Unit skylights with metal framing. 2. Prefabricated curbs. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal-framed skylights. B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylights. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Indicate structural loadings and reactions to be transmitted to supporting curbs. 3. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior. 4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assembly, showing the following: a. Joinery including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-framed skylights indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For metal-framed skylights, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of metal-framed skylights required for this Project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal framed skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. I B. Special Aluminum-Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes. 1 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 086300 121718 Page 2 of 5 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000"Quality Requirements,"to design metal-framed skylights. B. Structural Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. D. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support. E. Structural-Test Performance: Metal-framed skylights tested according to ASTM E 330, as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified deflection limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Fall Protection: Provide metal framed skylight system, including glazing, that complies with the following: 1. Meet or exceed intent of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23(e)(8)for fall protection without use of fall-guards. 2. See criteria for"Sloped Glazing" in Section 088000"Glazing"for additional requirements for skylight 111 glazing. G. Air Infiltration: Metal-framed skylights with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Metal-framed skylights that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air- pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 8 lbf/sq. ft. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. J. Energy Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights with performance properties specified, as indicated in NFRC Certified Product Directory, based on procedures indicated below: 1. Thermal Transmittance .- a •r : ix-• • . • - • ing areas shall shatl-ftave-U=factur of not more than 0.48 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Submit NFRC Certified Product Directory Number or manufacturer's published test data. K. Condensation Resistance: Metal-framed skylights with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor(CRF)of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1 2.2 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS A. Metal-Framed Unit Skylights: Curb-mounted glazed skylight assemblies supported by aluminum framing. B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Architectural Specialties, Inc., or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Bristolite Skylights. 2. CPI Daylighting Inc. 3. DeaMor Engineered Architectural Products. 4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 5. Super Sky Products, Inc. 6. VELUX America Inc. C. Aluminum Framing Systems: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 086300 121718 Page 3 of 5 1 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS D. Aluminum: Alloy and temper as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish I indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. I 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. E. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. 1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components. G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding I fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M stainless-steel screws. 2. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 3. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. When exposed, use fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. I H. Prefabricated Curb: Extruded-aluminum, self-flashing type. 1. Extruded-Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to suit structural and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52. I 2. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Construction: Double wall. 4. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid type. a. Exposed Insulation: Cover face of insulation exposed to interior of building with aluminum liner. I. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, galvanized steel. J. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. K. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components. L. Framing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. I 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. M. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other I deleterious impurities. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." I B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. I D. Glazing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Where practical, fit and assemble metal-framed skylights in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. I B. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. I 3. Internal guttering systems to drain water passing joints and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 086300 121718 Page 4 of 5 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS a. Locate rafter gutter channels minimum 3/8 inch inside edge of glass support to capture water at intersection of glass and framing. Locate purlin gutters above rafter gutters, interlocked with positive drip tab to force water to drain into rafter gutter. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component. D. Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads. E. Factory-Glazed, Metal-Framed Skylights: I 1. Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Color: Match P-1 per Section 099000"Painting and Coating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 111 A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: I 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with protective coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or wcldcd corncrs. Locate --: •: - - D. Install components to drain water passing joints and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations. F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000"Glazing." G. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch. 2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet but no greater than 1/2 inch over total length. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105. a. Test Procedures: Test under uniform static-air pressure. b. Static-Air-Pressure Difference: Not less than 8 lbf/sq. ft. c. Water Penetration: None. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O MENTS SECTION 086300 121718 Page 5 of 5 IMETAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified I requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. I D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing skylights. Avoid damaging protective coatings and I finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. I C. Protect skylights from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact skylight surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. IEND OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O EMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 1 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. c. Folding doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants shall include Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 4. Do not release hardware templates to door fabricators until issues are resolved. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants shall include Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. 3. Include elevations of doors controlled by electrified door hardware. 4. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware. C. Samples: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch Samples for sheet and 4-inch long Samples for other products. 2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 2 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. �+ E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware. 1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC). 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 111 A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 3 of 12 11 DOOR HARDWARE 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. I b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated below: I a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. I 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS IA. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing I and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies:Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with I NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Smoke-and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke-and draft-control door assemblies are required, I provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch Iwg of water. C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. I D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's I 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: I a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. I 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. I 5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position. 2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE I A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule in Part 3. I R TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 4 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE 2.4 SILENCERS A. Provide in number and type to protect finishes wherever door or hardware will strike adjacent surfaces and materials. Provide 3 rubber silencers for metal door frames that are not equipped with gaskets. 2.5 KEYING A. Keying shall be done by lock manufacturer. III 1. Furnish two keys with each lock and five master keys. Follow keying and master keying schedule established by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. B. Construction Master Keys: For permanent cores, provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. C. Construction Cores: For interchangeable cores, provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.7 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 5 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's"Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches. E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule or as directed by Owner. F. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. G. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware. J. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. K. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment:Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers:Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 1 010419 Page 6 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware required. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated as follows: 1. BES: Best Access Solutions, Inc. 2. GLY: Glynn-Johnson; an Allegion company. 3. IVE: IVES Hardware; an Allegion company. 4. LCN: LCN Closers; an Allegion company. 5. NGP: National Guard Products. 6. NOR: Norton; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 7. PEM: Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. �' 8. RIX: Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 9. SCE: Schlage Electronics; an Allegion company. 10. SCH: Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion company. 11. VON: Von Duprin; an Allegion company. III 12. ZER: Zero International; an Allegion company. HW SET: 01 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON 1 EA REMOVABLE KR4954 STAB 689 VON MULLION 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-XP-98-EO 626 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-QEL-XP-98-NL-CON 626 VON HARDWARE 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20-079 626 SCH 2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-064 626 SCH Jr 1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 630 GLY (BACK TO BACK DOOR) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA TBWMS 689 LCN (BACK TO BACK DOOR) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBWMS 689 LCN 2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE111 1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-26P SCH TO ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH FROM POWER SUPPLY 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK VON I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 7of12 IDOOR HARDWARE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 I PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAMS PROVIDE RISER DIAGRAMS INOTE: 120VAC TO SHARED POWER SUPPLY. HOME RUN FROM POWER SUPPLY TO QEL DEVICE AS FOLLOWS: 200FT/18 AWG, 320FT/16 AWG, 500FT/14 AWG, OR 800FT/12 AWG. IHW SET: 02 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I 8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON 1 EA REMOVABLE KR4954 STAB 689 VON I MULLION 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-XP-98-EO 626 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-QEL-XP98-DT-CON 626 VON I HARDWARE 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-064 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 630 GLY (BACK TO BACK DOOR) I 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA TBWMS 689 LCN (BACK TO BACK DOOR) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBWMS 689 LCN 2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-26P SCH ITO ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH FROM POWER SUPPLY I ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAMS 111 PROVIDE RISER DIAGRAMS NOTE: 120VAC TO SHARED POWER SUPPLY. HOME RUN FROM POWER SUPPLY TO QEL DEVICE AS IFOLLOWS: 200FT/18 AWG, 320FT/16 AWG, 500FT/14 AWG, OR 800FT/12 AWG. HW SET: 03 EACH TO HAVE: IIIQTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA VANDL VESTIBULE ND93JD RHO 626 SCH I LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH I DISTRICT) 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA ST-2731 TBWMS 689 LCN I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 I 010419 Page 8 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE I 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE i HW SET: 04 �! EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN HW SET: 05 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5881 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA INSTITUTION LOCK ND82JD RHO 626 SCH 2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE CON 630 VON 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG14 630 IVE 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG TBWMS 689 LCN III 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH FROM POWER SUPPLY ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 06 1 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 56131 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE ND50JD RHO 626 SCH LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407C;CV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 07 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5881 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY WITH L9456JD 06A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH OCCUPIED INDICATOR 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 1 It TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 9 of 12 IDOOR HARDWARE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER IHW SET: 08 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY WITH L9456JD 06A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH OCCUPIED I INDICATOR 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH I DISTRICT) 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE I1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 09 I EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE I 1 EA INSTITUTION LOCK ND82JD RHO 626 SCH 2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) II 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN II3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE CONNECT WALL MAGNET TO SECURITY. I HW SET: 10 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA VANDL VESTIBULE ND93JD RHO 626 SCH LOCK I 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) I 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 11 1 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE I 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-98-L-2SI-06 626 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20-079 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH I (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 i 010419 Page 10 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE 1 EA RIM CYL XB11-979 626 SCH THUMBTURN 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 12 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY WITH L9456JD 06A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH OCCUPIED INDICATOR 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 13 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE ND50JD RHO 626 SCH II LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 14 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR111 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE -1- EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON 1 EA REMOVABLE KR4954 STAB 689 VON MULLION 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-XP-98-EO 626 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-QEL-XP98-NL-CON 626 VON II HARDWARE 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20-079 626 SCH 2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-064 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH SRI TBWMS 689 LCN 2 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 2 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER PUSH AND PULL SIDE 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 111 1 EA THRESHOLD 546A-223 A ZER I i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 11 of 12 IDOOR HARDWARE 1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-26P SCH TO ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE 1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH I FROM POWER SUPPLY ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 I PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAMS PROVIDE RISER DIAGRAMS I 120VAC TO POWER SUPPLY. HOME RUN FROM POWER SUPPLY TO QEL DEVICE(S)AS FOLLOWS: 200FT/18 AWG, 320FT/16 AWG, 500FT/14 AWG, OR 800FT/12 AWG. ELECTRIFIED EXIT DEVICE MUST BE PROTECTED FROM DIRECT WEATHER. IHW SET: 15 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I3 EA HINGE 5681 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA VANDL VESTIBULE ND93JD RHO 626 SCH LOCK 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) I 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 16 II EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5861 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE I 1 EA VANDL VESTIBULE ND93JD RHO LOCK 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH I (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 111 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE I HW SET: 17 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR I 3 EA HINGE 1 EA PRIVACY WITH 5681 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE L9456JD 06A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH OCCUPIED 1INDICATOR 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH (COORDINATE KEYWAY WITH DISTRICT) I 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 087100 010419 Page 12 of 12 DOOR HARDWARE I END OF SECTION I I 1 I I I I i I I 1 I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 121718 Page 1 of 8 GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows, interior relites, storefront framing, skylights, and doors. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 3. Window film. B. Related Requirements: Section 086300 "Metal-Framed Skylights"for additional performance requirements for skylight glazing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: 1. For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 2. Window Film: For each type of window film, installed on 12-inch square samples of glass representative of the types of glass to which they will be applied. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-E coatings, glass testing agency, and sealant testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass. C. Product Test Reports: For tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer. Where sputter-coated, low-E coatings from a manufacturer with an established certified fabricator program have been specified, provide sputter-coated insulating glass units manufactured by a certified fabricator. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 121718 Page 2 of 8 GLAZING B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Piooc0 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. In addition to glass manufacturer's replacement warranty, include a guarantee for reglazing units that become defective at no cost to the Owner within two years from date of Substantial Completion. I iTTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121718 SECTION 088000 Page 3 of 8 IGLAZING PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads I (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. I B. Delegated Design: Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements,"to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under I conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads:As indicated on Drawings. 3. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001. 4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/90 times the short-side length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less. I 5. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated or required, provide glazing that complies with 4 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 1 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to I NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL I A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." I 2. AAMA Publications:AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing,"and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." I 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated or required, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having I jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one Icomponent lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 11 121718 Page 4 of 8 GLAZING E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. F. Safety Glazing: Provide fully tempered float glass in each location where safety glazing is required by the Building Code and an acceptable safety glazing material is not indicated. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, unless otherwise indicated. 1 B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT(fully tempered), Condition A(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear)or Class 2 (tinted)as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. a. Limit roll-wave distortion to 0.005-inch or less peak-to-valley depth. 2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear)or Class 2 (tinted)as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass:ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted)as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's"Engineering Standards Manual." 111 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with interlayer indicated to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Perimeter Spacer: Thermally improved spacer made from black stainless steel or one of the following products: a. Azon USA Inc.; Warm-Light, dark bronze anodized. 111 b. DGS Group; Chromatech; Ultra Spacer Bar. a)—Color Black. c. Technoform Glass Insulation; TGI-Spacer. a) Color: Black. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: I 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers'written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Black. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, engineered for expected joint movement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Advanced Materials-Silicones. c. Pecora Corporation. I i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 121718 Page 5 of 8 GLAZING d. Tremco Incorporated. 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as J recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 BUTT-GLAZED RELITES I A. Structural Sealant for Butt-Glazed Relites:ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in butt-glazed assembly indicated. 1. Color: Clear. B. Frameless Relite Channel: Clear anodized aluminum head and sill channels sized for glass thickness used in butt-glazed assembly, including black glazing gaskets to secure glass in channel. I C. Pivoting Glass Door Hardware: 1. Pivots: C.R. Laurence Co.;CRL Commercial Patch Hardware. a. Top Pivot: PH2OABS. b. Bottom Pivot: PH10CBS. 1c. Finish: Brushed Stainless. 2. Pulls: C.R. Laurence Co,; CRL 12 inch Glass Mounted Solid Standard Pull Handle, CS12X12BS. a. Finish: Brushed Stainless. I 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. I B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Cured silicone material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Cured silicone blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side walking). IF. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS if A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. I 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. RB. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 1 121718 Page 6 of 8 GLAZING PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 111 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted,with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. I J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. I I i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 121718 Page 7 of 8 GLAZING I 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them I fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. I D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. I F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket I applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) J A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints I miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of ,, openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. I D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket Imanufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure e complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 1 C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 BUTT-GLAZED RELITE INSTALLATION I A. Install frameless relite channels and glazing as indicated on Drawings. B. Mask glass and adjacent metal surfaces prior to sealant application. C. Temporarily support glass edges to be joined prior to and during sealant application. I D. Install structural sealant per sealant manufacturer's recommendations, filling void completely. Tool joint immediately with wood or other non-scratching tool. Do not use plastic. Work out all discontinuities and bubbles. Strip adjacent masking tape after tooling before skin coating forms. IE. Cure sealant as recommended by manufacturer before removing blocking. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 088000 121718 Page 8 of 8 GLAZING B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged from natural during construction period. D. Wash both exposed surfaces of glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." 3.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS SCHEDULE A. CTG-1: Clear fully tempered float glass, 1/4-inch minimum thickness. B. CTG-2: Clear fully tempered float glass, 1/2-inch minimum thickness. 3.10 LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. CLG-1: Clear laminated glass with two plies of 1/8-inch thick float glass and 0.060-inch thick clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 3.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Basis-of-Design Products: Coated glass products by Guardian Industries Corp., or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Cardinal Glass Industries. 2. Pilkington North America Inc. 3. Viracon, Inc. 4. Vitro Architectural Glass. B. CILG-1: Low-e-coated, clear, insulating laminated glass, 1-1/16-inch overall unit thickness. 1. Outdoor Lite: 1/4-inch thick clear heat-strengthened float glass. 2. Interspace: 1/2-inch thick air space. 3. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of 1/8-inch thick heat-strengthened float glass and 0.060-inch thick clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 4. Low-E Coating: SNX 62/27 on second surface. 5. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent minimum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum. 1 C. CILVG-1: Ceramic-coated, insulating laminated vision glass, type and thickness as required to meet skylight performance requirements indicated in Section 086300. 1. Outdoor Lite: Clear glass. 2. Interspace: 1/2-inch thick air space. 3. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with 0.060-inchthick clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 4. _ tow-E-Coating: ame as - 5: Ceramic Coating Location: Third surface. 6. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: 1/8-inch translucent dots at 1/4-inch staggered centers, 40 percent coverage. 3.12 WINDOW FILM A. WFM-1, Window Film. 1. Product: 3M; Crystal. 2. Color: Dusted White 7725SE-314. END OF SECTION I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121718 SECTION 092216 Page 1 of 3 IINON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Deflection tracks for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For suspended ceiling systems, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Include manufacturer's literature or I ICC Reports and identification of connection devices and approved loading capabilities. 1. Manufacturer's Data: When using a standard grid suspension system for gypsum board ceilings in lieu of an Engineered Design, submit copies of manufacturer's literature and ICC Reports indicating capacity of system. Include fixture schedule and other ceiling supported equipment and their weights, with connection devices and approved loading capabilities. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. I B. Evaluation Reports: For structurally equivalent framing, if used, gypsum board grid suspension system, post-installed anchors, and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel IFraming Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design suspended gypsum board ceiling systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design I criteria indicated. 1. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceiling systems, with or without lighting fixtures, air terminals, or other ceiling mounted items, shall comply with the requirements of ASCE 7-05 and the building code. P B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. IB. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for I studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: 1) Blazeframe Industries; BlazeFrame Bare Slotted Track. I 2) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 3) SCAFCO Corporation; Slotted Track SLT or SDLT. 4) The Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 5) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092216 121718 Page 2 of 3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING I 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers:ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.106 inch in diameter. C. Seismic(Compression)Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. D. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 635, direct-hung system composed of main runners and cross runners that interlock. 1. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS I A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. I 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. I C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 1 E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on approved delegated design submittal drawings;in accordance with referenced installation standards for assembrty-types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install 111 supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O MENTS SECTION 092216 121718 Page3of3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING D. Seismic Bracing: As required to meet referenced seismic performance requirements. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main and cross runners to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured ' lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION I 1 I I 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092900 121718 Page 1 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL A. SUMMARY B. Section Includes: ' 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing board. C. Related Requirements: ' 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing, gypsum sheathing for exterior walls and soffits, and shear wall panels. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing"for suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review acoustical wall assembly details including terminations at structure and at non-acoustical assemblies, control joints and trim accessories, special gypsum board finishing requirements, and other unique conditions. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: ' 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. ' 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies meeting indicated STC ratings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ' ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that ' correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Ii.A. Manufacturers: American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092900 121718 Page 2 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD 5. PABCO Gypsum. 6. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X:ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. I C. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability. 1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or as required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. I D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture-and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X, unless otherwise noted. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10, as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TILE BACKING BOARD A. Cement Board: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325,with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Custom Building Products. c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (control)joint. d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Tear Away L Bead: Plastic L-bead with compression gasket. 1. Product: Trim-Tex, Inc.; Super Seal Tear Away L Bead. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Profiles: a. Adjustable Partition Closure: Gordon; Mullion Mate with Series 911 Final Forms I. 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092900 9 900 121718 Page 3 of 5 ' GYPSUM BOARD 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. ' 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (batts without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. ' D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer ' present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. For required control joints not shown on Drawings, verify locations with Architect prior to installation. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. ' E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints ' at corners of framed openings. F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except ' in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. ' 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. ' H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092900 I 121718 Page 4 of 5 GYPSUM BOARD I I. Attachment to Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. Acoustical Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install acoustical insulation before installing gypsum panels unless insulation is readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Horizontal and vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type C: As indicated on Drawings and where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 3. Mold-Resistant Type: At wet and high moisture areas. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods:Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. I C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing I members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers, intermediate layers, and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING BOARD A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, install at locations indicated to receive tile, unless otherwise indicated. I B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces if required to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES I A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by I Architect for visual effect. C. Trim: Install in the following locations: I 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Tear Away L Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. I E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD I A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 092900 121718 Page 5 of 5 1 GYPSUM BOARD B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. ' C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: ' 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 4:At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page 1 of 7 TILING ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Ceramic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Glazed wall tile. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 1 5. Metal edge trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board"for tile backing board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ' ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17,which are contained in its"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: Ii. Tile type. 2. Installation method. 3. Pattern and jointing pattern. ' 4. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 5. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 6. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. ' 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Metal edge trim in 6-inch lengths. 4. Color samples for tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. ' 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. B. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and ' color indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page 2 of 7 TILING 1 B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Crack isolation membrane. 2. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated in Material Schedule at the end of PART 3. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard bullnose caps, internal and external corners, and tapered transition tiles where indicated and where required for smooth transitions between adjacent surfaces. C. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation e e • =..=• - _•-_ -• D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back-or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back-or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide tile products with dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF)of not less than 0.42 when tested in accordance with ANSI A137.1 requirements. B. See Material Schedule in Part 3 for list of tile products. 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page3of7 TILING 2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. ' B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Product: Noble Company(The); Nobleseal CIS. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements. I 2. C-Cure. 3. Custom Building Products. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. MAPEI Corporation. 6. Merkrete Systems, Parex USA, Inc. 7. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. B. Modified Dry-Set Mortar(Thinset): ANSI A118.15. 1. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15. C. Modified Dry-Set Mortar for Large and Heavy Tile (LHT Mortar): Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.15. 1. Use LHT Mortar for floor or wall tiles with at least one side greater than 15 inches. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS ' A. General: See Material Schedule at the end of PART 3 for color and location. B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Laticrete International, Inc., or comparable products by one of the following: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements. ' 2. C-Cure. 3. Custom Building Products. 4. MAPEI Corporation. 5. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. C. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Product: Permacolor. 2. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Product: SpectraLOCK 2000 IG. ' 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. E. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. ' B. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Cementitious underlayment, exceeding requirements of ASTM C627. C. Metal Edge Trim: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, satin anodized aluminum. ' 1. Manufacturer: Schluter Systems L.P. 2. Profiles: a. Cove Base: DILEX-AHK. b. Tile Transition: RENO-AEU. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page 4 of 7 TILING U E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard zero VOC product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Product: Custom Building Products; Aqua Mix Grout Sealer, or sealer recommended by tile and grout manufacturer. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile- setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile I units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's"Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation"for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile"that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page 5 of 7 TILING tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap I tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Metal Edge Trim: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.6 PROTECTION ' A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation: TCNA F115, thinset mortar; epoxy grout. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set-portland cement mortar or LHT mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. R TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 093000 121818 Page 6 of 7 TILING I 2. Tile Installation: TCNA F125-Full, thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set-portland cement mortar or LHT mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations: 1. Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F, thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber- , cement backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set-portland cement mortar or LHT mortar. b. Grout: High-performance sanded or unsanded grout, as recommended for joint thickness indicated. 3.8 MATERIAL SCHEDULE A. CT-1, Floor Tile: 1. Product: Pental Surfaces; Cocciopesto. 2. Color: Absolute. 3. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 4. Installation: Stacked. 5. Grout: G-1. B. CT-2, Wall Tile: 1. Product: Daltile; Modern Dimensions. 2. Trim Piece: S-44C9 Bullnose. 3. Color: Ice Gray K176 Field Tile. 4. Size: 4-1/4 by 12-3/4 inches. 5. Installation: Stacked. 6. Grout: G-2. C. CT-3A, Floor Tile: 1. Product: Daltile; Keystones. 2. Color: Suede Gray Speckle D208. 3. Size: 2 by 2 inches. 4. Installation: Monolithic. 5. Grout: G-3. D. CT-3B, Tile Base: Same as CT-3A, except: 1. Product: Daltile; Build-up Base MB-5A. E. CT-4B, Wall Tile: 1. Product: Daltile; Rittenhouse Square. 2. Color: Biscuit. 3. Finish: 70 percent glossy, 30 percent matte, random blend. 4. Size: 3 by 6 inches. 5. Installation: Stacked (vertical). 6. Grout: G-6. F. CT-4D: Same as CT-4B, except: 1. Grout: G-4. G. CT-5B: Same as CT-4B, except: 1. Grout: G-5. H. CT-5D: Same as CT-4B, except: 1. Grout: G-7. I. CT-6, Wall Tile: 1. Product: Daltile; Keystones. 2. Color: Match existing. 3. Size: 2 by 2 inches. 4. Installation: Monolithic. 5. Grout Color: Match existing. J. G-1, Grout Color: Laticrete; 78 Sterling Silver. K. G-2, Grout Color: Laticrete; 78 Sterling Silver. L. G-3, Grout Color: Laticrete; 60 Dusty Grey. I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121818 SECTION 093000 Page7of7 1 TILING M. G-4, Grout Color: Laticrete; Permacolor Select AnyColor to match P-6. I N. G-5, Grout Color: Laticrete; Permacolor Select AnyColor to match P-5. O. G-6, Grout Color: Laticrete; Permacolor Select AnyColor to match P-4. P. G-7, Grout Color: Laticrete; Permacolor Select AnyColor to match P-7. 1 END OF SECTION I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 095100 121718 Page 1 of 4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: ' 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical ceiling unit, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical ceiling units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Provide products listed by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or comparable products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. ' 2. Rockfon (Roxul Inc.). 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 095100 121718 Page2of4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements,"to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 and the local building code. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus pre-consumer recycled content not less than that available in basis-of-design products specified. C. Glass-Fiber-Based Units: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. , D. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. E. ACT-1,Acoustical Panel: Mineral base with painted finish. 1. Product: Ultima 1913. 2. Color: White. 3. LR: Not less than 0.90. 4. NRC: Not less than 0.75. 5. CAC: Not less than 35. 6. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. 7. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 8. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. 9. Recycled Content: 86 percent. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. B. Double-Web, Heavy Duty Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation. 1. Product: Prelude XL. 2: maize: 15/16-inch-wide. 3. Finish: Exposed surfaces with baked polyester paint to match color of acoustical panel. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct I Hung"or as required by seismic performance requirements, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung")will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire. C. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. E. Seismic Clip System: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure main and cross runners in place without use of 2 inch wall angle. F. Hold-Down (Retention)Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clips. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 095100 121718 Page 3 of 4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical ceiling units attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical ceilings. B. Examine acoustical ceiling units before installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. ' C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical ceiling units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width units at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. ' 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 6. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in- place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 095100 121718 Page4of4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS I 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. I 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove I and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit. I 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension- system runners and moldings. 2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas acting as pressurized plenums; space 24 inches o.c. on all cross runners unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass I tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION I 1 I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096 500 121718 Page 1 of 5 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ii. Resilient floor tile. 2. Resilient sheet flooring. 3. Resilient base. 4. Resilient molding accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. 1. Include flooring layouts, pattern or grain direction, seam locations, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 2. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color, texture, and pattern specified, in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inches or 12 inches long for linear items. D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each floor covering product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient product to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of ' floor tile installed. 2. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed. 3. Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, for each color, pattern, and type of product installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. I1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during time period from 72 hours before installation until 72 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for at least 72 hours after installation. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096500 121718 Page 2 of 5 RESILIENT FLOORING I D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor covering, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING A. RF-1, Resilient Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Marmoleum Cirrus, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Johnsonite, A Tarkett Company. 2. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length but not less than 78 inches wide. 3. Thickness: 0.10 inch. 4. Heat-Welding Bead: For seamless installation. 5. Color: 3368 Grey Iron. 2.3 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE A. RFT-1, Resilient Floor Tile: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Migrations BBT, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Mannington Mills, Inc. 111 b. Tarkett, Inc. 2. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 5. Color: Platinum Gray T3501. 2.4 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A. RB-1, Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Roppe Corporation, USA; Pinnacle, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco. c. Johnsonite, A Tarkett Company. 2. Style and Location: a. Straight(toeless) at carpet. b. Cove(with toe)at resilient floor coverings. c. Butt to (fit-to-floor)at concrete flooring and where indicated. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Height: 4 inches. 5. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 6. Inside and Outside Corners: Preformed. 7. Color: 123 Charcoal. 2.5 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer: Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Description: Rubber transition strips. C. Profile and Dimension: #50 Tile/Carpet Joiner, 7/32 inch. , D. Colors: 1. 123 Charcoal at CPT-1. 2. 100 Black at CPT-2 and WM-1. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O EMENTS SECTION 096500 121718 Page 3 of 5 IRESILIENT FLOORING 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 1 A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit products I and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: I 1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: Match flooring. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other I Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to resilient product manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of I resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. I 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient product manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient product manufacturer. I Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no I fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. 5. Moisture Mitigation Membrane: Subject to Architect's approval, where concrete substrates cannot be brought into compliance with moisture testing requirements or manufacturer's written I recommendations for adhesion, apply a moisture mitigation membrane recommended by resilient product manufacturer and moisture mitigation membrane manufacturer for applicable substrates and conditions. I C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient flooring products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are be installed.Ito 1. At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. I3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient products. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096500 121718 Page 4 of 5 RESILIENT FLOORING B. Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built- in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, accessible sink cabinets, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. E. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. 3.4 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so floor tiles s at opposite edges of room are of equal width or from start points indicated on Drawings. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated. B. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles. 3.5 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. I B. Lay out resilient sheet floorings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of floorings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks). 3.6 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact 11 with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.7 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. I B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 121718 C ON 096500 Page 5 of 5 RESILIENT FLOORING 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 1 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient flooring surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply floor polish to RFT-1 in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. 1. Allow drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation)to disappear before covering linoleum flooring. F. Demonstration: Provide instruction for Owner's maintenance personnel on proper procedures for maintaining resilient flooring. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096800 121818 Page 1 of 5 CARPETING 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Carpet tile. 2. Sheet carpet. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096500 "Resilient Flooring"for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. I1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. I c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: For carpet installation, plans showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each type, color, and texture of carpet and accessory required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Sheet Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample. D. Product Schedule: For carpet. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For carpet, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096800 121818 Page 2 of 5 CARPETING 2. Sheet Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard." B. Deliver sheet carpet in original mill protective covering with mill register numbers and tags attached. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard"for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,wet- work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with111 adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET, GENERAL A. Carpet shall comply with testing and product requirements of CRI's"Green Label Plus"testing program. 111 2.2 CARPET TILE A. CPT-1, Carpet Tile: 1. Product: InterfaceFLOR, LLC; AE310. 2. Color: 104626 Iron. 3. Size: 19.7 by 13.Tinches. 4. Backing: GlasBacRE. 5. Installation: Brick. 6. Fiber Content: 100 percent recycled content nylon 6. 7. Pile Construction: Tufted Textured Loop. 8. Density: 5760 oz./cu. yd. 9. Pile Height: 0.18 inch. 10. Stitches: 9 stitches per inch. 11. Gage: 1/12. 12. Tufted Yarn Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd. 13. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 14. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 15. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140. 16. Additional Performance Characteristics: a. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf according to ASTM D 2646. b. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. c. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096800 121818 Page 3 of 5 CARPETING d. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. e. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units)according to AATCC 16, Option E. f. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV according to AATCC 134. B. CPT-2, Carpet Tile: 1. Product: Mohawk Group; Rookie Tile GT155. 2. Color: 927 Revived Ash. 3. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 4. Backing: EcoFlex NXT. 5. Installation: Quarter turn. 6. Fiber Type: Duracolor Premium Nylon. 7. Pile Construction: Tufted. 8. Density: 5732 oz./cu. yd. 9. Pile Thickness: 0.157 inch. 10. Stitches: 8.8 stitches per inch. 11. Gage: 1/10. 12. Face Weight: 25 oz./sq. yd. 13. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 14. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 15. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140. 16. Additional Performance Characteristics: a. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf(445 N)according to ASTM D 2646. b. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. c. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). d. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. e. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.3 SHEET CARPET A. WM-1, Walk-Off Mat: 1. Product: Tandus Flooring, Inc.; Abrasive Action II. 2. Color: Winter Grey 19103. 3. Backing: Powerbond Cushion RS. 4. Fiber Type: TDX Nylon. 5. Pile Construction: Accuweave Patterned Loop. 6. Pile Height: 0.187 inch. 7. Stitches: 8 stitches per inch. 8. Gage: 1/12. 9. Face Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 10. Roll Width: 6 feet. 11. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 12. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 13. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140. 14. Additional Performance Characteristics: c. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646. b. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. c. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 1.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet, and are recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1 1. For carpet tile, provide pressure-sensitive adhesive for releasable installation. 2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096800 121818 Page4of5 CARPETING C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. I B. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. C. Concrete Substrates: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000"Cast-in- Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates I have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 2. Moisture Mitigation Membrane: Subject to Architect's approval, where concrete substrates cannot be brought into compliance with moisture testing requirements or manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesion, apply a moisture mitigation membrane recommended by carpet manufacturer and moisture mitigation membrane manufacturer for applicable substrates and conditions. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's"Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone,without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum cleans.. - - e e— _9 _ =e ••••_e . - •- . -installing carpet_ 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, removable flanges, alcoves, open-bottomed obstructions such as counters and cabinets without toe kicks, and similar openings. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 CARPET TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive in accordance with carpet tile manufacturers written recommendations. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 096800 121818 Page 5 of 5 CARPETING D. Install patterns parallel to walls and borders, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SHEET CARPET INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-glue-down installation. B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instructions and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: I1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI's"Carpet Installation Standard." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 098400 121818 Page 1 of 4 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the 1 following: 1. Sound-absorbing panels. 2. Fabric-wrapped tack panels. 3. Panel facing materials. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC, Noise Reduction Coefficient: Sound absorption measured according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 2. Include details at panel head, base,joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. 3. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. 4. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. C. Samples: For each type of panel and fabric facing. I1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. 2. Panel: 12-inch-square fabric-wrapped core Sample at corner, showing edge profile and corner wrap detail. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of unit. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal instructions. 1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 yards, full width of bolt. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and unit manufacturers'written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install units until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive the units. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 098400 121818 Page 2 of 4 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS I C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. D. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following: a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics"or"Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286. 2.3 PANEL UNITS A. AP-1, Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core. 1. Product: Kinetics Noise Control; High Impact Hardside. 2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips, secured to substrate. 3. Core: Manufacturer's standard glass-fiber board. a. Core-Face Layer: Manufacturer's standard tackable, impact-resistant, high-density board. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame. 5. Edge Profile: Square. 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 7. Facing Material: FB-1 with white scrim. 8. Acoustical Performance: NRC of 1.0. 9. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1-1/8 inch. 10. Panel Width and Height: As indicated on Drawings. B. FWTP-1, Fabric-Wrapped Tack Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back edge border of core. 1. Product: Homasote; N.C.F.R. Structural Homasote. 2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips, secured to substrate. 3. Core: 1/2 inch thick tackable, impact-resistant, high-density fiber board. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame. 5. Edge Profile: Square. 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 7. Facing Material: FB-1. 111 8. Panel Width and Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 PANEL FACING MATERIALS A. FB-1, Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated. 111 1. Manufacturer: Carnegie; Xorel. 2. Product Line/Pattern: Strie 6423. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 098400 121818 Page 3 of 4 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS 3. Color: 817. 4. Fiber Content: 100 percent Xorel, 85 percent biobased. 5. Width: 56 inches. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Core Materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Board: Compressed molded glass-fiber board with a nominal density of 16 to 18 lb/cu. ft. 3. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Board for Face Layer: 1/8-inch-thick layer of compressed molded glass-fiber board with a nominal density of 16 to 18 lb/cu. ft. laminated to face of core. B. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows: 1. Metal Clips: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. B. Edge Hardening: For glass-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached. C. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags. D. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter. I1. Square Corners: Tailor corners. E. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Where field cutting of panels is unavoidable, rewrap cut edge in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to fully cover core material and match appearance of factory-wrapped panel edges. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate. C. Align fabric pattern and grain with adjacent units. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. B. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 098400 121818 Page4of4 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS I C. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16-inch variation from hairline in 48 inches, noncumulative. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page 1 of 7 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems, high performance coatings, and wood stains and transparent finishes on interior and exterior substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents, 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Where required, apply mockups of finish system indicated and color selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. Ia. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page2of7 PAINTING AND COATING 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COATINGS, GENERAL 111 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products for substrates and conditions indicated in Part 3 Painting Schedule articles. B. Where more than one paint system or gloss level is listed for a substrate in the Painting Schedule, see Drawings for locations of each. C. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each coating system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. D. VOC Content: Except where more stringent requirements are specified in Part 3 Painting Schedule articles, products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior field applications, the following VOC limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 7. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 9. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 11. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 12. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Lacquers: 275 g/L. 13. Stains: 100 g/L. E. Colors: As indicated in Part 3 Color Schedule article. -22—SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample finish materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces if, on refinishing with complying materials, the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page 3 of 7 111 PAINTING AND COATING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints or stains, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and incompatible shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer that is recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated. 4. Sand surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. 5. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page4of7 PAINTING AND COATING 6. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with filler that is recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated. Sand smooth when dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. In equipment rooms and occupied spaces, paint equipment, piping, supports, conduit, ducts, pipe insulation covering and other paintable jacket materials, and other surfaces which normally require a paint finish for proper appearance and best serviceability, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not paint items that have factory-applied final finishes, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to I inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing-finish .:: ' - •- . --• - -• rt.., - _._ asking, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. I C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING SCHEDULE I A. Gypsum Board Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Low-Odor/Low VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat for Gypsum Board: 1) Benjamin Moore& Co.; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer N534. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acro Pure Ultra-Low VOC Interior Primer 210011. 3) PPG Paints; Speedhide zero Interior Zero-VOC Latex Sealer 6-4900X1. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; MP Ultra Low VOC Interior Primer/Sealer 503601. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Zinsser Bulls-eye Zero. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page 5 of 7 PAINTING AND COATING 6) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600. b. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Finish (GL1: N536, GL3: N538, GL5: N539). 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acro Pure Ultra-Low VOC Interior. 3) PPG Paints; Pure Performance Interior No VOC (GL1: 9-110X1 Series; GL3: 9-310X1 Series; GL5: 9-510X1 Series). 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Horizon Interior Zero VOC Finish (GL1: 5135 Series; GL2: 5235 Series; GL5: 5435 Series). 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Beyond Acrylic Enamel (GL3). 6) Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Interior Acrylic Latex (GL1: B05-1000 Series, GL3: B09-1000 Series, GL5: B10-1000 Series)or ProMar 200 HP (GL3). c. Gloss Level/Sheen (GL): Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1) Gloss Level 1: Gypsum board ceilings. 2) Gloss Level 2 or 3: Gypsum board walls. 2. Epoxy-Modified Latex System for Gypsum Board: a. Prime Coat: Same as low odor/low VOC latex system unless otherwise recommended by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore& Co.; Corotech V450. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Not available. 3) PPG Paints; Pitt Glaze WB1 Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-510. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Multi Master Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy 4715 Series. 1 5) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy K46-1150 Series. c. Gloss Level/Sheen: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1) Gloss Level 5: Gypsum board walls and ceilings in wet areas such as toilet rooms,janitor rooms, and kitchen areas. B. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized Metal, and Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water-Based System: a. Prime Coat for Ferrous Metal: One of the following, or shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate is specified; verify compatibility with top coat specified: 1) Benjamin Moore& Co.; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acrimetal DTM Primer/Finish. 3) PPG Paints; Pitt Tech Plus Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial 4020. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; EcoLogic Rustex Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer 70323. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance MetalMax DTM Acrylic Primer. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series. b. Prime Coat for Galvanized Metal: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Ultra Spec HP DTM Acrylic Enamel HPO4. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Same as ferrous metal. 3) PPG Paints; Same as ferrous metal. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Same as ferrous metal. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Griptec Acrylic Primer. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Same as ferrous metal. Ic. Prime Coat for Aluminum: 1) Benjamin Moore &Co.; Corotech Waterborne Bonding Primer V175. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Same as ferrous metal. 3) PPG Paints; Same as ferrous metal. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Same as ferrous metal. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Same as ferrous metal. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Same as ferrous metal. d. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Corotech DTM Acrylic Enamel. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acrimetal DTM Acrylic. 3) PPG Paints; Break-Through 50 Interior/Exterior Water-Borne Acrylic V71-610. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; EcoLogic Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Finish 70623. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Beyond Acrylic Enamel. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Acrylic B66-650 Series. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page 6 of 7 PAINTING AND COATING e. Gloss Level/Sheen: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1) Gloss Level 5. C. Wood Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Water-Based System: a. Prime Coat: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Fresh Start Multi-Purpose Latex Primer. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Miller-Prime All Purpose Stain Blocking Primer 470011. 3) PPG Paints; Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; PrimeSolutions First Coat Interior/Exterior Bonding Primer 501601. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Zinsser Smart Prime. 6) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite ProBlock Interior/Exterior Latex Primer/Sealer B51-600 Series. b. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Advance Waterborne Interior Alkyd 793. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acrinamel Interior/Exterior Acrylic Enamel Semi Gloss 3205XX. 3) PPG Paints; Pitt-Glaze WB1 Interior Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-510. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Horizon Enamel 543501. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Beyond Acrylic Enamel. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy K46-1150 Series. c. Gloss Level/Sheen: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1) Gloss Level 5, except at ceilings. a) Provide equivalent Gloss Level 1 or 2 product for ceilings and overhead wood beams. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Cement Plaster, and Wood Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: I 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat for Concrete and Cement Plaster: 1) Benjamin Moore &Co.; Super Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Masonry Sealer 0608. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Kril Interior/Exterior Alkali-Resistant Primer/Sealer 620011. 3) PPG Paints; Perma-Crete Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer 4-603. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; PrimeSolutions First Coat Interior/Exterior Bonding Primer 501601. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Zinsser Smart Prime. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Concrete& Masonry Primer/Sealer Interior/Exterior Latex LX2W50. b. Prime Coat for Wood: 1) Benjamin Moore &Co.; High-Hiding All Purpose Primer 0046. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Miller-Prime Stain Blocking Universal Primer/Sealer 470011. 3) PPG Paints; Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921X1. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; PrimeSolutions First Coat Interior/Exterior Bonding Primer 501601. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Zinsser Smart Prime. 6) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite ProBlock Latex Primer B51-620 Series. c. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Ultra Spec Exterior Finish. 111 2) Miller Paint Co.; Kril 100%Acrylic Exterior. 3) PPG Paints; Speedhide Exterior 100%Acrylic. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; CoverCoat XL Low Sheen 431101. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Beyond Acrylic Enamel. 6) Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Acrylic A82-150 Series. d. Gloss Level/Sheen: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1) Gloss Level 3-4. B. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized Metal, and Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat for Ferrous Metal: One of the following, or shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate is specified; verify compatibility with top coat specified. 1) Benjamin Moore& Co.; Ultra Spec Acrylic Metal Primer HPO4. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Acrimetal DTM Acrylic Velvet Primer/Finish 310210. 3) PPG Paints; Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF/Devflex 4020 PF I/E Industrial Primer Finish. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Ecologic Rustex Primer 70323. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 099000 121818 Page7of7 IPAINTING AND COATING 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance MetalMax Primer. I 6) Sherwin-Williams; ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. b. Prime Coat for Galvanized Metal: 1) Benjamin Moore &Co.; Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Enamel. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Same as ferrous. I 3) PPG Paints; Same as ferrous. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Prime Solutions First Coat Bonding Primer 501601. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Griptex Multi Surface Primer. I 6) Sherwin-Williams; Same as ferrous. c. Prime Coat for Aluminum: 1) Benjamin Moore&Co.; Same as galvanized. 2) Miller Paint Co.; Same as ferrous. I 3) PPG Paints; Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921X1. 4) Rodda Paint Co.; Same as galvanized. 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; XIM S Seal. I 6) Sherwin-Williams; Same as galvanized. d. Intermediate and Topcoat: 1) Benjamin Moore &Co.; Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Enamel. 2) Miller Paint Co.;Acrimetal DTM Acrylic. I 3) PPG Paints; Pitt-Tech Plus 4216 HP/Devflex I/E Industrial DTM 4216HP 4) Rodda Paint Co.; EcoLogic Ultra Low VOC Interior/Exterior DTM Enamel (GL3: 7065 Series; GL5: 7062 Series). 1111 5) Rust-Oleum Corp.; Sierra Performance Beyond Acrylic Enamel. 6) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Coating (GL3: B66-1250 Series; GL5:B66- 1150 Series). e. Gloss Level/Sheen: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: I 1) Gloss Level 5. 3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Manufacturers listed below are for color reference only. Provide matching colors by manufacturers I complying with requirements indicated above. Code Brand Number Name P-1 Miller 0011 Sugar Dust IP-2 Sherwin Williams SW7015 Repose Grey P-3 Miller 0535 Zen Retreat I P-4 Sherwin Williams SW9177 Salty Dog P-5 Sherwin Williams SW6650 Marguis Orange P-6 Sherwin Williams SW6964 Pulsating Blue 1 P-7 Sherwin Williams SW6615 Peppery P-8 Match P-4 111 P-9 Match P-7 P-11 Sherwin Williams SW6517 Regatta P-20 Match P-3 I P-21 Match P-2 P-25 Sherwin Williams SW7593 Rustic Red P-26 Match P-4 IP-27 Match existing exterior walls at Durham Elementary P-28 To be selected by Architect IP-29 To be selected by Architect END OF SECTION I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101100 0 00 121818 Page 1 of 4 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Visual display board assemblies. 2. Visual display wall coverings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 098400"Acoustical Room Components"for tackable, fabric-covered panels mounted on walls. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. I 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, II finishes, and accessories for visual display units. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints and seams. Show locations of field-assembled joints for factory- fabricated units too large to ship in one piece. 3. Include sections of typical trim members. 1 C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated. 1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Visual Display Wall Coverings: Full width by 36-inch-long. I 3. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile. 4. Display Rail: 6-inch-long section of each type. 5. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory. I D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. I B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of visual display wall coverings. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. I 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more I pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and I weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. I B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display units by field measurements before fabrication. 1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101100 121818 Page 2 of 4 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS C. Lighting: Do not install visual display wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive visual display wall covering. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain- enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 111 a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: Life of the building. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify111 products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Visual Display Board Assemblies: Factory fabricated to the greatest extent possible. B. MB-1, Markerboard Assembly: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated. I 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; LCS3, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Egan Visual Inc. b. Platinum Visual Systems, a division of ABC Schools Equipment, Inc. 2. Color: White. 3. Corners: Square. 4. Width and Height: As indicated on Drawings. 111 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall. 6. Accessories: a. Aluminum frames and trim. b. Chalktray. c. Display rail. 2.4 MARKERBOARD PANELS A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gross finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure-with-manufacturer's standard,flexible waterproof adhesive. 1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Core: 1/2 inch thick particleboard; with 0.005-inch-thick, aluminum foil backing, or 7/16 inch thick medium-density fiberboard; with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 2.5 VISUAL DISPLAY WALL COVERINGS A. VDWC-1, Magnetic Dry-Erase Wall Covering: Intended for use with dry-erase markers and magnetic aids and consisting of low-gloss plastic film bonded to ferrous-powdered fabric backing. 1. Product: Koroseal; MagRite II. 2. Color: White M248-00. 3. Trim: Aluminum J-Cap trim. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim size and standard shape. 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101100 0 100 121818 Page 3 of 4 IVISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends. I C. Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum display rail with plastic-impregnated-cork insert, end stops, designed to hold accessories. 1. Size: 2 inches high by full length of visual display unit. 2. Map Hooks: Two map hooks for every 48 inches of display rail or fraction thereof. I 3. Tackboard Insert Color: Forbo; 2206 Oyster Shell. 4. Aluminum Color: Match finish of visual display assembly trim. 2.7 MATERIALS IA. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two-or three-coat process. B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated. C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as I defined in the California Air Resources Board's"Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no added formaldehyde. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. I E. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. G. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, I sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. I H. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Section 099000 "Painting and Coating"and recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer for intended substrate. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary I protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and I are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IA. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units. IC. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. I C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101100 121818 Page 4 of 4 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS I D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer. E. Prepare substrates indicated to receive visual display wall covering as required by manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface that is uniform in color. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 4 percent when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete 11. installation. B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Mechanically Attached Assemblies: Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls. C. Field-Assembled Visual Display Board Assemblies: Where size of visual display board assemblies prohibit factory fabrication, coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Where size of visual display board assemblies or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated. D. Display Rails: Install rails at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. E. Visual Display Wall Covering: Comply with visual display wall-covering manufacturers'written installation instructions. 1. Install seams horizontal and level, with lowest seam 24 inches above finished floor. Railroad fabric (reverse roll direction)to ensure color matching. 2. Double cut seams, with no gaps or overlaps. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 3. After installation, clean dry-erase wall covering according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION 1 I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101400 121818 Page 1 of 3 SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Room identification and panel signs. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. I1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Room-Identification and Panel Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. E. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Variable Component Materials: 12 replaceable text inserts and interchangeable characters (letters, numbers, and graphic elements)of each type. 2. Tools: One set(s) of specialty tools for assembling signs and replacing variable sign components. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products or an entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's"2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design"and ICC A117.1. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101400 121818 Page 2 of 3 SIGNAGE 2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION AND PANEL SIGNS A. Room-Identification and Panel Signs: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Sign Systems, Inc.; InTouch Sign System. a. Other Manufacturers: 1) Inpro Corporation. 2) Vomar Products, Inc. 2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign, but no less than 0.125 inch. b. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square. 4. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with adhesive. 5. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille, typeface as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. 6. Provide updateable window inserts where indicated. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). I B. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES I A. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.5 FABRICATION I A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 111 A. Protect mechanical finis - •• - •• _• •. - 8.18.9- • .•• ••g_a-s i oabie, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 101400 121818 Page 3 of 3 SIGNAGE 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of ' distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Room Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated on Drawings and according to the accessibility standard. C. Mounting Methods: 1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. D. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of ' glass to conceal back of sign. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified ' requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. ' C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION I 1 ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102113 121818 Page 1 of 3 1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. I 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. I5. Show overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples: For each type of unit indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-inch-square I Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing I location and selected colors for toilet compartment material. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. I 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. I 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source. I1. Door Hinges: One hinge with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch and keeper with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One door bumper with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull with associated fasteners. I 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other Iconstruction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. I 1. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. When acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction, products may be tested in accordance with NFPA 286 in lieu of ASTM E 84. I B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. I2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Scranton Products; Hiny Hiders, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102113 I 121818 Page2of3 TOILET COMPARTMENTS I 2. Columbia Lockers, PSISC. 3. Yemm & Hart Ltd. I B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Recycled Content of Solid-Plastic Components: Postconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. I 2. Color: Onyx. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height(Continuous)Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum or stainless steel. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch-thick, stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through- bolts. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, surface-mounted, cast-stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, rubber-tipped, cast-stainless-steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. I C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. I C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. I 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports I and leveling mechanism. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102113 121818 Page 3 of 3 ITOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Full-Height(Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Ib. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's I written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. I 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 I degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102610 121818 Page 1 of 2 ' WALL PROTECTION AND CORNER GUARDS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Corner guards. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each type of wall protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall protection product to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected Ifrom weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, ' delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall-and door-protection products of each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1. ' 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc. 3. InPro Corporation. 4. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. 5. Pawling Corporation. 6. WatlGuard.com. PR TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102610 121818 Page 2 of 2 WALL PROTECTION AND CORNER GUARDS 1 B. CG-1, Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90-or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, Type 304 . a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch. b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. 2. Wing Size: 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches. 3. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 4. Mounting Height: Align top of corner guard with top of door frames. 5. Mounting: Adhesive. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Adhesive: As recommended by wall protection manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For wall protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only -•- .• . ' :•-' •e• •- - ---• -- 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall protection. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Mounting Heights: Install wall protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim,joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. , END OF SECTION TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O EMENTS SECTION 102813 121818 Page 1 of 2 ' TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Washroom accessories. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access ' by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the I Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. ' 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ' 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS I2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Owner-Furnished Material: Owner furnished products are identified in Part 2 as OFOI, Owner installed, or ' OFCI, Contractor installed. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., unless otherwise noted. C. Comparable products in accordance with Section 016000 "Product Requirements" by the following manufacturers will be considered: Ii. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. Ginger; a Masco company. ' 2.3 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Tag Item Model No. GB-1 Grab Bar, Horizontal B-5806 by 36 ' GB-2 Grab Bar, Horizontal B-5806 by 42 GB-3 Grab Bar, Vertical B-5806 by 18 MR-1 Welded-Frame, Tempered Glass Mirror B-2908 24 by 36 NR-1 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle B-254 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 102813 121818 Page 2 of 2 TOILET ACCESSORIES , PTD-1 Paper Towel Dispenser OFCI SCD-1 Seat Cover Dispenser OFCI SD-1 Soap Dispenser OFCI TPH-1 Toilet Paper Holder OFCI 2.4 FABRICATION I A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion- resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. I 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION I 1 1 I 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 104400 121718 Page 1 of 3 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 2. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 3. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. ' 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. ' B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inches square. D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." ' 1. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET ' A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis-of Design Products: J. L. Industries, Inc.; Ambassador Series, or comparable products by Larsens Manufacturing Company. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, except at rated walls. For recessed or semirecessed cabinets at rated walls provide fire-rated cabinets that match wall rating. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. ' D. FEC-1, Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. FEC-2, Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim I indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 3-inch backbend depth. F. FEC-3, Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 104400 121718 Page2of3 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES G. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. H. Door Material: Steel sheet. I. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. J. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. L. Accessories: 1. Identification: Scratch-proof lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. , a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Type and Location: Decal applied to glass. 2) Lettering Color: Black. 3) Orientation: Vertical. M. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Powder coat. b. Color: White. 2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub)with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. J. L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.6 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. PFE-1, Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 104400 121718 Page 3 of 3 IFIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. I B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. I3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets and mounting brackets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fasten cabinets and mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING IA. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices Ioperate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. I D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. I E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 113013 121818 Page 1 of 2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Cleaning appliances. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard size. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturers' special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains,within 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source and each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1. 2.3 DISHWASHERS A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW-1. ' 1. Product: Bosch; 300 Series, Model SGE53U5xUC. 2. Type: Built-in undercounter. 3. Nominal Dimensions: ' a. Width: 24 inches. b. Depth: 24 inches. c. Height: 32 inches. 4. Capacity: 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 113013 121818 Page 2 of 2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES I a. Place Settings: 13. 5. Tub and Door Liner: Stainless steel with sealed detergent and automatic rinsing-aid dispensers. 6. Controls: Front Control. 7. ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 8. Front Panel: White. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. I B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install appliances according to manufacturer's written instructions. I B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers'written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance- performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust contro - . '-• : - •_ _•_• an is and components. B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. I END OF SECTION 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 122413 121818 Page 1 of 4 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. 2. Manually operated bottom-up shades with single rollers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long. D. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Insolroll Window Shading Systems. 3. Hunter Douglas Contract. ' 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 6. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company. 7. SKYCO Shading Systems, Inc. 8. SWF Contract. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 RS-1, MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 111 1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 122413 121818 Page 2 of 4 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, sill mounted. B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back(exterior face)of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel in tube. C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly. E. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. F. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open. 2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open. 3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 4. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than height indicated on Drawings. b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel. 5. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site- constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. a. Closure-Panel Width:As indicated on Drawings. 6. Installation Accessories Color: White, except where mounted on rife frames. 2.3 RS-2, MANUALLY OPERATED BOTTOM-UP SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Manual Operating Mechanisms: Manufacturer's complete system and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, recommended by manufacturer for use with shade indicated, and as required for reliable operation without malfunction. 1. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: Double-roller system with continuous-loop bead chain and clutch in drive roller that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, sill mounted. B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back(exterior face)of roller. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 122413 121818 Page 3 of 4 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. C. Shadeband Retention System: Manufacturer's standard system for guiding shadeband through range of travel and holding shadeband taut. D. Mounting Hardware: Corrosion resistant and compatible with operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. E. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. 2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Product: Hunter Douglas; GreenScreen Evolve HD3501. 2. Type: 100 percent polyester with 78 percent recycled content. 3. Weave: Diamond Knit. 4. Weight: 8.97 oz./sq. yd. 5. Roll Width: 118 inches. 6. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt. 7. Openness Factor: 1 percent. 8. Color: Cloud. 2.5 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end- to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 122413 121818 Page 4 of 4 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 211 300 122018 Page 1 of 4 IFIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the I plumbing work specified in this Division. B. The requirements of this section apply to the fire suppression system. C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown I and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all design, labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. Provide all labor and I material and perform such other services necessary and reasonably incidental to the design and installation of an automatic sprinkler and standpipe system for all areas indicated on the Drawings and as required by the Governing Agency. ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Established fire protection contractor regularly engaged in the design and installation of automatic fire I sprinkler systems. 2. Employ workers experienced and skilled in this trade. 3. System Designer: Qualified and certified for the design of fire protection sprinkler systems. NICET level III or IV technician or Professional Engineer experienced in the design of sprinkler systems. I 4. Drawings shall be sealed by a licensed professional engineer experienced in fire protection. B. Governing Agency: All work in accordance with and accepted by the following hereafter referred to Governing Agencies: I 1. Fire Marshal State of Oregon. 2. Fire Marshal for Tigard/Tualatin area or TVFD. C. Design Requirements: I 1. Comply with the latest issue of NFPA Standard 13 2. Design, lay out and install an extension to the existing pipe schedule wet pipe system. The new system shall be hydraulically calculated wet pipe system utilizing code approved automatic devices I designed particularly for use in this type of system. 3. Provide hydraulic calculation methods design data information in accordance with Chapter 8, NFPA 13. Include a 10 percent margin of safety for available water pressure and flow rate. Include all friction losses from point of flow test to remote sprinkler area. Test flow and pressure at a known I location and calculate the system from that location. Site verification of the existing system shall be completed prior to design. 4. Fire Sprinkler Coverage: As required by the Governing Agency and including fire protection of all I areas noted. 5. Occupancy Hazard: Final Occupancy Hazard designation in accordance with the Governing Agency requirements. 6. Seismic Restraint: Include load calculations for seismic restraints on drawings. I 7. Revisions to the Contractor's design required by the Governing Agency shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All sprinkler specialty material Grinnell/Gem, Central, Reliable, Globe, Star, I Viking, Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America with UL or FM approval for use in automatic sprinkler systems. All materials and equipment suitable for 175 psi working pressure. E. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer I to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all 1 conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 1.3 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 211300 122018 Page2of4 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM I A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification. 1.4 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions. B. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. C. Provide AutoCAD drawings and files to other trades for coordination. Prepare accurate shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation. Submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. D. Coordination of piping and heads is particularly critical in auditorium. Review all auditorium drawings in preparation of design. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Working Drawings: 1. Prepare fire protection system working drawing showing locations and types of heads or outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths,test tees and valves, drain valves, and other related items. Plans shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 8, 1999 NFPA 13, irregardless of the edition adopted by the Governing Agencies and used for design. Plans shall be stamped and signed by the licensed profession engineer responsible for the design. 2. Provide 3 sets of drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated with architectural , ceiling details to the Architect for review prior to submitting details to the Governing Agencies. 3. Provide 6 sets of drawings to the Architect to be provided to Insurance Underwriter for approval. 4. Provide 6 sets of drawings to designated representatives of the Fire Marshal for approval. I 5. Then provide 6 sets of approved Drawings to the Architect for final review. B. Submittals: 1. Sprinkler Heads: Product data for each type of head. 2. System control valves. 3. Piping materials. C. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Additional Heads: Provide number, type and temperature rating installed as required to meet NFPA 13 requirements. B. Storage Cabinet: Provide as required to receive reserve sprinkler heads and special installation tools required. - - C. Index Label: Provide for each head indicating manufacturer, model, orifice, size or K-factor, and temperature rating. Also provide inside cabinet a list of heads stored within and brief description of where installed. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect,the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. C. Warranty period shall start when all phases of construction are complete. f TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 211300 122018 Page 3 of 4 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Miscellaneous Sprinkler Specialties: Complete system including all items required by the Governing Agency including but not limited to: 1. Electric alarm switch and indoor and outdoor 120 V alarm bell or water motor gong. 2. Valve monitoring switches with two outputs (one to fire alarm & one to sprinkler alarm bell). 3. Fire department hose connections. 4. Wiring from the alarm switches to the point of connection in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Coordinate with the Electrical Work specified in Division 28. B. Sprinkler Heads: Approved heads with temperature ratings required for service indicated. All shall be quick response early suppression type and rated heads. 1. Unfinished Areas: Upright, pendant or sidewall spray type, plain bronze. 2. Finished Areas: Chrome plated recessed and sidewall heads in finished ceilings, and where piping is exposed use chrome plated upright heads. 3. At contractor's option, flexible sprinkler head drops may be used in lieu of rigid piping. Hose assembly shall be UL 2443 listed and FM 1637 approved. Devices shall approved per be IBC 1621 or ASCE 7 as an alternative to seismic escutcheons. Ceiling attachment bracket shall be seismically certified. Hose assembly constructed of fully welded corrugated 304 stainless steel hose with stainless steel overbraid with threaded stainless steel pipe fittings. Device shall be listed for 175 PSI working pressure. Hose and 304 stainless steel threaded ends shall be welded per ANSI /AWS B2.1-00. No gaskets, 0-rings, flares, or similar mechanical joints permitted. FlexHead Industries or equal. C. Escutcheons: Provide polished chrome escutcheons on pipe extending through finished walls and ceilings. Provide oversized escutcheon to comply with current code. D. Above Ground Water Piping: Use standard weight (schedule 40) black or galvanized steel pipe ASTM A53, A135, or A795, and cast iron screwed or mechanical joint fittings especially adapted and approved for sprinkler work. Use reducing fittings where changes in pipe size occur. Bushings are prohibited. Galvanized pipe required for dry system. E. At Contractor's option, Schedule 10 black or galvanized steel pipe ASTM A135 or ASTM A795, and mechanical joint fittings specifically approved for sprinkler use, may be substituted for the black steel pipe ' specified above. Pipe shall be UL listed and FM approved for 300 psi working pressure. Pipe must have a CRR of 1.00 or greater. Galvanized pipe required for dry system. F. At Contractor's option, thin wall threadable steel pipe, ASTM A135 or A795, and cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings 11h"and smaller, approved for sprinkler work. Galvanized pipe required for dry system. G. Valves: UL and/or FM listed for fire protection service. 1. Iron body OS&Y pattern, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat. 2. Iron body butterfly style with EPDM liner, bronze disc with lever or indicating type gear operator. 3. Bronze body ball valve, three-piece design, with approved operator. 4. Where required by Governing Agency, provide wall or post style indicating valves. 5. Standpipe Valves: Angle or straight pattern rough brass gate valve with cap and retaining chain. H. Guards: Standard manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Connect to water supply source as shown on Drawings, check adequacy, and call any deficiency to attention of Architect. Coordinate with work in Division 22 and 23. B. Install all piping in a true and even manner with lines pitched for drainage and system arranged so that it can be entirely emptied of water. Install hangers at all branch line connections to cross mains and at all other points as required in hereinbefore specified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and NFPA standards. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 211300 122018 Page 4 of 4 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM I C. Support all pipe work from building construction with mild steel hangers spaced not more than 12 feet on centers. Support mains independently of branches, and in no case shall branch hangers assume any portion of the weight of mains. Provide seismic restraints and flexible connections in accordance with building code requirements. D. Locate sprinkler heads in repeating, modular pattern, centered and accurately coordinated with ceiling grid as indicated. Conceal all piping unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate design with lighting and exposed HVAC duct layout in areas without ceilings. E. Locate and install the required fire sprinkler alarm,flow, and test and drain valves where required by the Governing Agency. I F. Where sprinkler lines penetrate fire rated partitions, provide fire stopping system in accordance with Section 220500. G. Where sprinkler lines penetrate classroom or auditorium walls, provide acoustic seal. See Section 220500 for more information. 3.2 TEST A. Test all pipes to a hydrostatic pressure of 175 psi and maintain for four hours minimum. Perform other tests as directed by Governing Agency. B. Test to be performed on all new and existing systems in the building. 3.3 PAINT A. Paint all exposed piping and hangers in accordance with Section 099100. Do not paint heads. 3.4 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION I A. Obtain and deliver to Owner a certificate, in duplicate, stating that system as installed has been inspected and accepted by authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction, and that all regulations affecting work have been satisfied. Submit an acceptable certificate to the Owner before final payment is requested. I B. Certificate: Minimum NFPA Figure 16-1 information per NFPA 13. END OF SECTION 111I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 1 of 12 IPLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS l PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the I plumbing work specified in this Division. B. The requirements of this Section apply to the plumbing systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 22 sections. I C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with I complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Water, sanitary sewer, and storm sewer service complete per serving utility company requirements. I 2. Service and distribution piping including valves, supports, insulation, etc. 3. Complete plumbing systems, including fixtures, trim, equipment, etc. 4. Rough-in and final connection of plumbing equipment and fixtures furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. I 5. Piping to and connection of equipment or fixtures furnished outside of these Specifications and Contract but described on the Drawings. 6. Special systems as specified herein. I E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA. I B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. I C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Federal Specifications (FS) I 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) I 6. Factory Mutual (FM) 7. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments 8. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments I 9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 12. International Fire Code (IFC)with State and Local Amendments I 13. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) 14. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 15. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) I16. American Gas Association (AGA) 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 2 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. G. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings. See Article 3.01 for more requirements. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions. H. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 1.3 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification. 1.4 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions. B. HVAC piping systems,fuel piping systems, fire suppression piping systems, and control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein. C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. D. All sections of Division 22 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 22. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor. 1.5 SHOP ftf WINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS) A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. C. Include the manufacturer,type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used. D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. I E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 3 of 12 IPLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including I floor plans. G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic"change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies,and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract I Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification I sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. I. For adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), include printed statement of VOC content using LEED Low-Emitting Materials form. I 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include l complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted. I 1.7 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating I sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS I A. Project Record (As-Installed) Drawings: 1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division 1. 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. I 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping and all cleanouts, whether concealed or exposed, dimensioned from permanent building features. b. Locations of all valves with assigned tag numbers. I c. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information. d. Locations of tracer wire terminal points. Ie. Model numbers of installed equipment. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of I reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents;quality to be judged by Architect. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and I change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit five (5) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams, and parts lists and vendors for all serviceable items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points, and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three-ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each classification of equipment or data. Comply with provisions of Division one where applicable to the mechanical work. 1.9 WARRANTY 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 4 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. C. Warranty period shall begin once all phases of construction are complete. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5%to plus 10% as approved in each case. B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project. C. Efficiency: Service (Domestic) Water Heating Equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2014 and the State Energy code. Where equipment efficiencies are indicated, the use of alternate or substitute manufacturer's equipment with lower efficiencies is not permitted. D. Storage and Handling: 1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage. 3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 2.2 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturers: Inryco/Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. Inryco/Milcor Style DW, K, or M panels as required by construction. Minimum Size = 12"x16" per TTSD standards. B. Construction: Flush style, fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Provide flush key cylinder locks on all access panels less than 8'above the floor in public spaces. Above 8 ft in public spaces, provide flat screw driver latch. Turn keys over to owners at project completion. Screwdriver latches on all others. Stainless steel construction when installed in locker room shower ceilings or restroom walls. 2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS A. Flexible Expansion/Seismic Loop: Factoryfabricatedassembly consisting of two 90 degree elbows, two lengths of flexible hose, and a 180 degree return bend to allow free movement in 3 axis. Return bend shall include attachment point for support and a drain/vent fitting. Hose shall be corrugated metal style with metal overbraid. Connections to match piping system except connection 2" and larger shall be flanged style. Copper or bronze construction for potable water systems. Metraflex "Metraloop." 2.4 METERS AND GAUGES 1 A. General: Install meters and gauges where shown on the plans or specified elsewhere in these specifications. B. Pressure-Temperature Test Plugs: 1. 1/4"or '/" NPT fitting of solid brass capable of receiving either an 1/8"OD pressure or temperature probe and rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig. Neoprene valve core for temperatures to 200 deg. F., Nordel to 350 deg. F. 2. Provide for each test plug a pressure gauge adapter with 1/16"or 1/8"OD pressure probe. 3. Furnish a test kit containing one 2-1/2"dial pressure test gauge of suitable range, one gauge adapter with 1/16"or 1/8"OD probe and two 5"stem pocket test thermometers—one 0 to 220 degrees F and I one 50 to 550 degrees F. Turn the kit over to the Architect. 4. Cisco"P/T Plugs," Peterson "Pete's Plug"or approved substitute. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 5 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Thermometers: Liquid-in-glass, adjustable stem, separable sockets, plus 40 to 240 degrees F range (unless indicated otherwise). Weiss numbers are listed. Equivalent Taylor, Trerice, Weksler or approved substitute. 1. Wide case (9") in equipment rooms and all major equipment items. Weiss "9VS"series. 2. Narrow case (7") in all other locations. Weiss "7VS"series. D. Pressure Gauges: Install on discharge of all pumps and where shown on Drawings 4-1/2"dial, 0-100 psig graduation pressure gauges with Ashcroft No. 1106 pulsation dampers and stop cocks. Weiss UGE-1 or equivalent Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Weksler. 2.5 VALVES A. General: Provide factory fabricated valves of the type, body material, temperature and pressure class, and service indicated. Bronze gate, globe and check valves shall comply with MSS-SP-80. Ball valves shall comply with MSS-SP-110. Iron gate and globe valves shall comply with MSS-SP-70. Iron check valves shall comply with MSS-SP-71. Butterfly valves shall comply with MSS-SP-67. Valve size same as connecting pipe size. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Crane, Grinnell, Nibco, Hammond, Stockham, Legend, Watts, and Walworth. Grooved end valves Victaulic, Gruvlock, or accepted substitute. NIBCO numbers are given except as noted.Where possible, provide valves from a single manufacturer. C. Valve styles: Domestic hot and cold water. 1. Valves 2" and Smaller: a. Ball: Three-piece, bronze body with "Teflon" seats and stem packing and stainless steel balls and trim., full port, 600 psi WOG, Fig. T/S-585-70. b. Check: brass body, 45 seated swing check, 200 psi WOG, T/S-413B (bronze disc) or T/S-413Y (Teflon disc). D. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation. E. Mechanical Actuators: Provide mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7'above the floor, and where manual operation is difficult because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating conditions. Drop chains to 6'-6"above the floor. F. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Select and install valves with ends matching the types of pipe/tube connections. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. The Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and 111 Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP-69 are referenced in this section. B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter& Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted). C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods. D. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or"A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint"ASHRAE RP-812, 1999. E. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Adjustable Saddle-Support: MSS Type 36 (Fig. 258) and MSS Type 37 (Fig. 259), including saddle, pipe and reducer. Fabricate base-support from steel pipe and include cast-iron flange or welded- steel plate. 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 6 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I 7. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut"channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Super Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut. F. Vertical Pipe Clamps: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261). 1 2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt-holes. G. Hanger Attachment: 1. Hanger Rod: Rolled threads, zinc plated. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230). 3. Weldless Eye-Nut: MSS Type 17 (Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye-Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299). H. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power-Strut PS349 continuous channel. I Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig. 86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 with arrow banding tape or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI. B. Nameplates: 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16"thick, laminated 2-ply plastic, bottom ply white, outer ply black, letters I formed by exposing bottom ply. 2. Size: 2" by 4" nameplates with 1/4" high letters. C. Valve Tags: 1. 1" diameter, 18-gauge polished brass tags with 3/16"chain hole and 1/4" high stamped, black-filled service designation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seaton, Brady, MSI. 11 2.8 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING • A. Through-penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M, Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved. B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall rating, etc. 111 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building I measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work. B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast-in-Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast-in-place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule. D. Coordination: I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 7 of 12 IPLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and may be identified as such. I Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations. 1 2. Prepare accurate AutoCAD shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation for piping and plumbing devices. Submit drawings prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. Provide drawing I files to other trades for coordination. 3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical I work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist. SE. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work. 1 3.2 UTILITY COORDINATION A. Utility Coordination: Coordinate all aspects of the incoming plumbing utility services indicated with the city I engineer, serving utility, and the off-street improvements contractor. Requirements of the utility company which exceed the provisions made on the Drawings or covered by these Specifications shall take precedence. Provisions made on the Drawings or Specifications in excess of the utility company's requirements shall take precedence. No additional compensation will be allowed the contractor for I connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utilities. 3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING I A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings. B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor Ioperating devices for all mechanical equipment. C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide I all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine I which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others. 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION I A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with I Code requirements. B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate I operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited I, unless so shown on Drawings. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 8 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I C. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans under all domestic hot water heaters and all above ceiling in-line pumps and cooling coils. Locate pan immediately below piping and equipment, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side and lengthwise 18"beyond equipment being protected. Fabricate pans 2"deep, of reinforced 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with watertight seams and rolled or hemmed edges. Provide 3/4"drainage piping, properly discharged to over floor drain or as shown on the Drawings. Comply with Mechanical Code for overflow protection and pipe sizing. D. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, dielectric unions, valves and items requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12"for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20"where personnel must pass through. E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture. F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations. G. Concrete Work: Coordinate with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 03310 for mechanical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where �I possible), admixtures, accessories, (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals and other requirements of the concrete work. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and isolation of equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping, and where shown on the drawings. Install valves at low points in piping systems that must be drained for service or freeze protection. 2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane. B. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation. C. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible. D. Lubricant-Seal: Select and install plug valves with lubricant-seal except where frequent usage is indicated -or--can be reasonably expected-to-occur. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only. I B. Provisions for Movement: I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 9 of 12 IPLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom I of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from I movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation I requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated I pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP- 89. d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where I exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields (MSS type 39) at each hanger. C. Pipe Support: I 1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as required by Code) and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: Steel Copper I 1-1/4" and smaller 7'span 6'span 1-1/2"pipe 9'span 6'span 2" pipe 10' span 10'span I 2-1/2" & larger 12' span 10'span 3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: a. Hubless and Compression Joint: At every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4', I then at each joint. b. Additional Support: Provide at each horizontal branch and/or at concentrated loads to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 4. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc. to maintain I alignment and prevent sagging. 5. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size I Inches mm Inches mm 1/2"to 4" 12.7 to 101.6 3/8" 9.5 5"to 8" 127.0 to 203.2 1/2" 12.7 10"to 12" 254.0 to 304.8 5/8" 15.9 1 D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from Iother piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable. F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights. G. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for workingload, 1 depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge style anchors. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 10 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I H. Seismic Restraints: Install restraints where recommended in SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual." Show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613 and reference ASCE standard. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). Acceptable Manufacturers:Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved. Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings, sealed and signed by a professional engineer, showing seismic restraint design for all equipment, piping and ductwork required to be braced. 3.7 PLUMBING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown/scheduled/specified; except vent and drainage piping. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced"signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. Locate pipe labels in accessible areas as follows: 1. Near each valve, meter, gauge, or control device. 2. Near equipment such as pumps, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc. 3. At piping branch connections and each leg of a tee. 4. At penetrations (each side) of walls, ceilings, and floors. 5. At access panels and doors. 6. At 25 foot maximum intervals. Provide a minimum of 1 label above each room where lift out ceiling is installed. Reduce intervals in congested areas such as mechanical rooms. 7. At Piping riser. 111 B. Valve Identification: Tag all valves with brass disc and chain. Prepare valve charts indicating valve number, size, location, function and normal position. Use no duplicate numbers in Plumbing and Heating systems. Mount glazed frames containing one set of valve charts in the building mechanical room. Label ceiling access points with valve identification. C. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, etc. Identify equipment in field same as on drawings. Permanently mount in an appropriate and effective location. D. Operation Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN THE PUMP IS OFF." 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete plumbing connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including111 incidental piping, fittings,trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring plumbing connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. Minimum branch pipe size for fixtures shall be 1/2". 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final 1 completion, thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to avoid cutting of new finished surfaces. 3.11 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 11 of 12 IPLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product's UL listing. Below are the I minimum installation requirements. 1. Install specified penetrating item(s)with required annular spacing in proper size wall or floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction. 2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose debris, dirt, oil, I wax, grease, old caulking, etc. 3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so that it is snug against perimeter of opening. 4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space, recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking. 5. Gun, trowel, and/or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around penetrating I item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth, defect-free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth. I B. Drawings show some, not all, of the penetration. Review architectural drawings for all fire walls. C. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. I3.12 ACOUSTIC SEALING/CAULKING A. See details on drawings. Seal all pipe penetrations of classrooms or auditorium. B. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) Icontent than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. I 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and I openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: I a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. D. Joint Backing: Round, closed cell, non-gassing foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM C 1330 Type B, cylindrical, bi-cellular material; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 1. Products: a. Sof Rod manufactured by Nomaco Inc. Ib. Sonolastic Soft Backer-Rod manufactured by BASF. E. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. 1 3.13 MECHANICAL PAINTING A. Minimum Requirements: All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted per 099000. I3.14 PLUMBING WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment I requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination. I B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Division 1 as previously specifiedin this Section. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220500 122018 Page 12 of 12 PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS I C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of plumbing equipment and systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and 111 alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220700 122018 Page 1 of 3 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of plumbing systems specified elsewhere in these specifications. B. The requirements of Section 220500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Minimum Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50 and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant. C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 220500, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. 2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certain Teed, Armstrong, Pabco, Imcoa or Nomaco. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise. B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong. 2.2 PIPING INSULATION A. Interior and Exterior Piping Systems 32 to 180 Deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K-value of 0.23 at 75 deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot within all-service vapor barrier jacket, vinyl or pre-sized finish and pressure sensitive seal containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant. B. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation up to 2-1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr. sq. ft./in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. On cold surfaces, apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Armaflex 2000"or, in concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved. 2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment Temperatures Below 70 Deg. F: Flexible, closed cell, elastomeric sheet insulation of 5.5 #/cubic feet density and 0.27 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Armstrong "Armaflex." B. Equipment Temperatures From 70 to 450 Deg. F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Johns Manville "814 Spin-Glas"with "FSK"jacket containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant or finished as recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220700 II 122018 Page 2 of 3 PLUMBING INSULATION i A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, tapes, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for the insulation and conditions specified. No staples allowed on cold water piping systems. 111 B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation material specified. C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Johns Manville Zeston 2000, Proto LoSmoke, or Ceel-Co Ceel-Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved. D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85-75 contact cement or approved substitute. E. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, I 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular- glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360- degree sheet metal shield. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSULATION A. General: Do not insulate underground piping except at joints and fittings on preinsulated piping unless indicated otherwise. At contractor's option and in accordance with Part 2 of this section, elastomeric insulation may be installed on domestic water piping in thicknesses equivalent to the glass fiber insulation. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendation with joints and seams completely sealed. B. Domestic Water Piping: 1. Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering, 1"thick for cold water piping and for 1" and smaller hot water piping; 1-1/2"for 1-1/4" and larger hot water piping. 2. Insulate hot water return piping same as cold water piping. 3. Insulate all water piping exposed to outside weather and freezing temperatures with 1"thickness of glass fiber pipe covering with weather-proof metal jacket. Apply insulation after heat cable is installed. C. Interior Rain Drains and Overflow Drains: 1. Concealed: Insulate with 1"thick one pound density glass fiber blanket and continuous vapor barrier jacket. 2. Exposed: Insulate with 3.5 pound density glass fiber insulation with continuous vapor barrier jacket. 3. PVC overflow drain lines do not need to be insulated. 4. Drain bodies (overflow or rain drain) to be insulated. I D. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets, unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for 1 continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. 2. Provide removable/reusable insulation covers on 4" and larger valves, unions, flanges, pump casings, strainers and similar fittings or equipment requiring periodic service. E. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC or metal covering on all piping and fittings in mechanical rooms, accessible tunnels, attic spaces, accessible ceilings, etc., where insulation may be subject to damage. Install with rivets or cement seams and joints. F. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following. 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 220700 122018 Page3of3 PLUMBING INSULATION 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 or Type 40 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following. a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 and NPS 14 (DN200 and DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 and NPS 24 (DN400 and DN600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick. 4. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. G. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and without staples on cold water lines. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTSE S CTION 221000 122018 Page 1 of 7 1 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide pipe, pipe fittings, piping specialties, pumps and related items required for complete piping system. B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 220500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturer's identification marking, wall thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard. Tubular fixture traps shall be stamped with manufacturer's mark and material thickness. C. Potable Water Valves: Potable water piping materials not limited to faucets, mixing valves, or pressure reducing valves. Valves shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9, for drinking water faucets and shall be brass construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more than 3 percent lead by dry weight. D. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by Code or Governing Authorities. E. Definitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar piping materials for similar fluids (i.e., "make-up water" = "domestic water"; "wet stand pipe"= "fire sprinkler pipe"; "drainage piping" = "sanitary/storm sewer piping"). F. Plumbing System Disinfection shall be performed by an experienced, qualified, chemical treatment agency. Mt. Hood Chemical, Chemcoa, or approved alternate. 1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data for each product specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: a. Domestic water. b. Priming lines. 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. a. Above Ground Domestic Water: Type L hard temper copper with soldered joints. b. Underground Domestic Water and Priming Lines: Type L soft annealed with no joints or type K hard tempered copper with silver soldered joints. 3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22. B. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: a. Domestic water. 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. Above Ground Domestic Water: Type L hard temper copper. 3. Sizes 2"and Larger: Rolled groove fittings with UPC approval. Victaulic Copper-Connection or engineer approved equal. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 111 122018 Page 2 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS I 4. Fittings: Wrought copper grooved end fittings to ANSI B16.22, or cast-bronze to ANSI B16.18. Fittings shall be manufactured to copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted). 5. 2" (DN50) through 8" (DN200): Installation ready coupling with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Gasket shall be Grade "EHP" EPDM compound with red color code designed for operating temperatures from -30 deg F (-34 deg C) to +250 deg F (+120 II deg C). Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 607H. 6. Sizes 1/2"to 2": Press Fitting: Copper and copper alloy press fittings shall conform to material requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for press fittings shall be EPDM. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied by fitting manufacturer. C. Cast Iron DWV Pipe: 1. Application: 1-1/2"" and larger. 111 a. Sanitary waste b. Plumbing vent 2. Pipe: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. Produced by American manufacturer only. Foreign produced piping is not allowed. 3. Fittings: Hubless cast iron fittings: CISPI 301-05/ASTM A 888-05. 4. Couplings: a. Light Duty: Standard couplings meeting CISPI 310. b. Medium Duty: No hub couplings meeting CISPI 310 and incorporating ASTM C 564 gasket, type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Two clamping bands on 1- 1/2"thru 4" pipe and four bands on 6"thru 10" pipe. c. Heavy Duty: No-hub couplings meeting ASTM C 1540, and FM 1680. ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket, type 304 SS corrugated shield and type 304 SS clamping bands. Four bands on 1-1/2" thru 4"pipe and 6 bands on 5"thru 10"pipe. d. Couplings to Dissimilar Pipe in Concealed Locations: Fernco "LowFlex" or approved substitute. 1 5. Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe and fittings—AB&I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or approved. All pipe shall be labeled by the manufacturer. D. Plastic Pipe— Drain, Waste, Vent (DWV): 1. Application: a. Sanitary waste below slab only; unless noted otherwise. b. Plumbing vent 2. Pipe: a. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) (ASTM D3965) plastic drain, waste and vent piping (ASTM F628) and fittings (ASTM D2661) (DWV). b. Poly(vinyl chloride) (ASTM D1784) (PVC) plastic drain, waste and vent pipe (ASTM D2665 and D1785) and fittings (ASTM D2665) (DWV). 3. Fittings: Provide fittings of the type indicated, matching piping manufacture. Where not otherwise indicated, provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by the piping manufacturer. E. Plastic Pipe: 1. Application: a. Below grade domestic water. b. Above grade domestic water branch lines only and when continuously supported per specification. Concealed locations only, exposed PEX piping is not allowed. c. Priming lines if covered and protected from damage and light. 2. Pipe: a. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing manufactured by PEX-a or Engel Method for Water Service: Tested/listed to ASTM E84, ASTM F876 and F877, and CSA B137.5 listed certified to NSF standards 14 and 61. Rated for 100 PSI at 180° F. Wirsbo AQUAPEX or approved. 3. Fittings: ASTM F1960 cold expansion fittings. Provide fittings of the type matching piping manufacture and recommended by the piping manufacturer for the service indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 122018 Page 3 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic"Clear Flow." B. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. 2. Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit" approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS. 4. Flux:Water soluble paste flux. 5. Brazing filler rod: BCuP rod to suit conditions. C. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link-Seal. For fire rated wall, floor or ceiling penetrations, 3-M "CP-25"caulk, "No. 303"putty and/or"PSS 7904"sealing system. D. Strainers: "Y-pattern," iron or bronze body rated for pressures indicated with blow-off connection and 20 mesh stainless steel screen. E. Tracer Wire: 14 gauge, single strand, copper wire with blue insulation for water, green for sanitary and storm sewers, and yellow for gas. 3M "DBY" direct bury splice kit required at all splices. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturer: Josam or District approved equal. 2. Types: a. Finished Floor Cleanouts: Josam Series 27008-Z-1" or District Approved Equal. B. Drains: 1. Zurn, Jay R. Smith,Josam,Watts, Wade and Mifab. Numbers scheduled on drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations involved. 2. Cast iron construction with acid resistant coating, anchor flange, and other options as indicated by model number. 3. Install 4 pound sheet lead flashing, extending not less than 10"from and clamped to all drains not completely cast-in-place in a homogeneous material. C. Flashing: Minimum 4#sheet lead; to extend horizontally 10"from edge of vent penetrations or rain drain body and vertically 12" minimum up from roof turned over and down into hub of vent or finished with bronze cap providing counterflashing for screwed pipe. D. Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type manufactured to meet PDI WH-201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in accordance with PDI procedures. J. R. Smith, PPP, Sioux Chief,Wade, Zurn, Watts, Josam, or approved substitute. E. Priming Valves: 1. Electrically operated priming station with header sized for number of outlets required. Provide with 120v power supply,timer, and solenoid valve tested per UL. Provide with IAPMO approved atmospheric vacuum breaker. Provide in recessed wall box with access door per Section 220500. P.P.P. Inc., PT Series or approved. 2. Flow operated valves Jay R. Smith 2699 only. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind access panels as specified in Section 220500. 3. McIntosh Primes: Manufactured for connection to flush valve to be with gasket chrome supply line and wall escutcheon. 4. Use copper or PEX specified previously for all underground priming lines. F. Traps: Except chrome plated fixture traps. Recessed drainage pattern for threaded pipe and same grade as pipe for cast iron and plastic pipe;with cleanout plugs in trap body in all above grade locations. G. Domestic Water Balancing Valve: Balancing fitting with differential pressure taps, lead free brass or bronze body and trim or stainless steel construction. B&G "Circuit Setter"or equivalent, Armstrong, Thrush,Wheatley, Flow Design or approved substitute. 2.4 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Subbase Materials: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 122018 Page 4 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS I B. Finely-Graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve. C. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to the required densities, and complying with AASHTO designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, or A-3. D. Stabilization Fabric: Nonwoven stabilization and drainage fabric. Mirafi 140S or 140M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UTILITY SERVICE A. Plumbing Utility Connections: Complete installation. Contact local serving utilities to determine conditions 111 involved and make or arrange to have connection made at proper time and pay all costs involved. B. Sanitary and Storm Sewers: Connect sanitary and storm sewers as shown on the Drawings and as required by the serving utility. Verify depth, size and location prior to installation of the new sewer systems. C. Water Service: Connect to water system. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices and plumbing code standards. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. Install piping plumb and level except where pitched for drainage. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid st (concrete or CMU) partitions. C. Ensure all copper piping is protected from contact with non-copper supports. Provide strut cushion below clamp or 2 layers of UPC listed 10 mil tape. D. Tracer Wire: Install tracer wire as close to underground non-metallic water, sanitary and storm sewers and gas pipe in the trench as possible. Tracer wire shall be accessible at grade via all services, valve and meter boxes, curb cocks, cleanouts at the building, manholes (inside the cover near the top), etc. Locate all points on the record as-installed drawings. Splice into utility tracer system where available. Comply with code requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINTS A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material. B. --Cast Iran"No-Hub": All'9.• • __-§ 0= •_- . • •' _ __ •• -•• .•9: nstitute u,Inatton No. 310-97"Installation Procedures for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings For Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications." Horizontal runs of 5"and greater shall be braced as indicated in Figure 4 for"rodding" restraints. Application of couplings as follows: 1. Light Duty Couplings: All vent piping and all drainage and waste piping above grade. 2. Medium Duty Couplings: All aboveground waste and drainage piping unless indicated otherwise. 3. Heavy Duty Couplings: a. All underground installations. C. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance ANSI B 828 with recognized industry practice. Cut I tube ends squarely. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or approved copper tubing cutting tool. The tubing shall be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Remove scale, slag, dirt and debris from inside and outside of tubing and fittings before assembly. The tubing end shall be wiped clean and dry. The burrs on the tubing shall be reamed with a deburring or reaming tool. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. "T-Drill"field formed tees may be utilized where the main is at least two pipe sizes larger than the branch. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 122018 Page 5 of 7 IPLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS D. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through I the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. E. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Where the"joining of ferrous and non-ferrous piping", use brass nipple with length/nominal diameter ratio of 8 or greater(or minimum of 3", whichever is greater) rather than dielectric fitting. For piping 2"and larger, provide dielectric flange assembliesF. Changes in Direction: Use fittings Ifor all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces. F. Line Grades: 1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case less than 1/4"per foot within building. 2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'. 3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum depth of ground cover for all lines I outside building unless otherwise noted. G. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice. I H. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. 3.4 CLEANOUTS I A. Where required by code, at each change of sewer direction 45 degrees or greater and more than 10' long, at end of each branch or main and spaced not greater than 100' apart, as required by code and/or as shown on Drawings. I3.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces. IB. Strainers: Install in a manner to permit access for cleaning and screen removal and with blow-off valve. C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Use steel pipe sleeves through beams,footings, girders or columns I and for all penetrations of walls or floors below grade. Where floor finish is ceramic tile, terrazzo, or similar material extend standard steel pipe sleeves 1-1/2" above finished floor. Fabricate sleeves 1"diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only. D. Sleeve Caulking: Caulk below grade pipe with rubber link seal. Grout above grade pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Utilize rubber sealing links in lieu of caulking. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of I fire rated walls, floors and ceiling. E. Shock Arrestors: Install at end of mains, in a battery of three or more flush valve-operated fixtures water header, ahead of quick closing and solenoid operated valves. Size per PDI recommendations where size is not indicated. Provide access panels. 111 F. Trap Priming: Traps serving floor drains, floor sinks, catch basins, and similar fixtures shall be primed in accordance with Code requirements. I 3.6 EXCAVATING A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, to minimize the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling. Comply with all applicable IFederal and state safety regulations and local erosion control requirements. B. Width: Excavate for piping with 6"to 9"clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other work to 1 provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances. C. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate the bottom cut to accurate elevations. Support the following work on undisturbed soil at the bottom of the excavations: I 1. Piping of 5" and less pipe/tube size. 2. Cast-in-place concrete. 3.7 BASE PREPARATION TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 122018 Page 6 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS I A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. For 4" and larger piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks and similar work, shape the subbase to fit the bottom 90 degrees of the cylinder, for uniform continuous support. Provide finely-graded subbase material for wrapped, coated and plastic pipe and tank. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavation with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in the piping systems and set bottom of trench at proper pitch and correct elevations with subbase material. B. Previous Excavations: Where piping crosses over an area more than 5'wide which has been previously excavated to a greater depth than required for the piping installation, provide suitable subsidence-proof support for the piping. Comply with the details shown, or where not otherwise shown, provide the following I support system: 1. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in a width equal to the pipe diameter plus 2'. Install 8"courses of subbase material, each compacted to 95% of maximum density, as required to fill excavation and support piping. 3.8 BACKFILLING A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. I Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6" above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use"pea gravel" backfill). Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary. B Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System: 1. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete and clean. 2. Open all drains and fixtures valves in the building starting with the valve nearest the water service line and permit the water to run clear for 10 minutes to eliminate grease, cuttings, flux, and foreign matter. 3. Inject disinfectant at beginning of water system to be disinfected. Introduce free chlorine in liquid form, throughout system to obtain concentration required by local Public Health Department regulations or 50 to 80 mg/L residual. 4. Bleed water from all potable water outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. 5. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 6. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. 7. Flush disinfectant from system until residual is equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. 8. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing,from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. If any sample fails the analysis, repeat the procedure. 9. Include a copy of the bacteriological analysis in the Operating and Maintenance manuals. 10. If allowed by local jurisdiction, testing is acceptable in lieu of treatment. C. Sanitary and Storm Drainage System: I 1. Remove construction debris from cleanouts, drains, strainers, baskets, traps, etc., and leave same accessible and operable. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted piping at the end of the day or whenever work stops. 2. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system, flush and clean the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris to enter the existing sewer system. 3.10TEST A. General: I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 221000 122018 Page 7 of 7 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure I and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Repair: 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop-leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. C. Sewer: Furnish all facilities and personnel for conducting the test. Test in accordance with the requirements of the State Plumbing Inspector and local authorities. D. Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point, but not less than 10'water column on major horizontal portion. E. Water Piping: Hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig without loss for four hours. F. Tanks and Equipment: Hydrostatic pressure to 1.5 times operating pressure but do not exceed maximum rated pressure. 3.11 SUPERVISION AND START-UP A. Adjust flush valves, pressure reducing valves, mixing valves, water heater thermostats, and similar equipment. END OF SECTION I I 1 I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 224000 010319 Page 1 of 3 IPLUMBING FIXTURES 0 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the plumbing fixtures and trim. I B. Provide fixtures as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide all required fixture trim and accessories for a complete, finished installation. C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 220500, Common Plumbing Materials and Methods, also Iapply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code: Comply with requirements of the Oregon State Plumbing Specialty Code. B. Fixture color:White unless indicated otherwise. C. Potable Water Valves: Potable water valves not limited to faucets, mixing valves, or pressure reducing I valves. Valves shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9, for drinking water faucets and shall be brass construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more than 3 percent lead by dry weight. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Piping, fittings, and related items as specified in related Sections 221000. 2.2 INTERIOR PLUMBING MATERIALS A. Single Fixture Tempering Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve. Watts MMV. ASSE 1016 listed. Bronze/brass I construction with stainless steel disc and springs, copper thermostat. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM A. Stops: Furnish stop valves for all fixtures. Loose key style, in wall, angle stops to fit installation. Stops to I be all brass with full turn brass stem and replaceable washer, no plastic. Compression nuts to be high copper content brass with lead free certification. IPS inlet connection only. Finish to be copper nickel chrome plate. Product to carry manufacturer's name. Risers to be chrome plated copper. Provide chrome plated shallow escutcheons. McGuire, Chicago, Brasskraft, Keeney, Zurn, or approved substitute. B. Fixture Traps: Exposed fixture tailpieces, traps, and wastes shall be chrome plated 17 gauge seamless brass tube with cast brass nuts and deep or box style escutcheons as required to conceal rough piping. I Products to be stamped with manufacturer's name and material gauge. McGuire, Keeney, Zurn, or approved. C. Provide handicap piping protector kit on all exposed accessible fixture traps and supplies (I&S Insulation Co. Inc., Brocar Products Inc. kit 500R, McGuire"Prowrap," Plumberex"Pro-2000"or approved substitute. iD. 1.6— 1.1 Gallon Flush Water Closet, Dual Flush Valve, Vitreous China, "WC-1" Elongated water closet bowl shall be designed for 1.6 gallon siphon jet flushing action. 1. Install each listed water closet with the following: I a. Flush Valve: Quiet acting, exposed chrome plated brass with ADA non-hold open handle, screwdriver check/control stop with vandal resistant cap, cast wall flange, synthetic rubber diaphragm, and vacuum breaker, as recommended by closet manufacturer. Valve shall be I designed to provide dual flush operation. Sloan WES-111, or District approved equal. b. Seat: Solid black heavy weight molded plastic seat, with molded in bumpers; open front less cover for elongated bowl with check and self-sustaining hinge. Hinge and hardware to be 300 series stainless steel. Church 295-SSC, Beneke 523-SS/CH-B, or Bemis 1955 SS/C, or Disctrict Approved equal. 2. Floor Mounted, Top Spud 17" High "WC 1": American Standard 3043.102, Kohler K-4368. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 224000 010319 Page 2 of 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES I E. Lavatory 1. "LV-1" Faucet: Chrome plated brass body with single temperature metering operation with 0.5 GPM vandal resistant aerator. ADA compliant push button. Faucet shall be certified low lead, Moen M8884 Series. Provide under counter mixing valve certified to ASSE 1070 or CSA B125.3 and NSF Standard 61 Watts LF MMV Series or approved equal. 2. Wall Hung, 20"x 18" Size"LV-1": Enameled Cast Iron Construction with number of holes to match faucet. Provide with concealed arm hangers and wall backing plate rated for 300 lbs. lavatory edge load (J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade,Watts, or Zurn). American Standard 4869. F. Stainless Steel Sinks: Type 302 or 304 (unless noted otherwise), 18 gauge, self-rimming stainless steel sink, fully undercoated, drawn bowl with satin finish. Elkay numbers are listed; Just is approved. Install with stainless steel crumb cup strainer outlet or grid strainer, flange tail piece, and 1-1/2"trap. For faucets, Chicago numbers are listed, T&S Brass approved only. Sinks shall be punched for faucet specified. Coordinate number of holes required. Cock hole covers are not allowed. Provide with tail piece as required for dishwasher or AC condensate drain per drawings. Location Tag Basin (Elkay) Faucet(Chicago) ADA Strainer, Disposal,etc. Classroom S-1 Single Compartment 786- Yes Grid strainer. DRKADQ222055 GN8AE3VPCABCP Provide with flexible guard style bubbler Chicago 748-665 FHCP Staff S-2 LRADQ331965 786- Yes Grid strainer. Note#1. Lounge GN8AEVPCABCP Where HW dispenser is specified,I nSinkErator, H-Wave-SS Series Insta-Hot. Where Garage Disposer is specified, InSinkErator ,3/4 HP Evolution I Compact Garbage Disposal Health S-2A LRADQ221965 786- Yes Grid strainer. Note#1. GN8AEVPCABCP Note#1: Provide faucet deck re-enforcement per detail on drawings. G. Drains: Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Mifab. Numbers scheduled on drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations involved. H. Fixtures Furnished by(Another Section) (Fume Hood): Some fixtures will be furnished by the(under another specification section). Include under this section the required rough-ins, 3/8" chrome plated supplies with stops, 1-1/2" acid waste"P trap for each sink compartment, 1/2"gas stub-out with valve and - AGA flex connection, and make final connection. Verify all rough-ins and connection requirements before commencing work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING I A. Install in accordance with Section 221000. 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION III A. All exposed fixture hardware and piping shall be plated with polished chrome unless otherwise directed in these specifications. Where chair carriers or special carrier design are not indicated, provide 3/16"thick by 6"wide steel to waste or vent piping and to available building construction. B. All fixtures in contact with finished walls and floors shall be caulked with waterproof, white, non-hardening sealant which will not crack, shrink or change color with age. C. All fixtures and component parts shall conform to governing codes. I D. All fixtures shall be securely mounted level and plumb or as recommended by the manufacturer. Mount fixtures intended to be accessible to the handicapped at the dimensions required by code. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 224000 010319 Page 3 of 3 � PLUMBING FIXTURES 3.3 STARTUP A. Adjust flush valves, pressure reducing valves, mixing valves, water heater thermostats, and similar equipment. B. Remove construction protection, tags and labels and thoroughly clean all plumbing equipment and trim. Scour all fixtures just prior to building acceptance. END OF SECTION I I I I p I I I I I I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 1 of 12 IHVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the I HVAC work specified in this Division. B. The requirements of this Section apply to the HVAC systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 23 sections. II C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. I D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Fuel supply system. 2. Air handling equipment including packaged equipment and exhaust fans. I 3. Air distribution systems including ductwork, terminal units, dampers, insulation, and air inlets and outlets. 4. HVAC control system. 0 5. Special systems as specified herein. E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements. if1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA. B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or I standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: I 1. Federal Specifications (FS) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) I5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Factory Mutual (FM) 7. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments 8. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments 9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 12. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments 13. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) 14. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 1 15. American Gas Association (AGA) D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be 1 acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. 1 E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 2 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS I F. Commissioning shall be performed on this project. Commissioning agent is an agent of the owner. G. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. H. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions. See Article 3.01 for more information and requirements. I. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the ii point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 111 J. See 23 08 00 for commissioning requirements. II 1.3 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification. 1.4 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such 111 equipment or items as specified in other Divisions. B. Plumbing piping systems and fixtures and fire suppression piping systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or 111 specified herein. C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. D. All sections of Division 23 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 23. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS) A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. C. Include the manufacturer,type, style,catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appe: : - _ : -- . --- = -: :: .•- -•.--. -.. .-:roduetien-of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used. li D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 3 of 12 IHVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to I be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic"change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract I Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic I sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. I. For adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), include I printed statement of volatile organic compound (VOC) content. Use LEED Low-Emitting Materials form. 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is I submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted. 1 1.7 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized I breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. 1 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Project Record (As-Installed) Drawings: 1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division 1. 1 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping dimensioned from permanent ,1building features. b. Locations of all valves with assigned tag numbers. c. Locations of all fire dampers and other airflow control devices. d. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. Eradicate I extraneous information. e. Model numbers of installed equipment. 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. I 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project I record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda, and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. 7. Provide three (3) sets of hard copies. One set of PDF files and one set of AutoCAD files of all drawings. I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 4 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS J B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three (3) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams, and parts lists and vendors for all serviceable items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points, duct and piping pressure test reports, equipment startup records, and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three-ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each classification of equipment or data. Provide any performance curves, data, and model numbers from submittals. Comply with provisions of Division one where applicable to the mechanical work. Provide PDF file with all documents listed above. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5%to plus 10% as approved in each case. B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products I with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project. C. Efficiency: Heating and cooling equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2014 and the State Energy Code. Where equipment efficiencies are indicated, the use of alternate or substitute manufacturer's equipment with lower efficiencies is not permitted. D. Storage and Handling: 1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage. 3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 2.2 STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. A. Manufacturers: Cerus Industrial Model numbers are listed. General Electric, ABB Allen Bradley, Schneider Electric, Eaton, are approved equal. Provide starters by same manufacturer throughout project. B. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and recommended by manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a part. C. System Description 1. Single Phase Starter: Starters for 115VAC single phase motors less than 1 HP shall be capable of both manual and automatic operation. Refer to Section D for single phase starter requirements. 2. Magnetic Starters: Starters for 3-phase motors shall be magnetic starters. Refer to Section E for magnetic starter requirements. D. Enclosed Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Single Phase Starter I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 5 of 12 IHVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Single Phase Motor Starter Control: The single phase motor starter shall consist of a manually operated quick-make toggle mechanism lockable in the"Off" position which shall also function as the I motor disconnect. Additionally, the starter shall provide thermal overload protection, run status pilot light and fault pilot light. The starter must include the capability to operate in both manual and automatic control modes. In automatic mode, the starter shall have the capability to integrate with a I building automation system by providing terminals for run input, run status output and fault output. All control terminals shall be integrated in the starter. At a minimum, each single phase starter shall include an interposing run relay and current sensing status output relay. Single phase motor starter shall be in a surface mount enclosure. I2. Approved manufacturer: Cerus Industrial, model BAS-1 P or approved equal. E. Enclosed Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Non-Combination Starter Magnetic Motor Starters shall be enclosed in a general purpose electrical enclosure with the I1. , appropriate environmental rating. 2. Starters shall consist of a horsepower rated magnetic contactor with a minimum of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary contacts and solid state electronic overload relay. Overload relay shall protect all three 11 phases with a wide range current setting and trip class to allow field adjustment for specific motor FLA. Overload relay shall provide phase failure, phase loss, locked rotor and stall protection. 3. Provide a manual reset pushbutton on the starter cover to restore normal operation after a trip or fault condition. I 4. Each starter shall include an installed 50VA control power transformer(CPT) with protected secondary. The CPT must accept the available line voltage and the control voltage shall not exceed 120V. I 5. Installed accessories shall include Hand-Off-Auto operation switch with 22mm style operator interfaces. Include LED pilot light indicators for Hand, Off, Auto, Run and Overload conditions. All pilot devices shall be water tight and dust tight. 6. When remotely controlled by an automation system, the starter shall include remote run terminals II which accept both a voltage input signal and a contact closure. The voltage run input shall accept both AC and DC signals including 24VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC and 48VDC to allow direct connection of the transistorized automation signal to the starter. I 7. In applications where the motor is interlocked with a damper or valve, the actuator control must reside within the starter enclosure. The starter must provide a voltage output to operate the actuator to open the damper or valve without closing the motor circuit. The starter will only close the motor circuit and start the motor after it has received a contact closure from a limit or end switch confirming I the damper or valve position. 8. Manufacturer shall provide and install tags with engraved white letting to designate equipment served. F. Quality Assurance 1. Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty on the complete starter assembly. 2. The starter assembly shall be UL listed under UL 508A. I2.3 SOLID-STATE, VARIABLE-SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Controllers listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a standard NEMA Design B 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency of controller. Designed and rated by the manufacturer for the type of load (e.g., fans, blowers, and pumps) used and I also approved by the manufacturer for the type of connection used between the motor and load (direct connection or power transmission connection). I B. Input Line Reactors: 5%for reduction of harmonics. C. Output Line Reactors: Specially designed and constructed for IGBT controllers and designed to protect motor from voltage spikes over 150% of the bus voltage. Required where controller to motor cable length 1 exceeds 50 feet. Provide dV/dT filters for 460 volt motors with cable lengths in excess of 300'. D. In lieu of providing line reactors, the drive manufacturers may submit a power system analysis demonstrating compliance with IEEE 519. E. Ratings: 1. Output Ratings: 3-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout the voltage range. 2. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque, or as indicated. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 6 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 3. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Ambient Temperature: 0°C to 40°C. 5. Efficiency: 98 percent at normal power levels. F. Isolated Control Interface: Allow the controller to follow one of the following over an 11:1 speed range: 1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 milliamperes at 24 V. G. Internal Adjustability: Provide the following internal adjustment capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum RPM. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum RPM. 3. Acceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 50 to 110 percent of maximum rating. H. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 2. Snubber networks to protect against malfunction due to system voltage transients. 3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA class 10 performance. 4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination. 5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip. 6. Loss of Phase Protection. 7. Reverse Phase Protection. 8. Under- and Over-Voltage Trips. 9. Overtemperature Trip. 10. Short Circuit Protection. I. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after controller fault or on return of power to the system following an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Provide for restarting during deceleration without damage to the controller, motor, or load. J. Serial Communications: The VFD shall have an EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus and BACnet MS/TP. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be certified by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). K. EMI / RFI filters: All VFDs shall include onboard EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the entire VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN61800-3 for the First Environment restricted. No Exceptions. L. Operation and Maintenance Features: Include: 1. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators to indicate power on, run, overvoltage, line fault, overcurrent, and external fault. 2. Elapsed Time Meter. 3. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer. 4. Current-Voltage-Frequency Indicating Devices: Mount meters or digital readout device and selector switch flush in controller door and connect to indicate controller output. M. For drives to be mounted outside install in a NEMA 3R enclosure with ventilation fan to control cabinet temperature below 135°F. N. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc. 1 2.4 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturers: Inryco/Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. Inryco/Milcor Style DW, K, or M panels as required by construction. B. Construction: Flush style, fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Provide flush key cylinder locks on all access panels less than 8'above the floor in public spaces. Turn keys over to Owner at project completion. Screwdriver latches on all others. Stainless steel construction only for access panels in shower areas or on walls in restrooms. 2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 7 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Flexible Expansion/Seismic Loop: Factory fabricated assembly consisting of two 90 degree elbows, two lengths of flexible hose, and a 180 degree return bend to allow free movement in three axis. Return bend shall include attachment point for support and a drain/vent fitting. Hose shall be corrugated metal style with metal overbraid. Connections to match piping system except connection 2" and larger shall be flanged style. Metraflex "Metraloop." 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. The Manufacturers Standardization Society(MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP-69 are referenced in this section. B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter& Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted). C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods. D. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with OSSC Section 1613. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," Second Edition,i1998, SMACNA, or"A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint"ASHRAE RP-812, 1999. E. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Adjustable Saddle-Support: MSS Type 36 (Fig. 258) and MSS Type 37 (Fig. 259), including saddle, pipe and reducer. Fabricate base-support from steel pipe and include cast-iron flange or welded- steel plate. 7. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut" channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Super Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut. F. Vertical Pipe Clamps: 1. Two-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261). 2. Four-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt-holes. G. Hanger Attachment: 1. Hanger Rod: Rolled threads, zinc plated. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230). 3. Weldless Eye-Nut: MSS Type 17 (Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye-Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299). H. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power-Strut PS349 continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig. 86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 with arrow banding tape or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI. B. Duct Markers: I1. Adhesive duct markers 21/4'x14"with black text indicating contents on white background with directional flow arrow. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B946 or similar Seaton, Zeston, MSI. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 8 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS I C. Nameplates: 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16"thick, laminated 2-ply plastic, bottom ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing bottom ply. 2. Size: 2"by 4" nameplates with 3/16" high letters. 3. Labels for tee bar ceiling are to be 3/4"tall. D. Valve Tags: I 1. 2"diameter, 18-gauge polished brass tags with 3/16"chain hole and 1/4" high stamped, black-filled service designation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seaton, Brady, MSI. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work. B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. C. Coordination: 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and may be identified as such. Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations. 2. Prepare accurate AutoCAD shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation for duct work, piping and mechanical devices. Submit drawings prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. Provide drawing files to other trades for coordination. 3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist. D. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-roulin of pipit be necessarprovide for rovai�he simplest 9 9 P�P� g Y� pp pl layout possible for that particular portion of the work. 3.2 UTILITY COORDINATION A. Utility Coordination: Coordinate all aspects of the incoming utility services indicated with the city engineer, serving utility, and the off-street improvements contractor. Requirements of the utility company which exceed the provisions made on the Drawings or covered by these Specifications shall take precedence. Provisions made on the Drawings or Specifications in excess of the utility company's requirements shall take precedence. No additional compensation will be allowed the contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utilities. 3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings. B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 9 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific ' manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others. t 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with ' Code requirements. B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings. C. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, dielectric unions, valves and items requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete ' with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12"for simple manual access or smaller than 16"x 20"where personnel must pass through. D. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, temperature controls, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture. E. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, ' conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and isolation of equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping, and where shown on the drawings. Install valves at low points in piping systems that must be drained for service or freeze protection. 2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane. B. Insulated Valves: Install extended-stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation. C. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible. ' 3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building ' structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 10 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only. B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP- 89. d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields (MSS type 39) at each hanger. C. Pipe Support: 1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as required by Code) and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: Steel Copper 1-1/4" and smaller 7' span 6' span 1-1/2" pipe 9' span 6' span 2" pipe 10'span 10' span 2-1/2" & larger 12' span 10' span 3. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc.to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 4. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: Pipe and Tube Size Rod Size Inches mm Inches mm 1/2"to 4" 12.7 to 101.6 3/8" 9.5 5"to 8" 127.0 to 203.2 1/2" 12.7 10"to 12" 254.0 to 304.8 5/8" 15.9 D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable. F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTSTI N E S C O 230500 122018 Page 11 of 12 IHVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for working load, I depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge-style anchors. H. Seismic Restraints: Install restraints where recommended in SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual" and as required by code. Show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with I OSSC Section 16 and reference ASCE standard. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development(OSHPD). Acceptable Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved. Contractor shall submit calculations I and shop drawings, sealed and signed by a professional engineer, showing seismic restraint design for all equipment, piping and ductwork required to be braced. 3.7 HVAC SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION I A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown/scheduled/specified. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced"signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. Locate I pipe labels in accessible areas as follows: 1. Near each valve, meter, gauge, or control device. 2. Near equipment such as pumps, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc. 3. At piping branch connections. I 4. At penetrations (each side) of walls, ceilings, and floors. 5. At access panels and doors. 6. At 25 foot maximum intervals. Provide a minimum of one label above each room where lift-out I ceiling is installed. Reduce intervals in congested areas such as mechanical rooms. B. Valve Identification: Tag all valves with brass disc and chain. Prepare valve charts indicating valve number, size, location, function and normal position. Use no duplicate numbers in Plumbing and Heating Isystems. Mount glazed frames containing one set of valve charts in the building mechanical room. C. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic-laminate signs at locations of major equipment such as heat exchangers, pumps, etc. Identify equipment in field same as on drawings. Permanently mount in an appropriate and effective location. Provide tags on access panels or tee bar grid where service valves, I terminal units, fire/smoke/fire &smoke dampers, or other equipment needing service above the ceiling. D. Operation Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed to convey the Imessage; example: "DO NOT CLOSE THIS VALVE EXCEPT WHEN THE PUMP IS OFF." 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS I A. Provide complete connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental piping, fittings, trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work I and requiring HVAC piping or duct connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final I completion,thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted I with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade. I3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to I accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to avoid cutting of new finished surfaces. I3.11 MECHANICAL PAINTING TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230500 122018 Page 12 of 12 HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. See Requirements of 099000 for Painting of Mechanical items. 3.12 HVAC WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination. B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Division 1 as previously specified in this Section. C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of the HVAC equipment and systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems. Record the training session and provide file to Owner. END OF SECTION I 1 1 I i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230548 122018 Page 1 of 2 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified ' elsewhere. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Isolator Engineering: Selected and furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Select isolators for 98% efficiency unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Manufacturer: Provide field installed isolation required from a single manufacturer where possible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data sheets on all vibration isolators and seismic restraints. B. Provide itemized list showing the items of equipment or piping to be isolated, isolator type and model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specified drawings showing frame and construction. C. Provide manufacturer's drawings showing equipment frame construction for each item including dimensions, structural member sizes and support locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Amber/Booth, Mason Industries, Vibration Mountings and Controls, Kinetics Noise Control. B. Manufacturer Model Numbers: Amber/Booth figure numbers are listed unless indicated otherwise. ' 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Types of Isolators: ' 1. Hanger with Spring and Rubber Stop: Combination neoprene element and spring hangers—Hangers shall consist of a steel frame containing a neoprene isolation element at the top and a coil steel spring seated in a neoprene cup on the bottom. Both the element and the cup shall be molded with a neoprene bushing that passes through the steel frame. The neoprene element shall be capable of an ' average deflection of 0.35". The steel springs shall be capable of a minimum static deflection of 0.75" with a minimum additional travel to solid of 1/2". Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting ' the box and short circuiting the spring. Hangers shall be factory precompressed 60%of the total deflection determined by the assigned load per hanger. Hangers shall b manufactured with provision for bolting or attaching to ceiling flat iron straps, rods or steel runners. Hangers shall be of a failsafe design. Amber/Booth BSRA. 2. Neoprene Pads: Neoprene pads shall be of waffle or ribbed design, 1/4"—3/8"thick. They shall be installed as a single layer or in multiple layers with 16 gauge steel shims cemented between so that the combination of stiffness and total neoprene thickness achieves the static deflection listed in the vibration isolation schedule in conjunction with a distributed load area that will maintain 10-50 psi. If the equipment support location does not completely cover the pads or does not consist of flat steel footing, an additional full coverage, load distribution plate of minimum 3/8 steel shall be placed between the pad and attached to the equipment support. There shall be no rigid structure between top and bottom of mount. Amber/Booth Type NR Ampad. B. Neoprene Mounts: Neoprene mounts shall be one piece, neoprene molded assemblies with a minimum loaded static deflection of 0.25". The mount shall incorporate both rubber-in-shear and compression load ' characteristics. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered. The mount shall have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolt holes shall also be provided for both surfaces. The top bolt hole shall be threaded. There shall be no rigid structure between top and bottom supports. Amber/Booth Type RV. C. Noise and Vibration Barrier Hanger: For ductwork and piping where indicated. Target Enterprises Inc. "ARH-1"or accepted substitute. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230548 122018 Page 2 of 2 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL I D. Seismic and Start-Up Restraints: Select all isolators to withstand seismic loads equivalent two times the isolator load rating applied from any direction. Mason Industries type Z-1011 on all isolated equipment not utilizing isolators with integral restraints. E. Flexible Pipe Connectors-Type SS: All stainless steel hose and braid with carbon steel connections. Male thread ends on flexible connectors 2" and smaller, and flanged connections on 1-1/2" and larger I connectors. F. Ductwork Flexible Connections: 1. Typical connections shall be made of 30 ounce woven glass fiber, coated with neoprene, sewn I together at the edges and joints. 2. The flexible connections shall be approximately 6" long and held in place with 1"wide bands of 12 gauge galvanized steel bolted to duct and to outlets and inlets of the units and fans with 1/8"stove bolts, 5"o.c. 3. It is the intent that these flexible connections shall withstand the operating air pressure, shall not permit air leakage and shall not transmit vibration. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install vibration isolators and flexible connectors as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. B. Ductwork Flexible Connections: Install flexible duct connections on all externally spring isolated air handling units including roof mounted units down through roof curbs (and/or to unit side duct connections). I Fan connections, both at inlet and discharge, shall be made with flexible materials so as to prevent the transfer of vibration from fans to ductwork connected thereto. C. Flexible Pipe Connections: 1. Provide flexible connections on all piping to spring isolated equipment, where indicated on Drawings and for all coils mounted in spring isolated air handling units or plenums. Coils in rigid units and plenums do not require flexible connectors. Provide a flexible connection in both the supply and return connections to the coil as near the coil as possible. 2. Install connectors in a straight line as recommended by the manufacturer without offsets or twists and support pipe without any load on flexible connectors. Minimum live length shall be as follows: Pipe Size Minimum Live Length 1"through 1-1/2" 8" 2"through 2-1/2" 10" 3"through 4" 12" Over 4" 18" I D. Anchorage: Anchor__all isolators to the floor, wall or ceiling structure and anchor points reinforced where necessary. Anchor bolts, cap screws, etc., shall not be continuous through the isolator such that vibrations are transmitted to the structure. E. Adjustment: Adjustable during and after installation, to ensure sufficient clearance between vibration isolation element and rigid restraining device. Do not install isolators until they have been loaded and I adjusted to achieve the specified static deflection and clearances. 3.2 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS A. All equipment shall be anchored to resist displacement including sliding, swinging, and overturning due to seismic forces. Friction due to equipment weight shall not be considered as anchorage. B. Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing seismic restraint design for all equipment weighing 400 lbs. or more. Design shall show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance I with OSSC Chapter 16. END OF SECTION I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230590 122018 Page 1 of 5 ' TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: After completion of the work of installation, test and regulate all components of the new heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems to verify air volumes and heating-cooling flow rates indicated on the Drawings. B. Balancing Organization: I1. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Performed by a firm providing this service established in the State of Oregon. 2. Balancing Organization: Approval by Architect. Air Balancing Specialties, Neudorfer Engineers, ' Northwest Engineering Services, Pacific Coast Air Balancing, or approved. 3. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services. C. Balancer shall perform work as a Contractor to the General Contractor directly, not through the Mechanical Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Agency shall be a current member of NEBB or AABC specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed under direct field supervision of a Certified NEBB Supervisor or a Certified AABC Supervisor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section in Division 1, Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. I1. Submit under provisions of Section 230500. 2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. ' 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air ' outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or other certifying agency prior to commencing system balance. 6. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB forms, or forms containing information indicated in Schedules. 7. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. ' b. Address of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. c. Telephone number of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect and Owner. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. ' i. Project altitude. j. Report date. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and ' rough setting. E. Provide a list of equipment, air supply, return and exhaust, heating water, and chilled water systems not in compliance with tolerances subsequently specified. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230590 I 122018 Page 2 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING I PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- NOT USED -- I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. I 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. I 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES I A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and +/- 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within +/- 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within +/- 10 percent of design. 3.3 ADJUSTING I A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. I D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.4 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air I quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. I D. Adjust noise distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch I air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230590 122018 Page3of5 ' TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.02" (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries. ' 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. Packaged rooftop heating/cooling units 2. Air coils 3. Air handling units 4. Fans 5. Air Filters 6. Air inlets and outlets B. Report: ' 1. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 2. Instrument List: ' a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date ' C. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave make/size/model D. V-Belt Drives: I1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter, and RPM 4. Belt, size, and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and tested E. Heating Section: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230590 122018 Page 4 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING ' 5. Air flow, design and tested 6. Entering air temperature, design and tested 7. Leaving air temperature, design and tested 8. Air pressure drop, design and tested F. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and tested 7. Return air flow, specified and tested 8. Outside air flow, specified and tested 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave make/size/bore 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM G. Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location 2. Supply air flow, design and tested 3. Return air flow, design and tested 4. Outside air flow, design and tested 5. Return air temperature 6. Outside air temperature 7. Mixed air temperature, design and tested H. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and tested 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM _ I. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor J. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230590 122018 Page 5 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test(final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow 3.6 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS A. Adjusting and Balancing: 1. Adjust and balance all portions of the mechanical systems to produce indicated results within limits of minus 5 or plus 10 percent or as subsequently directed by the Architect. 2. Balancing data may be spot checked with instruments similar to that used by the balancing firm. 3. If, in the judgment of the Architect, the discrepancies warrant additional adjustment, readjust and rebalance the systems at no additional project cost. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230700 122018 Page 1 of 2 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of mechanical equipment specified elsewhere in ' these specifications. B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with provisions of the State of Oregon Energy Code. B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50 and containing less than 0.1% by weight deca-PDE fire retardant. ' C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 230500, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic. 2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Insulating Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, Pabco, Imcoa or Certain Teed. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise. B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong. 2.2 DUCT INSULATION A. Interior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber formaldehyde-free blanket with "FSK"facing, k value = 0.31 at 75 deg. F, 0.2 perms, and UL 25/50 surface burning rating. Johns Manville "Microlite." B. Below Grade Ductwork: Insulate with Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation. 2.3 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturers for the insulation and conditions specified except staples not permitted on chilled water lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION ' A. Ductwork: Insulate the following: 1. All supply ductwork. 2. All supply and return ductwork in systems routed in unconditioned spaces or exposed to the outside conditions. ' 3. All outside air intake ducts. 4. All ductwork required to be insulated by code. 5. All relief ducts. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230700 122018 Page 2 of 2 HVAC INSULATION B. Insulation Thickness: Select board and blanket insulation of thickness required to provide the following installed R-value. 1. All heating or cooling system supply and return ducts located on the exterior of the insulated building envelope and all outside air intake ducts. a. R-8 2. All heating and cooling system supply ducts located inside of building envelope or in unconditioned spaces, R-5. 3. All heating and cooling system return ducts located in vented spaces, R-8. C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent sagging on all rectangular or square ducts over 24"wide, install Gramweld or equal welding pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing 18"on center in both directions. D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic or taped with 2"wide vapor- proof, pressure-sensitive tape. Seal all penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive. E. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated on the Drawings and/or specified, no exterior insulation is required. Select duct lining to provide the required R-value. Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6"past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required. Duct lining is specified in Section 233000. END OF SECTION 1 r I I I 1 i I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 1 of 20 DDC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other ' Division 1 —General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 BASIC SYSTEM ' A. Extend the existing Metasys System. The means of communication from the existing system may be either N2 or BACnet. B. The system shall include all control unit hardware and software, operator input/output devices, sensors, control devices, and miscellaneous devices required for complete operation and future modifications. Documentation for all software and hardware devices shall be provided. C. Provide engineering, installation, calibration, commissioning, acceptance testing assistance, software programming, and checkout for complete and fully operational DDC. 1.3 SCOPE OF SERVICES (OVERVIEW) A. Work under this section is related to the new equipment and systems. Work under this section of the specification shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Furnish and install a complete sensor, actuator, wiring and piping system for all air handling and related equipment as shown on the plans and specified in this section. Install all necessary sensors and actuators as required by the plans and specifications and equipment schedules. Coordinate installation of factory mounted controls. Factory mounted devices except for valves and damper actuators to match manufacturer of control system. 2. Label all sensors, control devices, and control units. 3. Furnish and install conduit, wire, branch circuit protection, etc. as required to bring 120 VAC power to control panel locations and equipment (actuators, sensors, control devices, etc.) as shown on the drawings and described in the specifications. Provide surge protection for each line power source. 4. All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be provided as necessary for proper ' data communication. 5. Coordination as required with other sections of the specification for the proper and complete installation of the wiring and tubing system, control devices, dampers, valve, actuators, etc. ' 6. Furnish and install Direct Digital Control Equipment (DDC) as required by the point list, plans, and specifications including, control units, software, database development, check-out, and debugging. Provide points necessary for a complete and operable system. 7. Install the sequence of operations agreed to by Owner and Engineer. 1 8. Software testing requirements shall include testing in the field of all logic sequences including actual simulation of different processes and events and observing program response to the process or event. All deviations from the requirements of the sequence as specified on the drawings or this specification shall be corrected immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 9. Provide documentation of software system testing before acceptance testing. 10. Provide staff for acceptance testing procedures. Modify hardware and software errors/problems at no additional cost to the Owner. 11. Provide a series of training classes for Owner staff; 4 hours of training shall be included for this project(s). Future 12 hours of training for this project or others shall be included. 12. Setup trending data before and after system acceptance. 13. Attend a series of meetings with the Engineer and Owner to agree on system setup and operating ' parameters. 14. Provide detailed documentation of system configuration including control units and all control devices. 15. Provide a list of only the control devices that the Control Contractor cannot purchase. Those devices are to be purchased by the Owner and provided to the control contractor. 16. Read this section in its entirety for specific details. 17. Provide all equipment and personnel to complete system commissioning 230800 and as listed further in specification. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The BAS system shall be designed, installed, commissioned, and serviced by Owner's Control Contractor of choice. Johnson Controls installed by local Johnson Controls branch office in Milwaukie Oregon. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 2 of 20 DDC CONTROLS B. All products proposed for this contract shall have been in continuous and successful use for at least two (2) year (not including beta testing). C. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed especially for this project. D. Note: Equipment (controllers and software) should be provided by single manufacturer. All other products (e.g., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the control manufacturer. E. System shall be web based for control system. 1.5 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Mechanical Special Conditions, Electrical Special Conditions and Division - 1 Specification. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. This section specifies cooperation of the Control Contractor (the combination of installer and programmer hence forth) with other trades and including balancing firm to assure proper arrangement of control items. Control valves, dampers, wiring,thermostat wells, and other control devices that are to be built into the field assembled ductwork, piping; or wiring systems shall be furnished by the Control Contractor and installed under other sections of the specification as directed by the Control Contractor and indicated in other portions of the specifications and drawings. 2. The Control contractor shall insure that the DDC system communicates successfully with other equipment (e.g., air handling units, packaged rooftop units, heat pumps, motors, actuators, etc.). Note: the equipment supplier is responsible for the proper performance of their equipment (assuming the proper signal are sent/received from the BAS). The control contractor is responsible for all system sensors, including those which are factory installed. 3. Electrical Wiring: All wiring required for work under this section of the specification shall be provided under this section of the specification unless otherwise specified. 4. Electrical wiring - power for control panels, control devices, and sensors a. Power for control units, control devices and sensors shall be coordinated with the air handling manufacturer for the project and/or the Owner. b. Contact locations in starter control circuits. All contacts controlling motor starters, including overload contacts, shall be located on the hot side of the coil (ungrounded control power leg). Coordinate this requirement with the air handling manufacturer for the project. c. Extend power to damper actuators. 1) Actuators will be powered at 24 VAC. 2) At each auxiliary panel location, furnish and install a 24 VAC transformer with 20 VA of capacity for each actuator installed and served from the panel. 3) Furnish and install a fused terminal in the +24 VAC lead and a disconnecting terminal in the neutral lead of the power cable to each actuator. 5. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: The Controls Contractor shall operate the BAS to assist the TAB Contractor. Prov+=_ • = = - •• • •_ _•-- •• ••- - of system all portions ---- _ _ so y of the system can be balanced and information required by Section 230923 can be provided. I C. Commissioning: Provide services as required to complete commissioning services. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL—CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications, As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids for the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Oregon Structural Specialty Code 3. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 5. National Electric Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) 6. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 7. American Society Of Heating, Refrigeration, And Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. Instrument Society Of America(ISA) 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST). 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 3 of 20 I DDC CONTROLS B. Meet all of the local authorities and State Fire Marshal code requirements for normal operating and smoke I mode functions. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals are required for the following, in accordance with Section 230500. The Contractor I shall not start the project until the Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved. Shop drawings shall include: 1. All submittals should be provided on paper(with legible font type and size). I 2. All drawings should be labeled TC (temperature control) rather than being referenced within the mechanical or electrical divisions. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered 3. One drawing per air handler or system (e.g., boiler plant). Drawing should include point descriptors (DI, DO, Al, AO), addressing, and point names. Each point names should be unique (within a system I and between systems). For example, the point named for the mixed air temperature for AH#1, AH #2, and AH #3 should not be MAT but could be named AH #1 MAT, AH#2 MAT, and AH #3 MAT. The point names could be logical and consistent between systems and AHs. The abbreviation or short hand notation (e.g., MAT) should be clearly defined in writing by the Control Contractor. I Naming standard will be decided on during meeting between Engineer, Control Contractor, and Owner. Convention shall match Phase I work. 4. Floor plans depicting all BAS control devices (control units, control devices, gateways, LAN interface I devices, actuators, sensors, motor control centers, etc.) in relation to mechanical rooms, HVAC equipment, and building footprint. 5. DDC System architecture diagram indicating schematic location of all Control Units, workstations, I LAN Interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each Control Unit, Indicate protocol, baud rate, and type of LAN (per Control Unit). 6. For each drawing, include a schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment, control devices, etc. Label each control I device with setting or adjustable range of control. Label each input and output with the appropriate range. 7. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor start, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel control point termination diagrams with all wire I numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are existing, factory-installed and portions to be I field-installed. Show all electric connections of the controls system to equipment furnished by others complete to terminal points identified with manufacturer's terminal recommendations. 9. Control Contractor shall provide one complete drawing that shows the equipment (fan unit, boiler, I chiller, etc.) manufacturers wiring diagram with the control contractors wiring diagram superimposed on it. Supply hard copy. 10. Provide complete panel drawings that are: I a. Clearly labeled. b. Show the internal and external component arrangement so that the operators can identify the components by their position if the labels come off c. Wiring access routes should also be identified so that Class 1 wiring is separated from Class 2 and 3 and so high voltage wiring is segregated from low voltage wiring and tubing. 11. Complete identification of all control devices (manufacturer's type, number, and function). 12. Provide sequence of operation for each type of system. I 13. Damper schedule should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) b. Direct or reverse actuation c. Manufacturer make and model Id. Damper size e. Damper torque required based on damper size f. Damper torque required based on specification. I g. Actuator requirements h. Actuator spring range i. Special construction features (U.L. listed smoke damper, etc.) I LS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 111 ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS 122018 Page 4 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 14. A set of drawings showing the details of the valve and valve actuator installation for each valve, required for operation and maintenance manuals only. This should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) b. Manufacturer make and model c. Close off rating d. Flow rate e. Actuator spring range f. Cavitation coefficient (where applicable) g. Special construction features 15. Provide graphic screen for each typical HVAC unit. B. Record Documents: 1. Provide a complete set of control drawings with as-installed equipment and operating sequences on paper and in electronic format (AutoCAD). "As-built" (i.e., as-installed and debugged and after system acceptance) documentation shall include the following as minimum: a. All data specified in the shop drawings section in its final "as-built"form. b. Schematic outline of the overall control system for quick reference c. Adequate record of the work as installed, including exact location of control panels and the wiring route (using TC documents, section 1.8-3). d. Blue prints shall include sequence of operation. e. System hardware specification data which provides a functional description of all hardware components. f. System engineering information which provides all of the information for the system set-up, definition and application. I g. System database information that provides the point names and application data programmed into the system. h. All of the information, data, procedures and drawings shall be supplied in the form of manuals. 2. Provide as-installed (after system acceptance) control logic diagrams showing all points (real and virtual). 3. DDC systems that use line-based programming must reference line code number with control logic diagrams and/or with sequence of operation text. Control Contractor shall discuss final format with owner. 4. The Control Contractor shall document deviations from the shop drawing submittals. Documentation should include what equipment was changed and the reason for the change. 5. Provide copy of final test reports. I C. Operating and Maintenance Materials: 1. Provide Operation and maintenance data on all equipment requiring service or adjustment (prior to and after final acceptance). 2. Provide user guides and programming manuals for all hardware furnished by the Control Contractor. a. A reference manual shall be furnished-and shall contain, as a minimum, an overview of the system, its organization, the concepts of networking, and central site/field hardware relationships. b. Manuals for each new controller type shall be provided. c. When manuals/O & M information is provided with Owner provided control items include those in this document. 3. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic drawing. List all devices/equipment and match to schematic and actual field labeling. Provide quantity, manufacturer, actual product ordering number, description, size, accuracy, operating ranges (voltage, temperature, pressure, etc.), input/output parameters, etc. 4. Field copies of wiring for Primary and Secondary Control Units. (Laminated and permanently affixed in or above controller). 5. For the equipment not manufactured by the Control Vendor, an alphabetical list of system components with the name, address and 24-hour telephone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first two years of operation shall be provided. 6. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment that includes: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure. b. Start-up, operation, maintenance, disassembly and shutdown procedures. c. Maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 5 of 20 DDC CONTROLS d. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions. I e. Cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. f. Product data on each piece of equipment, including damper and valve information noted earlier. 7. Points list shall include all physical input/output and virtual points. Points list shall be provided in hard copy and shall include: a. Name b. Address c. Engineering units ' d. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units e. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition f. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. g. Message and alarm reporting as specified. h. Identification of all adjustable points i. Description of all points 8. Control Logic documentation shall include: a. Drawings documenting control logic for all aspects of the BAS including control units, controlled devices, sensors, etc. b. A detailed sequence of operation (see Part 6) should be submitted on separate sheets for each AH or HVAC system. The text description of the sequence of operation should include: 1) Logic control statement (i.e., describe control loop process) 2) Setpoints and throttling ranges, deadbands, and differentials for temperature and pressure variables, gains, reset schedules, etc. 3) Limits/conditions and interlocks 4) Measured variables (e.g., mixed air temperature) 5) Variables to communicate to/from the network c. Control diagrams should identify I1) System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text) 2) All DO, DI, AO, Al points 3) Virtual points 4) All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop 5) Legend for graphical icons or symbols 6) Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT=outside air temperature) 7) Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off) 8) Voltage, amperage, or resistance input/output signal for all sensors and controlled devices D. Conformance Certificates: Upon substantial completion of the work, supply and turn over all required inspection certificates from governing authorities to certify that the work as installed conforms to the rules ' and regulations of the governing authorities. E. Warranty Certificates: 1. Warrant all work as follows: a. Labor and materials for the new control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of 24 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the owner. b. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during normal business hours. c. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for Emergency service during the ' warranty period within 4 hours. 2. Emergency service rates for additional assistance shall be provided. a. The contractor shall provide unlimited phone technical support to the owner during the warranty period. If the technical support location of the contractor is outside of the toll free calling area for the customer, the contractor shall have a toll free number or accept collect calls for the purpose of providing technical support. b. The contractor shall provide technical support bulletin service (if available) for two years. c. During the warranty period and if required by the School District, parts for the DDC system shall arrive at the School District within 24 hours of placing an order. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 6 of 20 DDC CONTROLS d. At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Engineer, the Engineer shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of the specifications listed in this section (see 6.2 thru 6.3). The date of acceptance shall be the start of the warranty period. e. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the owner has received beneficial use due to an early system startup. f. Control contractor shall be available for a final check and adjustment of the DDC system before the warranty period ends. The final check will include input from the maintenance staff as well as the Engineer. 1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device not factory installed. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain cartons and end caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment and pipe-end damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment and inside of pipe and tubes. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. I 1.9 DISCREPANCIES A. Any items not included in the specification but referred to in the Appendix and/or Drawings in reference to this project and any other incidentals not referred to but required as a basic element to the overall performance and/or successful completion of the work shall be installed as part of this contract at no additional charge. PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS, CONTROL DEVICES, SENSORS A. Installation of some of the equipment in this section may be the responsibility of other contractors. I B. All sensors and equipment related to or connected to the DDC system shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Coordinate with other divisions as required for installation of devices such as valves, thermal wells, etc. 2.2 WIRING, CONDUIT, AND HANGERS A. To supply, install and connect all conduits, boxes and wires between all the different components related in this section including all line voltage to the equipment. B. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the drawings. Bring to the attention of the Engineer in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. C. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. D. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the central plant, tunnels, and plenums to be supported by B-line Bridle rings or equal. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the hallways, rooms, and other public areas shall be in conduit if surface mount. Wiring whenever possible shall be concealed in walls or above ceilings. 1 E. All wires in Bridle Rings or conduit shall follow building lines (i.e., wires in plenum space shall run within several inches of the wall and shall NOT run in the middle of the space). F. Wire: 1. Wire and cable of the sizes and types shown on the plans and/or hereinafter specified shall be furnished and installed by the Control Contractor. All wire and cable shall be new soft drawn copper and shall conform to all the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, IPCEA, and shall meet the specifications of the ASTM. 2. All control wiring to be copper stranded TEW-105,with appropriate gauge in accordance with the Codes. The minimum gauge used to be 16 AWG. 3. Communication wire shall have a color shield that match existing network cable. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 7 of 20 111111 DDC CONTROLS 4. Input/Output Wiring:Wiring serving inputs and outputs from the BAS shall be cables consisting of single or multiple twisted individually shielded pairs. Each pair shall have an independent shield with drain wire. Cables installed without conduit shall be plenum rated and comply with NEC article 725. Where automation input/output wiring is run in cable tray furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. Conductors shall be minimum #18 wire gauge. 5. Power Conductors:All feeder and branch circuit wire shall be 600 V insulated of THHN type unless shown or specified to be otherwise. No wire less than No. 12 gauge shall be used except for control circuits or low voltage wiring. Wire sizes No. 14 to No. 10 shall be solid except where otherwise indicated. Wire sizes No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire sizes shown are American Wire Gauge sizes. Where power conductors are run in cable tray, furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. I 6. All the conductors used for signals from the Controllers and field sensors must be shielded two wire, 18 AWG. with a drain wire. Conductor model 8760 from Belden is to be used or approved alternative by Engineer. 7. All power wiring to be copper stranded RW 90 type, with appropriate gauge in accordance with the III Codes. The following color code must be applied: line voltage to be black and/or white, ground to be green. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cable and wire shall be a standard type as manufactured by General I Electric Company, National Electric Company, U. S. Rubber Company, Simplex, General Cable Company, Carol, Anaconda, Rome, Southwire, Belden, Alpha, Houston Wire and Cable, or ITT Royal. I G. Wiring Installation: 1. All wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and there shall be no unnecessary slack in the conductors. 2. All wire terminations will be identified using rail terminal strips I 3. All drain wires must be grounded at the source end. The other end must be protected with a dielectric material (tape). 4. All control wiring (24 V and more) must be in a separate conduit from the shielded conductors. I 5. Pull-Box and Junction Box: a. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or where required to facilitate wire installation. Locate in conjunction with other trades so as to install without conflict with other materials or equipment. I b. A pull-box will be located at every 50'. c. All switch, pull,junction boxes, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized, concrete tight, with interlocking ring or multiple point locking devices. Connectors shall be three piece. I Indentation fittings are not acceptable. d. In suspended ceilings, all boxes must be installed on the structure. e. Boxes shall be attached by fasteners designed for the purpose and shall provide adequate mechanical strength for future maintenance. I f. Junction and pull boxes not dimensioned shall be minimum 4 inch square. 6. Care shall be used to avoid proximity to heat ducts and/or steam lines. Where crossings are unavoidable, conduit shall clear covering of line by at least six inches. I a. Wiring runs will not obstruct walkways or service access to mechanical/electrical equipment. All cable shall be self-supported and attached to the structure as required by code. Cable will follow a common path whenever possible, and will not run closer than 18"from any AC power or signal source. I 7. Motor Interlock Wiring: Interlock circuit wiring shall be No. 14 solid or stranded wire. Stranded wire only shall be used where wiring is used for flexible wiring harnesses. Stranded control wire shall be provided with crimp type spade terminators. Interlock circuit wiring shall be color coded or numbered I using an identical number on both ends of the conductor. Wire numbers shall be installed before conductors are pulled. Where motor interlock conductors are run in cable tray, furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 8 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 111 8. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made at outlet,junction, or pull boxes. Wire to No.6 gauge shall be spliced using Scotchlok wire nuts. No Bakelite wirenuts shall be used. Wire No. 6 and larger shall be spliced using solderness connectors as manufactured by Penn Union Company. Splices No. 6 and larger shall be insulated by taping with plastic vinyl tape as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Splices shall not be permitted in automation input and output wiring without specific written authorization from the Engineer. If such a splice is approved, the location of the splice shall be clearly documented on the "As Built"drawings. Splices in automation wiring, if necessary, shall be made using Thomas&Betts STA-KON connectors installed per the manufacturer's directions to maintain NEMA specified voltage drops and wire retention forces. 9. Grounding: in a. The contractor shall extend existing equipment grounding systems. The Contractor shall use only approved grounding clamps and connectors as manufactured by Penn-Union, Burndy or 0- Z Mfg. Company. b. The conduit system of the 480/277 and 208Y/120 volt systems shall be continuous and shall be used as the static grounding conductor, except for circuits installed in flexible conduit. Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduits and extend to the nearest outlet or junction box. Install a green grounding conductor inside all non-metallic conduits or raceways. H. Conduit: 1. Conduit Material: a. Where required wiring to be in E.M.T. type conduits. b. All conduits to be a minimum of 1/2". c. All flexible conduits will not exceed 6' in length and are to be used only in areas where vibrations and/or expansion joints are present. d. Jacketed flexible steel conduit (Sealtite) shall be used where flexible conduit connections are required at installations exposed to moister or outdoors. Otherwise standard flexible conduit is allowed. e. In damp areas, the conduit and related equipment must be suitable for the application. f. Electrometalic tubing shall be installed for all exposed work and for all concealed work in applications where conduit is required. g. Conduit shall be by Allied, Triangle, Republic, Youngstown, Carlon, Rob Roy, or approved equal. h. For exposed installations where the conduit cannot be run in ceiling spaces, wall cavities or attics, surface-mounted raceway (wire mold) is acceptable. No EMT is allowed in these locations. Provide samples for size and color selection. Surface-mounted raceway shall use a metal backing plate for attachment to structure. Double sided tape is not an approved attachment. i. All penetrations of firewalls 1-inch or greater must be sleeved with metal conduit. The conduit must extend a minimum of 18-inches on either side of the fire wall and must be capped with connectors and bushings. The conduit fill cannot exceed more than 60 per cent of the conduit's capacity. Any penetrations smaller than-7/8-inch-or--Ic.,s do not require metal-sleeving;but must be filled with fire-rated sealant. Please note it is the contractor's responsibility to meet all state, local, and federal building code requirements, as well as review Asbestos site documentation & consult with school district Asbestos coordinator before commencing work. 2. Conduit Installation: a. All wiring in mechanical rooms at heights below 8 feet must be run in conduit. Otherwise, wiring in all other open areas must have conduit (at all heights). b. Conduit not required above accessible ceilings or where routing wire in existing walls. c. All conduits to be installed in a concealed manner where possible and shall be installed parallel I to the lines of the building. d. All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building walls or floors. e. Conduit bends shall be made with standard hickeys of proper size; radius of bends to be at least 6 times the diameter of the conduit. Runs between outlets shall not contain more than the equivalent of three quarter bends. Conduit runs shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, outlet to cabinet, etc. f. Conduits shall be installed with pitch toward outlet box wherever possible. All heavy wall conduits shall have two locknuts and a bushing at each termination outlet box,junction box, etc., except where terminated in a threaded hub. Fittings on electrometalic tubing shall be compression type or set-screw. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 9 of 20 111 DDC CONTROLS g. A bushing shall be used where conduit enters a panel box. Bushing for No. 4 AWG or larger shall be insulated type with provisions for grounding as type "BL" made by O-Z Electric Company, or approved equal. h. Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across the building expansion joints. Fittings shall be Type"AX" or"TX"as made by O-Z Electric Company, or approved equal. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. i. All 1/2" conduit to be supported every 6', the supports will be located at the connector end of the conduit. j. Exposed conduit shall be securely fastened in place on maximum 5 ft. intervals for 3/4"through 2-1/2 inch nominal sizes. Supports may be one hole malleable straps or other approved devices. No perforated metal straps will be permitted. I. Wireway: 1. Furnish and install at all control panel locations a NEMA 1 lay-in wireway system to bring cable into and out of the panel as detailed on the drawings and specified in this section. Furnish 3-way wireways at each panel location: one for Class 1 wiring, 1 for Class 2 and Class 3 wiring. Panels at units to be NEMA 3R or better. 2. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run without conduit or in a cable tray shall consist of a connection to the control panel with a vertical extension to 8'-0"or the pipe rack or cable tray level, whichever is higher. The vertical section shall terminate in a 90°fitting with a closure plate. The closure plate shall be provided with a conduit nipple with locknuts and bushings as a wire entry point into the square duct. The conduit nipple shall be one size smaller than the wireway it is associated with. 3. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run in conduit shall consist of a horizontal section of wireway with a length equal to the control panel width and located above the control panel and connected to the control panel with three conduit nipples, locknuts, and bushings; one for tubing, one for Class 1 wiring and one for Class 2 and 3 wiring. Conduits for cable runs shall terminate on the wireway. 4. The intent of the wireway configurations outlined above is to provide a method for adding input and output wiring to the control panel without having to drill directly into the electronics enclosure after the system is on-line and running and to provide sufficient area to land field conduits while maintaining appropriate circuit segregation for wire entry into the controller enclosure. The installation of wireway shall be made with this consideration in mind. J. Hangers and Anchors: 1. Where control system tubing is run on trapezes and/or hangers used by and or installed by other trades, supports for the trapezes shall be coordinated by all trades using the trapeze to assure that the anchor system is not overloaded and is sufficient for the load imposed including a margin of safety and seismic considerations. Under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the electrical trades be used to support work by any other trade, nor shall the electrical trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of electrical equipment, all as required by the National Electric Code. Similarly, under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the sprinkler trades be used to support work by any other trade, nor shall the sprinkler trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of sprinkler systems or equipment, all as required by NFPA 13, Standard For The Installation Of Sprinkler Systems. 2. Anchors to be loaded in tension for use in existing concrete structure and anchors loaded in tension and not cast in place shall be epoxy resin set anchors installed per the manufacturers recommendations for technique, size, loading, embedment, etc. Where anchors are loaded in shear at these locations, suitably sized and installed wedge type anchors may be used. 3. In all cases, anchor loading shall be based on hanger spacing, weight of the pipe to be supported when full and insulated, weight of any additional loads imposed upon the anchor, wind loading, seismic loading, quality of the material that the anchor is being installed in, etc. The Control Contractor shall verify in the field that the anchors used and the materials that they are being installed in are suitable for the load imposed and shall bring any problems to the attention of the Engineer in writing immediately and not proceed without direction from the Engineer. 4. Wedge type anchors shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt II. Adhesive anchors shall be Hilti HVA. 2.3 UNIT CONTROL PANELS (INSTALLATION AND FABRICATION) 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS LS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 10 of 20 DDC CONTROLS A. Enclosed cabinet type with hinged door for mounting all relays, switches,thermometers, and miscellaneous controls not requiring direct mounting on equipment such as sensing elements, valves and damper motors. Provide cabinet for each control unit adjacent to each system. B. Control panels shall be fabricated to match the approved shop drawings submitted by the control contractor. Fabrication shall be in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall facilitate repair, maintenance, and adjustment of the equipment contained therein. C. Control panels shall be fabricated and laid out to incorporate the following features: 1. Identification of all internally and cover mounted devices. Cover mounted labels shall be engraved labels as specified in this section (5.10). Labels shall be mounted adjacent to the device they are associated with so that replacement of the device does not eliminate the label. Provide laminated control diagram at each panel. 2. Electrical wiring shall enter the panel from the top, bottom, and/or side of the left side of the panel or as required by the panel supplier to meet NEC requirements. 3. All wires entering or leaving the panel shall pass through a rail terminal strip. Where the wires are part of a current loop transmission circuit, the terminals shall be the disconnecting link type. Terminals shall be identified with a number that corresponds to the terminal number on the job wiring diagram. Rail terminal strip specifications include: Terminal rail assemblies shall be fabricated from components selected from the product line of one manufacturer. Sizes (heights, widths, and profiles) of each terminal shall be selected to be compatible with the other terminals on the rail. Terminal units located at the end of a rail or adjacent to terminals with a different profile (for example, where disconnecting terminals are located next to resistor terminals) shall be provided with end caps to completely close off the terminal unit interior components from the local environment. End stops shall be provided for on all rails to secure the terminals located on the rail in place. 4. All internal wiring and tubing shall be run inside plastic wiring/tubing duct as manufactured by Tyton. Wire duct shall be sized to hold the required number of wires and tubes without crimping the tubes and with sufficient space to allow wiring and tubing to be traced during troubleshooting operation. 5. Wires that pass from the panel interior to cover mounted devices shall be provided with a flex loop that is anchored on both sides of the hinge.Wiring running to cover mounted devices shall be bundled using cable ties. 6. Provide strain relief type cord and cable connectors for all cables that leave the panel as individual cables not in conduit. 7. All control panels shall be provided with removable sub panels to allow the panel enclosures to be installed at the job site during rough in while the panels are fabricated off-site for later installation. 8. Provide one duplex outlet mounted inside the control panel and separately fused with a non-time delay fuse at 15 A at any panel location containing electronic or electrical control components. This receptacle may be served from the control panel 120 VAC power source. 9. Each control panel shall be provided with a control power disconnect switch located and wired so as to disconnect all control power in the panel. The leaving side of this switch shall be wired to the panel and field components through a fuse or fuses sized and applied to protect both the components of the system as well as the wire and as required for code compliance. 10. Power to the following equipment will be have a fuse rated for applicable current and voltage. Fuses will be on rail terminal strips. Equipment includes: 1. Each control unit 2. Control devices 3. Panel light 111 4. Receptacle loads (e.g., modems, laptops) 11. All control panels containing electrical equipment shall be NEMA rated for the location in which they are installed. Cover mounted components, tubing penetration, and conduit penetrations shall be made in a manner consistent with the NEMA rating. 12. All wiring leaving the panel shall be separated by classification; i.e., Class 1 circuits shall not be run with Class 2 circuits, etc. Segregation shall be maintained inside the panel to the fullest extent possible. Where low voltage wires carrying low level ac and dc signals cross wires containing power and high level ac signals, the wires shall cross at a 90°angle. 13. Install terminal strips no closer than 4"from panel side, top or bottom to allow access. 14. Provide keyed locks on all panels. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 11 of 20 IDDC CONTROLS D. Control panels shall be shop fabricated and tested prior to installation in the field. The panels shall be I inspected and approved by the Engineer at the assembly location prior to installation in the field. The Engineer shall be given the opportunity to witness the testing of the panels. E. Panel Location: I 1. Each control panel is to be located for convenient servicing. 2. Mount panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration isolation. 2.4 CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS I A. Damper Actuator Requirements: 1. All damper actuators shall be Belimo electric actuators. G. Torque rating shall be based on the damper manufacturers VperQ+ir9torque requirements Q+the design flows and pressure drops or shall be based on the manufacturer's required shut-off torque to achieve the design leakage rate, whichever is greater. This higher torque rating shall be doubled. An actuator with this doubled torque rating shall be installed. 3. All damper sections which operate in sequence with each other shall have identical actuators and I identical linkage arrangements to assure similar performance between all sections. 4. Modulated actuator operation shall be industry standard 0-10 V. Floating point is not allowed. 5. Two or three position operation is not acceptable for economizers, VAV dampers, multizone dampers, or any other application specifying modulated operation. OSA Dampers to be normally closed, mixed air dampers to be normally open. 6. Actuator quantities for dampers shall be based on the following criteria. 1. Actuators must be outside unit enclosure. 111 2. Actuators shall be installed to maximize the linearity between actuator stroke and actuated devise travel (25% actuator stroke produces approximately 25%of the desired angular rotation required; 50%stroke produces 50%angular rotation). In addition, actuators should be installed to maximize force available for useful work over the entire stroke. 7. Provide damper actuator flags or indicators to show position of actuator. 2.5 SENSORS I A. Immersion Temperature Sensor, Humidity's, differential pressure signals, and all other signal inputs shall be industry standard variable voltage or amperage (0-10V or 4-20 mAmp). 0-10V is preferred. Thermistor sensors are allowed for room and duct temperature sensors. Room temperature sensors to match existing. Devices to be selected by Contractor and provided by Owner. I B. All signal inputs shall be compatible with the controllers used and with the requirement for readout of variables as specified. C. If sensors are not linear,then software will linearize sensor output. D. Minimum sensor accuracy(as compared to a test standard) and range are listed in Table. Accuracy is not the same as resolution (the ability of the DDC to measure incremental change). Resolution is specified in "Part 3. DDC Hardware." I 1. All accuracy values should be combined effect numbers taking into account thermal drift, interchangeability, hysteresis, etc. 111 Sensor Type Range Min. Accuracy Duct/Air Handling I Unit Temperature 40— 130°F ±0.5 Degree F Room Temperature 50—85°F ± 1 Degree F Outside Air Temperature - 20 to 120°F ±0.5 Degree F Hot Water Temperature 80—220°F ±0.1 to±0.5 Degree F 111 Water flow Sized for application ±5%of reading Humidity 0 to 100% RH ±3% RH Duct Static Pressure 0 to 3"w.c. ± 1%full scale per 50°F U Space Static Pressur -e High Limit Static 0.25"to 0.25"w.c. ± 1%full scale per 50°F 0 5"w.c. ± 1%full scale per 50°F Steam Pressure Sized for application ± 1% full scale 1 Current Sensor Sized for application ± 1%full scale TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 12 of 20 DDC CONTROLS Power (kWh) Sized for application ±2.5%full scale (at 0.5 PF) ±2%full scale (at 1.0 PF) CO2 sensors 0 to 2,000 PPM ±3%full scale Freeze Stat 34°F to 68°F ± 1°F Sensors shall not drift more than 1%of full scale per year 2.6 TEMPERATURE SENSORS/THERMOSTATS I A. All sensors shall be completely electronic. B. Duct/Air Handling Unit type temperature sensor (mixed, discharge/supply, and return air): 1. The probe of the duct sensor shall be 12" in length, and be made of Stainless Steel. Applications where the smallest dimension of the duct is less than 24",the probe shall be sized to reach the center of the duct. 2. Large systems above 9 square feet may require an averaging probe if sufficient mixing of the air stream is not possible. 3. Mount the sensor far enough downstream to allow mixing of the air stream, this is most important on Hot and Cold Deck applications where the coil is placed after the fan. 4. Sensors for mounting on insulated ducts or casings are to be equipped with brackets for mounting clear of the isolation. 5. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or in positions with obstructed air flow. 6. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing element. 7. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports. 8. Securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct. 9. Mount sensor enclosures to allow for easy removal and servicing without disturbance or removal of duct insulation. C. Immersion Type Temperature Sensor: 1. The probe of the sensor shall be constructed of stainless steel and pressure rating consistent with system pressure and velocity. 2. The well shall be constructed of stainless steel and sized to reach into the center of the pipe. Pipes with small diameters shall have the well mounted at a 90 degree elbow to allow sufficient contact with the fluid. 3. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. 4. Do not install wells using extension couplings. 5. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. 6. Provide thermal transmission material within the well. 7. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission material and allow for easy removal. D. Room Type Temperature Sensor: 1. Provide sensor to --; -- - '-: • • :- : - - :- .--System. Match-function-of override or temperature control if present at other stats in school. I 2. Metal guards shall be provided at sensors in gyms or halls. 3. Insulation shall be installed between the temperature sensor and open conduit to eliminate false temperature readings due to cold drafts. E. Freeze Stat: 20' element (copper capillary), manual reset, SPDT Device. 111 2.7 AIR PRESSURE SENSORS A. Static Pressure and Velocity Controllers: I 1. Static pressure sensors shall be of either the diaphragm or rigid element bellows, electronic type, photo helic. 2. Each sensor shall be provided with connections, i.e., stop cock and tubing, for attaching a portable 111 pressure gauge. 3. Sensors for mounting on insulated ducts or casings are to be equipped with brackets for mounting clear of the insulation. 4. The transmitter shall be a two-wire type and provide a 0-10V (preferred) or 4-20 mA signal which is proportional and linear over the calibrated pressure range. 5. The transmitter shall be capable of operating from an unregulated 18-30 VDC power supply. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTSE TI N S C O 230923 122018 Page 13 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 6. The device housing shall provide 1/4" barbed brass fitting for the connection of the pressure lines. Pressure ranges shall suit the application so that normal operation will occur at mid-range of the sensor span. 7. The location of the indoor measurement shall be remote from doors and openings to the outside, away from elevator lobbies, and shielded from air velocity effects. See Drawings for location. 2.8 TRANSFORMERS A. Transformers selected and sized for appropriate VA capacity and installed and fused according to applicable Codes. 2.9 CURRENT SWITCHES A. The status of all non—VFD fan and pump motors and all VFD fan and pump motors less than 20 HP shall ONLY be detected using current switches. B. The current switch shall be provided for electrical equipment status applications only. C. Switch should attach directly to the conductor and have a mounting bracket for installation flexibility. D. The current switch shall be 100%solid state electronics. E. The current switch shall be induce powered from the monitored load. 2.10 CURRENT SENSORS/TRANSFORMERS 111 A. The status and amperage of all VFD motors for fan and pumps greater than 20 HP shall be detected using current sensors ONLY. B. The Amp signal shall be provided on operator screen. C. The scale used must be selected in order to obtain normal operating readings at the mid-point of the scale. D. The scale used must be selected in order to detect changes in current flow resulting from motor belt or coupling loss, belt slippage, and other mechanical failures and should be able to distinguish low load conditions. 2.11 OUTPUT DEVICES A. Control Relays: 1. 20 amp rated contacts at 277 volts. 2. 10 million cycle rated mechanical contacts. 3. -30° F to 140° F operating range. 4. LED status light. 5. Override HOA device. 6. NEMA 1 rated housing. 7. Functional Devices Inc. RIB or equal. 8. For devices located in control panels provide with rail mount socket. 2.12 SURGE PROTECTION A. All equipment shall be protected from power surges and voltage transients. If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged by the failure at no cost to the Owner. B. Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients. C. Specifications: 1111 1. Outlets Available: None, this unit has a terminal strip for connection. 2. Load Ratings: 20A at 120 volts, single phase, 50-60 Hz;full load regulation 1%. 3. Endurance Test: 1,000 surges, 3,000 amperes, 6,000 volts, SVR=330, actual suppressed voltage <280 volts, no failures, L-N (ground wire protection) mode, U.S. Gov't. Mode 1. 4. Limiters: Series surge reactor current limiter; cascaded, auto-tracking dual polarity voltage limiters; dual pulse inverters. Parameters optimized for switch-mode power supply protection. 5. Clamping Voltage Onset: 172 volts nominal; 2 volts above peak line voltage (auto-tracking). 6. EMI/RFI Filter Response: (bi-directional, wave tracking): With 50 ohm Rg load: 3 db at 5kHz; 26 dB at 100 kHz; 38 dB at 300 kHz. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 14 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 7. Let-Through Slew Rate: 5,000 volt/microsecond disturbances reduced to 28v/microsecond within AC power wave envelope, and less than 10v/microsecond outside the power wave envelope. 8. Maximum Applied Surge Pulse Joule Rating: Unlimited rating (due to surge current limiting) (8 x 20 microsecond). 9. Maximum Applied Surge Pulse Voltage: 6,000 volts (1.2 x 50 microseconds) (Industry Standard rating). 10. Maximum Applied Surge Pulse Current: >100,000 amperes (unlimited due to current limiting) (8 x 20 microsecond). 11. Endurance, C62.41-1991 (formerly IEEE 587) Category B3 (C1) Pulses: 2kv>100,000; 4kv>10,000; 6kv>1,000 (NRTL verified). 12. Dimensions: 10" H x 10"W x 4" D. 13. Weight: 10.6 lbs. 2.13 FACTORY MOUNTED DEVICES A. Sensors as required shall be provided by Control contractor to the manufacturer for installation. All materials and labor beyond this is the responsibility of the Control contractor. PART 3 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS - HARDWARE I 3.1 PRIMARY CONTROL UNITS AND SECONDARY CONTROL UNITS SHALL BE OWNER PROVIDED A. Devices shall be selected by Control Contractor to allow connection to existing system and control of new I devices. PART 4 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS—SOFTWARE 4.1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE SHALL BE RE-USED. EXTEND PROGRAMMING TO NEW SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED PART 5 - SYSTEM SETUP 5.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLER AND PROGRAMMER I A. This section further defines the responsibilities of the installer and programmer. B. The following features shall be incorporated into the final delivered product. I 5.2 PASSWORDS SHALL REMAIN UNCHANGED 5.3 POINTS A. All points (DI, DO, Al, and AO) will have unique alphanumeric names and addresses. Installer and programmer will determine: scanning frequency(rate), units, scaling factors, high and low alarm values, alarm differentials, default values, and ranges in coordination with engineer and Owner staff. 111 B. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Scanning frequency 4. Engineering units 5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units 6. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition111 7. High and low value reporting limits (reasonableness values) which shall prevent control logic from using shorted or open circuit values. 8. Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is required only for I points that are transferred across the primary and/or secondary networks and used in control programs residing in control units other than the one in which the point resides. Events causing the default value to be used shall include failure of the control unit in which the point resides, or failure of any network over which the point value is transferred. 9. Selectable averaging function which shall average the measured value over a user selected number of scans for reporting. C. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output: I 1. Name 2. Address TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 15 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 3. Output updating frequency 4. Engineering units 5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units 6. Output Range 7. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. 111 D. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Scanning frequency 4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.) 5 Dehnunce time delay 6. Message and alarm reporting as specified. 7. Reporting of each change of state and memory storage of the time of the last change of state. 8. Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off-to- on transitions. E. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Output updating frequency 4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze/normal, etc.) 5. Direct or Reverse action selection 6. Minimum on time 7. Minimum off time 8. Status association with a DI and failure alarming (as applicable) 9. Reporting of each change of state and 10. Reporting of memory storage of the time of the last change of state. 11. Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off-to- on transitions. 12. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. 5.4 ALARMS A. The Control Contractor in coordination with the owner and design engineer shall specify values that trigger alarm conditions. B. The Control Contractor in coordination with the owner and design engineer shall specify the alarm level that requires on-screen operator acknowledgement. C. Provide five alarm levels. 1. Level 1 alarm (smoke and/or fire) 2. Level 2 alarm (equipment failure/damage imminent) 3. Level 3 alarm (equipment requires hardware or software reset) 4. Level 4 alarm (equipment requires servicing and/or energy is being wasted) 5. Level 5 alarm (temperature setpoints are out of bounds) D. Provide five locations for reporting of alarms. 1. Level 1: Send Level 1 alarm to F.A.C.P., to security monitor 2. Level 2: Send Level 2 alarm to central control monitor 3. Level 3: Send Level 3 alarm to central control monitor 1 4. Level 4: Send Level 4 alarm to maintenance shop monitor and printer E. All alarm reports shall include the point's English language description, point address, an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition and/or direct operator response, and the time and date of occurrence. 5.5 DATA TRENDING A. Data trending will be set for the start-up period and after system acceptance. Trends shall be available for 1 owner use after acceptance. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 16 of 20 DDC CONTROLS I B. Date trended during system start-up and before system acceptance shall include all real and virtual data points. Data will be collected and stored every one minute unless otherwise noted on blueprints or in appendices. C. Establish data trended (every 15 minutes) of the following points after system acceptance: 1. Outside Air Temperature 2. Outside Air Enthalpy 3. Occupancy schedule 4. For each air handler a. On/Off status b. Damper position (as determined by BAS) c. Damper Output Signal d. Damper position (as determined from actuator output) e. Cooling Setpoint f. Heating Setpoint g. Discharge Air Temperature for each zone h. Discharge Air Temperature setpoint for each zone i. Mixed Air Temperature j. Mixed Air Temperature setpoint k. Return Air Temperature I. Return Air Enthalpy m. Heater status n. Heater stages o. DX status p. DX stages 5. Space Temperatures and temperature setpoints 6. Percent heating and Cooling Load for each zone D. All data will be saved on the hard drive for at least one year. 5.6 SCHEDULES A. Schedule will be installed using time parameters provided by owner or obtained on drawings. 5.7 GRAPHIC SCREENS A. March existing style and format. 5.8 OVERRIDES 1 A. The DDC system should recognize the override and report to the screen and the printer. B. The manual overrides for all system shall be in one location as specified by the Engineer. C. Software shall have adjustable time limits for each override. D. Provide override switches (see dry .•- - - - =• e 9-•: or each-unity—Each-momentary switch with lockout and light (green for"on," red for"off") to activate an override of unit(s) as programmed through software. Each override to have adjustable time setting and revert to previous mode of operation at time's end. E. See Drawings for building shut-off switch. Switch to shut off all air handling equipment. 5.9 SAFETY CIRCUITS A. All safety circuits shall be hard wired circuits with independent manual reset type switches. 5.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. All devices relating to the work or systems included herein, including controllers, valves, motors, relays, etc., shall be identified with a unique identification number or name on the submitted engineering drawings. This identification number or name, along with the service of the device (discharge air controller, mixed air controller, etc.), shall be permanently affixed to the respective device. B. All field devices will be supplied with a nameplate indicating its name, number, address, and all other pertinent information. See 230500 for label requirements. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 17 of 20 DDC CONTROLS C. If the field device is too small for the nameplate to be "adhered"to or on another piece of equipment near it (e.g., nameplate on air handling unit at wire penetration for mixed air temperature sensor), then attach the nameplate via nylon ties. D. Tagging shall be computer generated. For input/output wiring, cabling, or tubing, the panel side of the ' terminals shall be labeled with the automation panel circuit board and terminal numbers associated with the point. The field side shall be labeled with the point number. Cable, wiring and tubing not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and function. E. All wiring, tubing, and cabling both inside and outside of control panels shall be labeled at both ends using Thomas and Betts EDP printable wire and cable markers using style WSL self-laminating vinyl. Input and output cables and wiring shall be labeled with the point number and the point description, such as: urura005 Primary Heating Water Pump#1 On/Off Status F. Cable and wiring not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and a function description such as: 120 VAC Panel# 5.11 REPORTS A. Match existing format and level of detail. PART 6 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING Air and water balancing shall be completed (and discrepancies resolved) before Control Contractor's final system check and before the acceptance test to be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. 6.1 CONTROL TECHNICIAN MEETING REQUIREMENTS A. During commissioning meetings, the control technician attending the meetings must be the same technicians that are/will install and program the DDC system. B. The Control Contractor's installer and programmer must attend all the meetings as listed below. These meetings occur throughout the design and construction process. C. First Meeting - Discuss point naming and sequence of operation with Commissioning Agent and Owner. 1. Prior to software and database installation and checkout but subsequent to software and database development, the Control Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the Commissioning Agent and review the database and program code in detail on a point by point, sequence by sequence basis. The Control Contractor (using blueprints and this specification) shall provide the project point list and sequence of operation to initiate discussion. 2. Any necessary modifications required to make the database and sequence match the intent and requirements of the contract documents shall be identified at this meeting including point names, descriptors, alarm setpoint, numeric setpoint requirements, access requirements, sequence adjustments, etc. 3. Successful completion of this review process will result in software and database approval for installation and start-up. Any software or database that is installed prior to this approval process shall be corrected to match the results of the approval process at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. The results of this meeting shall be documented in meeting minutes taken and issued by the Commissioning Agent. Documentation can be in the form of marked up data base forms and sequences of operation. 5. Provide Pre-Commissioning Test Report for approval by the Commissioning Agent and Owner before system demonstration. 6. Provide trend reports as directed by Commissioning Agent. At a minimum trends to be provided at 10 minute intervals for each HVAC device listed below for each control point. a. Multi-zone units with cooling. b. Air handler units with cooling. c. Boiler system. d. Chiller system. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 18 of 20 DDC CONTROLS 111 D. Second Meeting - graphic screen development shall be coordinated with the Owner through a series of meetings that will allow the functions described above (sequence of operation, alarms, etc.) and any other Owner's requirements to be incorporated into the graphic screens. 6.2 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to acceptance, the following steps will be used by the Control Contractor to produce a testing and pre-commissioning report by system to be submitted for approval by the Commissioning Agent. B. Work and/or systems installed under this section shall be fully functioning prior to Demonstration, Acceptance Period and Contract Close Out. Control Contractor shall start,test, adjust, and calibrate all work and/or systems under this contract, as described below: 1. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify all circuits are free from grounds or faults. 2. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections. 3. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system. 4. Verify all valves are operational and no leaks are observed. Report leaks to installing contractor. 5. Coordinate with TAB subcontractor to obtain control settings that are determined from balancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from TAB contractor and provide in O&M documents (and note any TAB deficiencies): a. Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units and CFM values. 6. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing, and actuating devices. a. Calibrate each instrumentation device by making a comparison between the DDC display and the reading at the device, using a standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards, which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if field device is +/- 0.5%accurate, test equipment shall be +/-0.25% accurate over same range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in the Pre-Commissioning Report. b. All analog input points are to be tested by comparing the reading obtained through the workstation and through an independent reading device (meter). c. Check each analogue output by making a comparison between the control command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check each output point by making a 111 comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Host computer display. Record the results for each device in the Pre-Commissioning Report. Provide this information in O&M documents. 1) All analog output points are to be tested using a command from the workstation modulating the output in 10% increments and recording the associated voltage/amps sent to the controlled device. 7. Check each digital input/output point by making a comparison between the control command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing/control device and the Host computer display. Record the results for each device in the Pre-Commissioning Report. a. ON/OFF commands from the workstation should be performed in order to verify its true operation. 8. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all actuating devices. Manually activate damper and valve operators to verify free travel and fail condition. Check valve or damper to insure that it shuts off III tight when the appropriate signal is applied to the operator. Adjust the operator spring compression as required. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the operator, calibrate per manufacturer's procedure to achieve spring range indicated. Check split range positioner to verify proper operation. Record settings for each device in the Pre-Commissioning Report. 9. Verify proper sequences of operation. Record results and submit with Pre-Commissioning Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specified functions by adjusting input variable to determine if sequence of operation is operating as specified. 10. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop in the Pre-Commissioning Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from set point for controlled variables shall be as follows: a. Air temperature: ±0.5 degrees F b. Water temperature:± 1 degrees F c. Duct pressure: ±0.05 inches we i TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 19 of 20 DDC CONTROLS C. Pre-Commissioning Testing, Adjusting, and Calibration shall be completed prior to Substantial Completion. 6.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall occur after the Control Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system, and performed its own tests (outlined in 6.1 and to be submitted in writing). B. The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the Control Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, startup, and debugging process. The Commissioning Agent and Owner will be present to observe and review these tests. The Commissioning Agent shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing procedures. C. Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware and software submittals, and the Pre- Commissioning Test Report are approved by the Commissioning Agent. D. Verifying compliance of equipment operation and sequence of operation with this specification through all modes of operation. 1. If more than 10 percent of the demonstrated equipment operation and sequence of operation fails to operate per the submittals, the demonstration test will be rescheduled after the control contractor takes corrective action. 2. If the Control Contractor fails to demonstrate proper equipment operation and sequence of operation in the second round of tests, the Engineer's costs for witnessing all further demonstration may be assigned to the Control Contractor by the Owner as a deduct to their contracted price. Note: The Control Contractor will not be responsible for costs related to poor design or to other factors beyond their control, though it is expected to call any design concerns and other factors beyond their control that might cause system failure to the attention of the Commissioning Agent. E. Programming changes for correction of improperly programmed sequences will not be considered legitimate reasons for change orders. F. The Control Contractor shall provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication, and shall demonstrate actual field operation of each controlled and sensing point for all modes of operation including day, night, occupied, unoccupied, fire/smoke alarm, seasonal changeover, and power failure modes. The purpose is to demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Control Contractor. G. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, technician's and Commissioning Agent's initials, and any corrective action taken or needed. H. The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in Pre-Commissioning (Section 6.1). I. Demonstrate that all points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (as applicable) from all workstations. J. At a minimum, demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methods specified for the pre-commissioning tests. A maximum of [10] percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Commissioning Agent for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the specified accuracy, an additional [10] percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Commissioning Agent for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until 100 percent of randomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet specified accuracy. K. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failures meet the requirements of these Specifications. L. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements. Provide a sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations. M. Demonstrate successful communication of point values between the BAS and other HVAC equipment (e.g., rooftop unit). N. Demonstrate complete operation of Operator Interface such as graphic screens, trend logs, alarms, etc. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230923 122018 Page 20 of 20 DDC CONTROLS O. Additionally, the following items shall be demonstrated:1. DDC Loop Response. The Control Contractor shall supply trend data output in a graphical form showing the step response of each DDC loop. The test I shall show the loop's response to a change in set point that represents a change of actuator position of at least 25%of its full range. The sampling rate of the trend shall be from 1 second to 3 minutes, depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall show for each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values (e.g., VFD frequency or Amperage). Any loop that yields unreasonably under- damped or over-damped control shall require further tuning by the Control Contractor. 1. Optimum Start/Stop. The Control Contractor shall supply a trend data output showing the capability of the algorithm. The 5 minute trends shall include the operating status of all optimally started and stopped equipment, as well as temperature sensor inputs of affected areas. 2. Operational logs for each system that indicate all set points, operating points, valve positions, mode, and equipment status shall be submitted to the Engineer. These logs shall cover three 48-hour periods and have a sample frequency of not more than 10 minutes. The logs shall be provided in both printed and disk formats. 3. The DDC and HVAC systems will be shut down for 15 minutes and then re-started. Within 15 minutes, the DDC system shall start and obtain stable control of the HVAC systems without safety trips, alarms, or excessive deviations in temperature and pressure (as defined by the Engineer). P. System acceptance shall occur within 120 days of substantial completion. Any delay beyond this period of time shall initiate liquidated damages unless waived by owner. Failure or delays on engineers/owners part shall not be included in 120 day count. I 6.4 ACCEPTANCE A. All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of the Commissioning Agent and Owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting the requirements of this document. B. The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of the demonstration are submitted and approved. C. The warranty period starts when the engineering accepts the system and provides this acceptance in written from the Owner and the Control Contractor. D. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Control Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Commissioning Agent. The Owner shall then perform such tests no later than 3 months after the building is occupied. The costs for these additional tests will be incurred by the Control Contractor. 1 6.5 SPARE PARTS A. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare fuses of the correct size and capacity for each fuseholder located in all the installed control systems and the Control Contractor's related equipment. B. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare pilot lights for each control unit that contains one or more pilot lights. 6.6 TRAINING I A. Provide a minimum of four separate 4-hour on-site training sessions after system acceptance and at the owner's request. The initial training session will occur after the as-built drawings and submittals have been provided and the system has been accepted. The other training sessions will occur up to 12 months after the first training session and at the owner's request. B. Training shall be a mix of classroom instruction, test exercises, and actual keyboard entry and screen viewing at the operator's terminal. Hands-on experience and problem solving shall be emphasized. C. If during any training session, the trainer debugs more than two (2) items, the training session will be immediately terminated. The session will be rescheduled for another date. The re-scheduled training session will be carried out for the full four hours at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The trainer must be well grounded in both DDC system operation and in mechanical systems service and should be the programmer. END OF SECTION 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 1 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section describes the sequence of operations for HVAC control systems specified elsewhere in these specifications. B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS LISTED FOR THIS SECTION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Provide a complete and operational temperature control and building automation system based on the following points and sequence of operation, complete as to sequences and standard control practices. The determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. Provide any additional points required to meet the sequence of operation. B. Object List: 1. The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as follows: a. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disable), etc. b. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc. c. Analog In (Al) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc. d. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0-20mA, 4-20mA and 0-10VDC are the only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must come from both hardware and software resident in the controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under any circumstance. C. Occupancy and Performance Time Periods: 1. Occupied Period is signaled automatically by adjustable settings at DDC server, Building Controller, Application Controller and also, at each zone when zone bypass timer is activated. 2. Warm-up period occurs one hour before occupied start time or as calculated by Building Controller based on system performance history and outside air temperature. 3. Unoccupied period occurs whenever Occupied, Warm-up, or Cool-down are not in effect. PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.1 LEVEL OF DETAIL A. Major changes in provided sequence of operation must be approved of in writing by the owner and the Engineer. B. The Control Contractor shall provide two types of documentation for each system (e.g., boiler plant, VAV system, etc.). The two types of documentation include: 1. Control Logic a. Control logic shall be a series of statements providing, for each system, the following items: 1) Identification of control process 2) Narrative of control loop or logic algorithm 3) Control parameters such as setpoints and differentials (e.g., throttling range, gains) reset schedules, and adjustable parameters for all points 4) Identification of all constraints, limits, or interlocks that apply to control loop 5) Identification of all DO, DI, AO, Al points that apply to system 6) Identification of all communication needs (data points from outside control unit) 2. Logic Diagrams a. For each control logic system, a logic diagram shall show the actual interaction of the points (real and virtual) and the logic algorithm. b. The diagram should identify TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 2 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS I 1) System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text) 2) All DO, DI, AO, Al points 3) Virtual points 4) All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop 5) Legend for graphical icons or symbols 6) Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT= outside air temperature) 7) Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off) c. See figure below for example of logic diagram). 1-IW Valve 1 LSA >I D o ➢ CD SP DA 0-5VDC 1 NO ZT1 18) DA=Di ne t me ass temp erffixut �*` RESET CDff-Zn to vice a CDm Ccmtrol device Ducaacbrg t'DA)PID NO-N oxmaily oxen ZT3 ' The discharge air temperature ZT4 is reset based on coldest zone temperature. I 4.2 STANDARDIZATION A. All control loops will be standardized throughout the programming code. I 4.3 PROGRAMMING GUIDELINES A. All adjustable setpoints shall be developed as software points stored at memory locations so that setpoints can be changed by recommending the data stored at the memory location rather than by entering the program and changing parameters and lines in program code. B. Where reset schedules are specified or required the schedules shall be set up so that the operator enters the following points into memory locations. 1. Two points for the independent variable on the reset schedule. 2. Two points for the dependent variable on the reset schedule. The computer system shall then use these values as input parameters to the appropriate program or , programs and calculate the reset schedule based on these values. C. Where several analog outputs are to be controlled in sequence by one control loop, software shall be arranged so that the sequence is guaranteed regardless of the spring range of the actuators and to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. D. Programs controlling several pieces of equipment as one system shall reside in one control unit. Where programs use data points that reside in other control units the programs shall employ logic (either in software, firmware, hardware, or a combination of all three) to detect loss of communications with the remote control units containing the required data. When such a failure is detected, the program logic shall revert to a safe operating mode that will allow the controlled systems to remain in operation until normal system communication resumes. A pilot light on the control unit shall be illuminated when such a failure mode exists. In addition, an alarm shall be sent to the HOST computers (alarm level 4). The software shall track this type of alarm and report if communication failure is higher than expected (this condition shall generate an alarm level 3, with descriptive text, at the HOST computer). All safe operating modes shall be approved by the Engineer prior to implementation. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 3 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS E. Control sequences that use outdoor air conditions to trigger certain specific operating modes shall use data generated by one outdoor air temperature sensor and one outdoor humidity sensor. In other words, the data from one pair of sensors shall be shared by the entire system. F. All safety circuits shall be hard wired circuits using standard snap acting electric or pneumatic switches as I u , adepof interlocksrequiredby that the returnfdampersnctionand shand ll be valves to totallyinsome normalendent , fail-safe the DDC Coositionsytem whencontrollers.the systemThis they are associated with shuts down. It is the intent of this paragraph that the systems have the capability to be operated manually complete with safeties and fail safe interlocks even if the DDC system is off line. G. Provide hours of operation accumulation and lead/lag sequencing of equipment based on hours of operation for all equipment with proof of operation inputs. H. Global point name changing: 1. The system shall provide an easy means to allow the operator to change a point name such that the point will automatically be referenced everywhere in the system by the new name. 2. If a point name is removed from the database, any program code where the name appears must show an appropriate error signal for undefined point when the program is viewed, edited, or printed. I. Synchronization of real-time clocks between all control panels shall be provided. 4.4 GENERAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GUIDELINES A. Control of all central fan systems, boilers, DX units, heaters, and pumping stations shall be based on run requests, heating requests or cooling requests from zone controls. B. Reset of supply air temperature and hot water temperature shall be based on zone temperature conditions via the zone's percentage of heating or cooling load. C. Unless otherwise indicated, all control loops will use PID loops. The coefficient for the derivative component is zero (0) unless otherwise indicated. D. All HVAC system controls shall be designed such that simultaneous heating and cooling, reheating, and retooling are minimized. This applies as well to non-mechanical treatment of mixed air (e.g. outside air, heat recovery, etc.) which must then be mechanically reheated or recooled. E. Alarms: Except as directed otherwise by the Owner, all alarms will be registered at the building operator's terminal as well as at the Maintenance Building remote operator's station. Alarms are to be registered with a message explaining the nature of the alarm and which building/location the alarm is in. F. Whenever a setpoint is referred to as "adjustable" in these standards, the setpoint is to be easily and directly adjustable at the operator's terminal and Maintenance Building remote operator's station, and is not to require any code modification. This may require assigning virtual points to all adjustable setpoints. Frequently adjusted points, including space temperature setpoints, shall be adjustable from the graphics screen (e.g., floor plan screen). G. There are many interlocks and limits within each control loop or algorithm that may not be obvious or stated in this specification. The Control Contractor is responsible for identifying and programming these interlocks and limits into the software. The CO2 Demand Ventilation Control algorithm is a good example of the complexity of the control loop with interlocks and limits. H. The Control Contractor will replace any and all equipment(actuators, chillers, etc) that fail due to programming errors. Such errors include, but are not limited to: moving actuators a couple fractions of a degree every second or so in response to some infinitesimal change in a measured variable or repeatedly turning equipment on/off within a short time period. The Control Contractor will avoid these problems by incorporating time delays, dead bands, and other programming techniques into the sequence of operation. I. Programmable time-of-day (start/stop) control shall be implemented for all HVAC equipment, except for: 1. Equipment that is interlocked with other equipment under direct start/stop control (e.g. exhaust fans interlocked with an air handling unit). 2. Equipment that must run continuously for reasons of safety 3. As otherwise noted in these standards. J. Auto-tuning algorithms shall not be used to initially tune control loops. 4.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GUIDELINES I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 4 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 1 A. This specification is intended to refine or elaborate on the sequence of operations provided by the Engineer. Note: there are many issues that may make any of these standard sequences inapplicable to a specific situation:thus, the Control Contractor should obtain written approval by the Engineer to implement the sequence of operations contained in this specification. B. The Control Contractor shall adhere to all applicable specifications, unless they submit written exceptions to the Owner and Engineer and such exceptions are approved in writing. Written exceptions shall state the specification's sequence of operations, the Control Contractor's proposed sequence of operations, and the reasons why the proposed sequence specifications are preferable to the sequences in this specification or those provided by the Engineer. C. It is the Control Contractor's responsibility to improve upon these specified sequences of operations if necessary. All improvements will be provided in writing to the Engineer for his/her written approval. D. The Control Contractor is responsible for accurately controlling and communicating with all packaged fan units or air handling units. 4.6 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - VAV SYSTEMS A. Supply Fan Control: 1. This section applies to supply fans that are modulated by variable frequency drives (VFDs) or ECM motors. 2. Static Pressure Control: a. Supply fan volume is controlled to maintain the duct static pressure at setpoint as sensed at remote static pressure sensor. b. Ensure that the static pressure signal is communicated quickly to the control loop (and not delayed due to network timing) and that a default value is set in the event of a network failure. c. Control duct pressure at AHU: 1) Initiate start fan command before signal sent to VFD 2) Run timer should limit initial start up to 50%full power(ramp up without overshooting) 3) Ramp-up and ramp-down incremental changes shall be equal. 4) Use P or PI loop to control fans speed based on static pressure setpoint. d. Pressure Reset Control: On any(2) (adjustable) VAV box dampers at 100%open reset discharge static pressure up by 0.05'WC every 5 minutes. On all VAV dampers at 95%open or less reset discharge pressure down by 0.05'WC every 5 minutes. 3. Variable speed drive acceleration settings, deceleration settings, minimum speeds, etc. shall be adjusted at start up in coordination with the drive supplier and installer to achieve stable control system performance. 4. Fan speed is reset to 0 (zero) Hz when the AHU is off. 5. Coordinate signal from fire alarm panel to duct mounted smoke detector. One signal to detector disables fan (Hz=0), waits 15 seconds (adjustable), and starts smoke damper closing. 6. Duct High Pressure Shutdown: When the duct pressure exceeds the high limit set point (3 in H2O, adjustable at the device)the fan will shut down for three (3) minutes (adjustable) and then attempt to restart. If three(3) restart attempts occur over a period of 15 minutes (adjustable), the system shall be disabled (software). Lockout reset will occur at the operator's workstation. B. Exhaust Fan Control: 1. This section applies to power exhaust fans with variable frequency drives (VFDs). 2. Space pressure Control, Return Fan Speed Endpoints: The power exhuast fan shall modulate based on supply fan speed and outside air damper position. The air balancing contractor will attain the fan speed based on the following values for the given operating mode. Return Fan Speed Endpoint Values Supply Fan Desired Space Economizer Power Exhaust Fan Mode Speed Hi/Lo Pressure Position Speed Reset Limits (InH2O) 111 Full Heating (All TBD—Noted Ideal -0.02 Min-Min (25% terminal units are Minimum Power operating at during the full Acceptable of the minimum Exhaust Fan heating flow heating Test Range: ventilation Speed TBD setpoints) condition 0.01 —0.03 requirement) TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 5 of 10 ISEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS Full Cooling (All TBD—Noted Ideal -0.02 I terminal units are during the full Acceptable Maximum Power operating at cooling Test Range: 100% Exhaust Fan cooling flow condition 0.01 —0.03 Speed-TBD setpoints) I 3. Space Pressure Return Fan Speed Reset: During Occupied mode the return fan speed shall reset based on the following schedule. I Power Exhaust Fan Speed Reset Schedule ISupply Fan Speed Power Exhaust Fan Speed Supply Fan Speed Lo Reset Limit- Minimum Power Exhaust Fan I TBD Speed-TBD Supply Fan Speed Hi Reset Limit- Maximum Power Exhaust Fan TBD Speed-TBD II4. During warm-up, cool-down and night purge, operate the unit in 100% recirculation mode. 5. Fan speed is reset to zero (0) Hz when the AHU is off. 6. Variable speed drive acceleration settings, deceleration settings, minimum speeds, etc. shall be adjusted at start up in coordination with the drive supplier and installer to achieve stable control system performance. 7. Provide separate sequences to be enable if directed by engineer to control fan based on a set difference in fan speed between supply air and return air, using this method rather than space I pressure control. C. Discharge Air Temperature Reset: I 1. Occupied Mode: The discharge air setpoint will reset based on the maximum cooling demand from the spaces. When the maximum cooling demand of any two (2) (adjustable) terminal units is greater than 95%, the discharge air setpoint shall reset down by 0.5 °F (adjustable) every five (5) minutes (adjustable). When the maximum cooling demand is less than 90%, reset discharge air setpoint up Iby 0.5 °F (adjustable) every five (5) minutes (adjustable). Minimum and maximum discharge air set points are 55 °F (adjustable) and 65°F (adjustable) respectively. Initial discharge air temperature setpoint when transitioning into an occupied mode is based on the following schedule. 11 Initial Discharge Air Setpoint Maximum Terminal Unit Cooling Discharge Air Temperature IDemand Setpoint 0 65 I 100 55 2. The following discharge air setpoints are applicable for all other modes: IDischarge Air Setpoints, Non-Occupied Modes I Mode Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint (adjustable) Night High Limit 50 I Nigh Low Limit 85 Cooling Optimal Start 50 Heating Optimal Start 95 111 Night Purge 50 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 6 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS D. Fan Enable/Optimal Start Control or Warm-Up Mode: 1. All fan systems with heating capability (in AHU and/or at terminal units) shall have this sequence. 2. The intent of this sequence is that the air handling system be started early enough so that the maximum negative deviation of space temperature from the occupied heating set point(for all within the system) is less than 0.5 °F no more than 20 minutes prior to or 10 minutes after scheduled occupancy. Spaces should not be heated up above occupied heating space temperature set points. 3. Air handling systems may be started under the optimal start mode no more than 3 hours (adjustable) prior to scheduled occupancy. 4. This optimal start sequence will be locked out when the 3 hour rolling average outdoor air temperature is greater than setpoint (initial setpoint, 55°F, adjustable). If locked out, the AHU will start 10 minutes (adjustable, maximum of 30 minutes) before occupied time period. 5. Air handling systems will be started as a function of: a. Outdoor air temperature b. Space temperature c. Time until start of scheduled occupancy d. Historical time period required to reach setpoint as a function of a, b, and c above. 6. Discharge air temperature setpoint will be set to the maximum optimal start temperature setpoint (85°F, adjustable) during this mode. 7. When the system is in heating optimal start mode,the mixed air dampers will be in full recirculation mode (i.e., outside air dampers are fully closed and the supply air volume will be limited to the return volume). 8. Exhaust fans are off and exhaust dampers are closed. 9. Mechanical cooling is disabled. 10. The building operator will be able to command start of occupancy at the operator's terminal and at the Maintenance Building remote operator's station (overriding the optimal start sequence) for each individual air handling system and globally for all air handling systems in the building. E. Fan Enable/Optimal Start Control (Cooling Mode)—Cool Down: 1. All air handling systems with cooling capability shall have this sequence. �. 2. The intent of this sequence is that the air handling system be started early enough so that the maximum positive deviation from the space temperature to the occupied cooling set point (for all zones in the system) is less than 0.5 °F no more than 20 minutes prior to or 10 minutes after scheduled occupancy. Spaces should not be cooled down below occupied cooling space temperature set points. 3. Air handling systems may be started under the optimal start mode no more than 3 hours (adjustable) prior to scheduled occupancy. 4. This optimal start sequence should be locked out when the 3 hour rolling average outdoor air temperature during the scheduled unoccupied mode is less than setpoint (initial setpoint, 50°F, adjustable)___tfJoeked_out_the.AHU wilt start 10 minutes (adjustable, maximum of 30 minutes) before the occupied time period. 5. Air handling systems will be started as a function of: a. Outdoor air temperature b. Space temperature c. Time until start of scheduled occupancy d. Historical time period required to reach setpoint as a function of a, b, and c above. 6. Discharge air temperature setpoint will be set to the minimum temperature setpoint during this mode. 7. Mechanical cooling is disabled unless spaces have not achieved cool down setpoint (adjustable) 30 I minutes (adjustable) before the occupancy period. Mechanical cooling will utilize economizer mode if outside air temperature is less than return air temperature. 8. Exhaust fans are on and exhaust dampers are open (unless limited by mixed air setpoint control due to outside air damper interlock). 9. Heating is disabled. 10. The building operator will be able to command start of occupancy for each individual air handling system and globally for all air handling systems in the building. F. Compressor Operation (Cooling Mode): I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 7 of 10 ISEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 1. Cooling section shall modulate in sequence with economizer dampers to maintain discharge air I temperature setpoint. Discharge air control is applicable whenever mechanical cooling is required. 2. Mechanical cooling shall remain off during warm-up and night low limit. 3. Compressor Staging (Increased Cooling Demand): When mechanical cooling is enabled the first stage compressor demand shall modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. When the J first stage compressor demand maintains 100%for 5 minutes enable the second stage compressor and reduce the first stage compressor demand to 10% (adjustable) then continue to modulate the first stage compressor to maintain the discharge air set point. If system cooling demand continues to I increase and the first stage compressor demand maintains 100%for 5 minutes, enable the third stage compressor and reduce the first stage compressor demand to 10% (adjustable) then continue to modulate the first stage compressor to maintain the discharge air set point. Staging on increased cooling demand should continue in this fashion based on the number of cooling stages available. I 4. Compressor Staging (Decreased Cooling Demand): When mechanical cooling is enabled and the first stage compressor demand is reduced to less than 10% (adjustable) for 5 minutes, disable the first stage compressor. As cooling demand continues to decrease disable the last full capacity compressor(if applicable) and enable the first stage compressor at 75% (adjustable) demand then I modulate demand to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. Staging on decreased cooling demand should continue in this fashion based on the number of cooling stages available. 5. Mechanical Cooling shall not operate when outside air temperature is below 60 °F (adjustable). I 6. Cycle time of any compressor to be a minimum of 10 minutes (adjustable). 7. Suction Pressure Demand Limiting: Suction pressure demand limiting has priority over discharge air temperature cooling demand. If suction pressures migrate outside of normal operating limits, compressor staging is limited and reduced to maintain acceptable limits. Compressors should be staged off and controlled in the same fashion as the decreased cooling demand sequence. Acceptable suction pressure operating limits should be coordinated with the unit manufacture and verified with start-up data. I G. Heating Mode: 1. Discharge air control is applicable whenever mechanical heating is required. During occupied mode, mechanical heating is permitted when the economizer has maintained the minimum outside air I position for a minimum of 5 minutes (adjustable) when ventilation demand sequences are inactive or when ventilation demand sequences are active and the discharge air temperature is more than 3°F below the setpoint for more than 5 minutes (adjustable). 2. Mechanical heating permitted only during occupied, night low limit and heating optimal start modes. I 2. Heating Demand: When mechanical heating is enabled, modulate heating system to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. H. Night Low Limit Mode: I 1. Night low limit mode is initiated during unoccupied times (mode), when any two (2, adjustable) terminal unit space temperature(s) falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint. 2. When all spaces served by the system are above the unoccupied heating setpoint plus the dead I band setpoint (initial 5°F, adjustable), the system will revert to the unoccupied mode. 3. If the minimum hourly outside air temperature is less than 20°F (adjustable) in Western Oregon for the previous 12 (adjustable) consecutive hours, then the AHU will remain in operation during the I unoccupied period. The system will maintain a setpoint temperature 10°F(adjustable) less than occupied setpoint. All outside air dampers will remain closed during the unoccupied period. I. Night High Limit Mode: I 1. Night high limit mode is initiated during unoccupied times (mode), when any two (2, adjustable) terminal unit space temperature(s) rises above the unoccupied cooling setpoint and the outside air temperature is 10°F (adjustable) less than the average space temperature. 2. When all spaces served by the system are below the unoccupied heating setpoint minus the dead I band setpoint (initial 5°F, adjustable), the system will revert to the unoccupied mode. J. Night Purge Mode: 1. This sequence is initiated before occupancy during the cooling season. I 2. Night purge will be enabled when the following conditions are true: a. The average space temperature is above 80° F (adjustable). b. Outside air temperature is greater than setpoint (initial setpoint, 45°F, adjustable). Ic. Outside air relative humidity is less than 50%. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 8 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS I d. Outside air temperature is at least 10°F (adjustable) less than the average space temperature e. Occupancy period occurs within 3 hours (adjustable). 3. Night purge will be disabled when average space temperature is within 3°F (adjustable) of the outside air temperature or the average space temperature has reach the occupied heating set point. K. Economizer Damper Control: 1. Occupied Mode: Economizer dampers (Outside Air, Return Air and Relief Air) modulate to maintain mixed air temperature set point. Mixed air temperature setpoint equal to the discharge air temperature setpoint minus 2°F during cooling mode and equal to the discharge air temperature setpoint during heating mode. 2. Unoccupied, Night Low Limit, Optimal Start and Low Limit Freeze Conditions: Dampers to modulate to full recirculation (0%Outside Air). 3. Night High Limit and Night Purge: Dampers to modulate to full ventilation (100% Outside Air). 4. Outside Air Damper Lockout: If the outside air temperature is greater than the return air temperature, then modulate dampers to the minimum position. 5. Demand Ventilation Control (DVC): During occupied mode the outside air dampers shall modulate to maintain supply air CO2 levels at level listed on drawings (adjustable). DVC shall occur when levels begin to exceed the CO2 set point. 6. Economizer Minimum Position (Air Quality Control): Economizer minimum-minimum (min-min) position value is based on 25%of the minimum ventilation requirement. The economizer minimum- maximum (min-max) position is based on the full minimum ventilation requirement. During DVC sequences, outside air damper position (outside airflow) is limited to the min max setting. Balancer to calibrate outside air flow station and determine actual damper positions at the min-min and min-max airflow setpoints. Control system shall use damper position setpoints for control purposes and use airflow rate as feedback to verify proper economizer damper operation. 4.7 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION -TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL A. Terminal Unit Control: 1. Space Temperature Setpoints: Default Setpoints: a. Occupied Heating Setpoint: 70 °F (adjustable) b. Occupied Cooling Setpoint: 76 °F (adjustable) c. Unoccupied Heating Setpoint: 55 °F (adjustable) d. Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint: 85°F (adjustable) 2. Space Setpoint Adjustment: a. Adjustment (General): Setpoint adjustments may be accomplished either at the operator workstation or locally at the thermostat. b. Adjustment Range: Setpoint adjustments are limited to (+1-) 2°F (adjustable). Space • temperature dead band (4 °F, adjustable) is maintained during setpoint adjustments. 3. Damper Operation: a. Occupied Mode: Air flow setpoint will linearly reset based on terminal unit cooling demand as shown in the schedule below. Air Flow Setpoint-Occupied Mode Terminal Unit Cooling Demand (%) Air Flow Setpoint (CFM) 0-100 (space temperature is within Deadband Flow Setpoint setpoints) 0 Heating Flow Setpoint 100 Cooling Flow Setpoint I b. Optimal Start Mode: Air flow setpoint will reset based on the schedule below. Implement dead band to prevent oscillation between cooling and heating flow setpoints. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 9 of 10 ISEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS IAir Flow Setpoint—Heating Optimal Start Space Temperature> Air Flow Set Point JOccupied Heating Set Point No Cooling Flow Setpoint IYes Deadband Flow Setpoint IAir Flow Setpoint—Cooling Optimal Start Space Temperature < Air Flow Set Point I Occupied Cooling Set Point No Cooling Flow Setpoint IYes Deadband Flow Setpoint I c. Night High Limit, Night Purge Mode: Cooling flow setpoint shall be used during this mode. Units that did not initiate the control mode and have space temperatures above the occupied cooling setpoint shall also control to their respective cooling flow set point until the mode is canceled or the space temperature has reached the occupied cooling setpoint. Implement 1°F I space temperature dead band to prevent damper oscillations. d. Night Low Limit Mode: Cooling flow setpoint shall be used during this mode. Units that did not initiate the control mode and have space temperatures below the occupied heating setpoint I shall also control to their respective cooling flow set point until the mode is canceled or the space temperature has reached the occupied heating setpoint. Implement 1°F space temperature dead band shall be used to prevent damper oscillations. I e. Unoccupied Mode: Damper modulates fully closed. Flow setpoint is 0 CFM. 4. Heating Operation: a. Occupied Mode: Heat output will modulate based on heating demand to maintain occupied heating setpoint. I b. Optimal Start Mode: Heat output will modulate based on the schedule below. Implement 1°F space dead band to prevent cycling. IIISCR Value - Optimal Start Space Temperature > Occupied Valve Position Heating Set Point No 100% (Subject to discharge air I temperature limiting) Yes 0% I c. Unoccupied Mode, Night High Limit, Night Purge Mode: SCR value is 0. d. Night Low Limit Mode: SCR modulates to fully value (Subject to discharge air temperature limiting). Units that did not initiate the control mode and have space temperatures below the I occupied heating setpoint shall also modulate to fully on until the mode is canceled or the space temperature has reached the occupied heating setpoint. Implement 1°F space temperature dead band to prevent cycling. IB. Discharge Air Temperature Limiting (All Modes): TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 230993 122018 Page 10 of 10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS I 1. Discharge temperature maximum is 110° F. 4.8 DIAGNOSTICS A. In addition to the standard alarm limits specified for all sensed points, BAS shall provide the following diagnostics for each fan system where applicable. B. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: The mixed air temperature is less than 45°F or greater than 85°F. Level 4 alarm message is"Energy waste: An unexpected mixed air temperature at (AH) indicates a possible problem with the economizer damper controls. Please check for faulty dampers or controls". C. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: The mixed air temperature, discharge air temperature, and the outside air temperature are not equal when the system is operating at 100%outside air and the heating and cooling valve coils have been fully closed for at least two hours (adjustable). Note: Include in comparison the temperature difference caused by fan energy as it relates to discharge air temperature. If differential between sensors is greater than 5.0°F, then send alarm. Level 4 alarm message is "Mixed air temperature, discharge air temperature, and outside air temperature are out of calibration at (AH)." D. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: Any equipment operates for 24 consecutive hours. Level 4 alarm message is "[Equipment tag] has operated 24 consecutive hours. Check software and manual overrides." END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I 1 I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 232300 122018 Page 1 of 3 IREFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM I 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the refrigerant piping system connecting refrigeration and HVAC I equipment specified in other sections of these specifications. Provide pipe, pipe fittings and related items required for complete piping system. B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to I this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where I neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. Comply with federal and local regulations regarding the handling of refrigerant. B. Labeling: All piping shall be continuously and legibly labeled on each length as required by codes and standards and including as a minimum, country of origin, manufacturer's identification marking, wall I thickness designation, and applicable standards and approvals. Fittings shall be labeled as required by the referenced standard. Tubular fixture traps shall be stamped with manufacturer's mark and material thickness. IC. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and bear the ARI label. D. Installation Contractor: Manufacturer's authorized installation and start-up agency normally engaged and experienced in air conditioning/refrigeration work and certified in the handling of refrigerant. E. See Commissioning specification for additional requirements. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data, construction details, and performance characteristics for each type and size of refrigeration equipment. I B. Submit operating and maintenance data. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. IPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Copper Pipe and Tube: 1. Application: Refrigerant. 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. Type ACR hard temper copper with soldered joints. Cleaned and sealed at the I factory. 3. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSI/ASME B31.5 or SAE J 513-F, "Refrigeration Tube Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern. I 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS A. Brazing Materials: Provide brazing filler rod and flux materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. I B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 816.21 with pressure and temperature rating required for the service indicated. 2.3 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES I A. General: Provide the following equipment where they are not a part of the factory installed equipment accessories. Select equipment for operation with the refrigerant being utilized and for the pressure and temperature conditions indicated. Sporlan, Alco, Henry, Detroit, or as listed for each equipment. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 232300 122018 Page 2 of 3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM B. Thermostatic Expansion Valve: Capacity matched for the system, angle or straight through pattern external equalizer, brass body complete with capillary and remote sensing bulb. C. Solenoid Valves: For installation in liquid, suction and/or hot gas circuit as indicated. Brass body, replaceable coil of voltage indicated. D. Liquid and Moisture Indicators: Moisture and liquid indicator installed after the liquid line filter dryer. E. Liquid Line Filter Dryer: Sealed container up to approximately 10 tons of capacity and replaceable desiccant dryer core and strainer on larger capacity systems. F. Charging Valves: Quick coupling type connection with removable valve core. G. Service Valves: Install liquid, suction and discharge line valves, all suitable for refrigerant used and location in the system, designed so as to be easily packed with pressure on the line and with wing caps that completely enclose valve stem. Install all purge valves, relief valves or other valves required for safe and proper operation of the system and as may be required by State or local codes. Detroit, Alco, Sporlan or Automatic Products approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Air Conditioning Refrigeration Subcontractor: Submit 5 copies of piping diagram for approval. Install all refrigerant piping, major components and all minor components, such as dehydrator, service valves, etc., and arrange piping for hot gas bypass for low load operation. Test system, evacuate, charge, start-up and adjust. Refer to applicable sections of these Specifications for test, evacuation, etc. B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions. C. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Use Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing and make all changes in direction with specified fittings. 2. Lay out the refrigerant piping system in a manner to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor and so that oil will return to the compressor. Slope all horizontal suction lines toward the compressor. Take special care to keep all tubing clean and dry. 3. Install all refrigerant piping straight and free from kinks and restrictions, properly supported to minimize vibration. Provide hangers at 5' spacing for 1/2" lines, 6' spacing for 1" lines and 8'spacing for 1-1/2"and larger lines. Submit complete diagram for approval. 4. Comply with the refrigerant piping installation instructions of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer. 3.2 PIPING JOINTS A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material. B. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. C. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gasket. D. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces. E. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice. F. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. 3.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT I A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome-plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces. t TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 232300 122018 Page 3 of 3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM B. Filters: Install in a manner to permit access for removal and replacement of filter cartridge. C. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Fabricate sleeves 1"diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non-structural penetrations only. D. Sleeve Caulking: Grout insulated pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and/or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling. 3.4 CLEANING A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch-up paint where necessary. B. Refrigeration System Piping: If, for any reason, sanitized and sealed-at-the-mill tubing is not used, clean the tubing as follows: 1. Wipe each tube internally with a dry, lintless cloth followed with a clean lintless cloth saturated with recommended refrigerant. 2. Repeat until the saturated cloth is not discolored by dirt. 3. Wipe with a clean cloth saturated with compressor oil and squeezed dry. 4. Wipe with a dry, lintless cloth. 3.5 TEST A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Repair: Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop- leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. C. Refrigerant System: 1. When the refrigerant connections have been completed, close the compressor suction and discharge valves (or receiver outlet valve in the case of condensing unit) and test the balance of the system to near operating pressure with a dry nitrogen. 2. Carefully test all joints, using soap and water or other sudsing solution. After all joints are tested, discharge the gas and repair all leaks, then repeat the test with a mixture of nitrogen and R-410A and a halide torch or an electronic leak detector. 3. Evacuate the system to remove moisture and non-condensables. Lower the absolute pressure with a vacuum pump to 1000 microns of mercury. Apply external heat as required to vaporize moisture. 4. Dehydrate each refrigerant circuit by satisfactory use of a vacuum pump before charging with refrigerant. Furnish all necessary refrigerant and oil for complete operating charge of the system. Upon completion of the work of construction, test all refrigeration equipment under normal operating conditions and leave in operating order. Adjust automatic temperature controls. 5. After the first 24 hours of operation, measure the pressure drop across the suction filter. If the I pressure drop exceeds 5 pounds per square inch, replace the cartridge with a new one, retesting and replacing the cartridge and/or adjusting the system as necessary to achieve a pressure drop of less than 5 pounds per square inch in 24 hours. END OF SECTION I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 233000 122018 Page 1 of 5 IAIR DISTRIBUTION I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Air Distribution Materials as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1 B. Material characteristics and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. I1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Distribution Equipment Rating: In accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and bearing the AMCA label. B. See 23 08 00 for commissioning requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for all manufactured materials. B. Submit operating and maintenance data. C. For adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), include Iprinted statement of volatile organic compound (VOC) content. Use LEED Low-Emitting Materials form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL A. Quality Assurance: Galvanized steel sheet metal except where otherwise indicated. Metal gauges,joints and reinforcement in accordance with Mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. Ductwork .. shall be fabricated to the following pressure classifications: 1. Return and exhaust ducts: 2" negative. 2. Supply ducts from fan discharge to VAV box 4" positive. From VAV box to diffuser: 2" positive. I B. Acoustical Duct Lining: Line ducts with 1"thick lining (unless noted otherwise) for installation inside the building insulation envelope, and 2"for installation outside the building insulation envelope. Schuller "Linacoustic," Owens Corning "Aeroflex"Type 150, and Certainteed "ToughGard"Type 150 approved, I meeting NFPA 90A and B requirements for maximum flame spread and smoke developed. Duct liner adhesive shall conform to ASTM C916.Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with fasteners conforming to SMACNA Standard MF-1-1971, Schuller Grip Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire- retardant type adhesive similar to Schuller No. 44 adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81-99, Insul-Coustic 22 or 3M I equivalent on all leading edges,joints and seams. C. Duct Sealing Tapes: Provide one of the following UL listed ductwork sealing tape systems. 1. Hardcast IG-601 or equal. I 2. Sealing systems with VOC content are not allowed. 3. Sealants and Primers—General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. I D. Optional Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: "Ductmate System"by Ductmate Industries, Inc., Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., Mez Industries, or acceptable substitute. Spiramir self-sealing round duct connector system meeting Class 3 leakage standards with EPDM o-ring seal. I E. Exposed to View Spiral Seam Duct and Fittings: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Matching fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with continuous welded seams. I F. Concealed Round Duct: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Construction, gauges, and reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA standards. Fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with spot welded or riveted and sealed seams or continuously welded seams. Snap lock longitudinal seam duct shall fully comply with SMACNA standards for duct gauge and seam type for appropriate pressure class. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 233000 122018 Page 2 of 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION G. Flexible Ductwork-Low Pressure: Insulated low pressure flexible duct, factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix seamless inner liner, wrapped with a nominal 1"thick insulation for installation inside the building insulation envelope, and 1-1/2"for installation outside the building insulation envelope, 1 pound/cubic foot density fiberglass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket, factory vapor resistance sealed at both ends of each section. The composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class 1 requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90-A and be labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. The duct shall have factory sealed double air seal (interior and exterior) to assure an airtight installation. Genflex, ATCO,Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed; single plate up to 12"wide; multiple over 12"wide. Hem both edges 1/2" and flange sides 1/2". Use Young, Duro-Dyne, MAT, or accepted substitute damper accessories. Young numbers are shown. 1. No. 605 bearing set with No. 403 regulator for dampers up to 24" long. 2. For dampers over 24" long use No. 660 3/8" rod, No. 656 end bearing and No. 403 regulator. 3. Where damper regulators are not readily accessible, use No. 660 or No. 661 rod extensions and No. 301 and No. 315 concealed damper regulators or MAT cable operated dampers as required. Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings; minimum required is one in each supply, return or exhaust main, and one in each branch. B. Locking Connection Straps: 1/2"wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self-locking straps. Panduit or accepted substitute. C. Connection Fittings: Connections to non-metallic ducts manufactured sheet metal "spin-in"fittings. Genflex, Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute. D. Access Doors In Sheet Metal Work: 1. Hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct in which installed. Use no door smaller than 12" by 12"for simple manual access or smaller than 18" by 24"where personnel must pass through infrequently. Use 24" by 60" minimum for filters and more frequent maintenance. Use Ventlok or accepted substitute hinges and latches on all doors. a. 100 series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18" maximum dimension. b. 200 series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 series on high pressure systems. 2. Construct doors up to 18" maximum dimension with 1" overlap, furr and gasket with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber. Fit larger doors against 1-1/2"by 1/8" or angle frame and gasket with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber or felt. E. Anti-Backdraft Dampers: Connected, gasket-edged aluminum blades set in 14 gauge or heavier steel frame; brass, nylon or Teflon bearings; equip with spring helper with tension adjustment feature or with adjustable counterweight ; -4 .0.. . CO-. •e ••: - .n-0-1 O' d-, Ruskin CBS-4, Greenheck, Pacific Air Products, Air Balance, Controlair or accepted substitute. F. Opposed Blade Volume Damper: Install opposed blade volume damper in each zone supply duct on discharge of multi-zone units and where indicated on Drawings. Young No. 817 or accepted substitute. G. Flexible Connections: Neoprene impregnated fiberglass connection. Ventglass, Duro-Dyne, or accepted substitute. 2.3 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. B. Finishes: 1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling diffusers. Others are to have a baked �. enamel finish, color as selected by Architect. 2. Aluminum:Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise. C. Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Nailor, and Tuttle & Bailey are accepted substitutes where I only Titus model numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed and/or"accepted substitute" is indicated, only the products or an accepted substitute for that item shall be provided. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 233000 122018 Page 3 of 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION D. Ceiling Return and/or Exhaust Register: Perforated snap-in or concealed hinged face plate. Use in spaces containing ceiling diffusers and/or T-bar ceilings. Provide with damper except where dampered plenums are indicated. Match manufacturer of supply. E. Sidewall Supply Grille or Register: Double deflection grille with face bars parallel to long dimension on ' ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars to be individually adjustable, spaced on 0.66"to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 300RL. F. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66"to 0.75"centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 350RL series. G. Modular Core Ceiling Diffusers: 1 to 4-way pattern control. Pattern of distribution as indicated. Provide with opposed blade volume dampers and frame for unit as required. Price SMCD series or equal Titus. H. Steel Door Transfer Grilles and Sidewall Transfer grilles: All welded construction with 20 gauge, fixed inverted V-blades with a deflection angle of 77 so as to provide a sight proof design. I. Plaster Frames: Provide plaster frames for all diffusers, grilles or registers installed in plaster walls or ceiling. Where register face is aluminum, the plaster frame shall be aluminum. Frame to match manufacturer of register or be of compatible size of listed manufacturer. Titus TRM/TRM-S. 2.4 AIR TERMINALS ' A. Variable Air Volume Terminal Box: Construct unit casings of 22 gauge galvanized steel fully lined with 1/2", 2 lb. density, neoprene coated fiberglass complying with the UL Standard 181 for erosion, and NFPA 90A for fire resistivity. I1. Unit Inlets: Round, obround, or rectangular with double thickness gasketed damper blade mounted in self-lubricating bearings. 2. Attenuation Section: Integral to the basic unit. ' 3. ARI Certified:Test in accordance with ARI Standard 885-98 appendix E. 4. Unit Sound Power Levels (second through seventh octave band): At minimum pressure drop, ratings shall not exceed 32 NC ducted or radiated. 5. Pressure Independent VAV Terminals: Equip with velocity controls to control cfm independent of ' duct static pressure. 6. Factory Furnished Accessories: All actuators, controls, and circuitry contained in a sheet metal enclosure. 7. Control Sequences: Operational sequences shall be specified in Section 230993. 8. Reheat Coil: Provide electric reheat coil with SCR control using a 0-10 VDC input signal. Solid state switch only (no mechanical allowed). 9. Manufacturers: Trane, Titus, Tempmaster, Carrier, Price, Carnes, Nailor Krueger, Envirotech, or approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up. ' B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc. C. Filters: Install specified filters or accepted substitute temporary construction filters in supply units and ' systems prior to start-up or use for drying and/or temporary heat. Replace prior to acceptance of project. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS ' A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Locate registers in tee-bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the tile unless indicated otherwise. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 233000 122018 Page 4 of 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Support: Install ductwork with 1"wide strap cradle hangers not more than 8' on centers or as required by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building construction according to good practices for materials involved. Manufactured hanger system acceptable in lieu of fabricated hangers at contractor's option. Ductmate"Clutcher"system or approved. Support flexduct where shown to be used for lengths beyond 4' per above requirements. Comply with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard Figure 3-9 and 3-10. B. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install neoprene impregnated fiberglass connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment. Ventglass, Duro-Dyne or accepted substitute. C. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane of turn or make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning vanes. D. Fittings: Make transitions and take-offs as shown on Drawings. Provide volume dampers and splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Saddle tees are not allowed. E. Acoustical Duct Lining: 1. Acoustically line all fan unit intake and discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork specified per Section 230700 as insulated, where exposed to view or subject to damage in areas such as mechanical rooms, and, at the Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified in Section 230700 except outside air intake ducts. The duct size noted on the Drawings is the clear opening of the duct with insulation. Insulation shall not reduce duct size listed. 2. All duct designated to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with a fire-resistant, fiber- bonding coating, or covering (composite, polymer, vinyl or neoprene) that reduces airflow resistance and controls fiber release. The duct lining shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 100%coverage of a fire retardant adhesive. The coated surface of the duct liner shall face the airstream. When width of duct exceeds 12"and also when height exceeds 24", use corrosion resistant mechanical fasteners 12"on center maximum lateral spacing and 18"on center maximum longitudinal spacing. Start fastening within 3"of upstream transverse edge of the liner and within 3"of the longitudinal joint. Mechanical fasteners shall be either impact-driven or weld-secured and shall not pierce the duct walls. Fasteners and washers of the specified type and length shall be used assuring no greater than 10%compression of the liner thickness. Installation shall be made so that no fastener pins protrude into the airstream. No gaps or loose edges shall occur in the insulation. Top pieces shall be supported by the side pieces. Provide insulated build out frames for attaching dampers at running vanes where required. 3. All transverse and longitudinal abutting edges of duct lining shall be sealed and lapped 3"with a heavy coat of approved adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All upstream transverse edges shall be installed with sheet metal nosings. All raw exposed edges of lining shall be 'buttered'with approved adhesive. F. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch. Install dampers in fiberglass ductwork (where fiberglass auctwork is allowed) with galvai iiced sheet metal-steeves of-sheet metal gauges required for metal duct systems of the same dimensions. G. Duct Insulation: Specified in Section 230700. H. Sleeves: Provide galvanized sheet metal plaster ring around ductwork penetrating exposed finished walls. Sleeve and flash all duct penetrations through exterior walls in an air tight and weatherproof manner. I. Plenums: Construct sheet metal plenums and partitions of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized steel and reinforce with 1-1/2" by 1/2" by 1/8"angles as required to prevent drumming or breathing. Plenums shall be painted flat black inside. J. Access: Install necessary access opening and covers for cleaning, wiring or servicing motors, filters, fans, both entering and leaving air sides of coils, fire and/or smoke dampers and to other equipment located I within or blocked by sheet metal work. K. Sealing: Caulk, seal, grout and/or tape ductwork and plenums to make airtight at seams,joints, edges, corners and at penetrations. Solder all seams,joints, etc., on all ductwork exposed to the weather. Install specified tape in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using degreaser on surfaces to be taped and wiped to eliminate moisture. 3.4 NEW DUCTWORK CLEANING ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 122018 SECTION 233000 Page5of5 IAIR DISTRIBUTION A. Store all ductwork materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt/mud and other I construction dust. All ductwork shall be sealed with plastic after cleaning (vacuum, wipe down, blow clean with compressed air) during construction. Keep sealed when shipped and stored on site. B. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed. I C. Prior to installation of diffusers, grilles and registers, install temporary system filters and cover all diffuser, grille and register openings with temporary 25% efficiency filter materials and start the fan systems. Operate fans a minimum of 8 hours. Remove all temporary filters at the end of that period. I D. Clean all diffusers, grilles and registers just prior to project final completion. E. Cover all ductwork terminations during construction to prevent accumulation of dust and debris. PART 4- EXECUTION 4.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically anchored on leveled, flashed and I counterflashed curbs anchored to resist seismic forces and suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12" above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 233400 122018 Page 1 of 1 HVAC FANS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Fans as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. I B. Equipment capacity and size as indicated in the equipment lists on the Drawings. C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled. I B. See 230800 for commissioning requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each fan. B. Submit operating and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 EXHAUST FANS AND UNITS A. Ceiling Cabinet Exhaust Fan: Direct drive, forward curved centrifugal wheel, sleeve bearings, motor and wheel isolated from unit on vibration isolators; provide grille on inlet and duct connection with backdraft I dampers on discharge. Size and capacity as indicated on Drawings. Carnes, Greenheck, Cook, Twin City, or approved. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment Imanufacturer. 3.2 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION I A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start-up. B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up. I3.3 CONTROLS A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes. 1 END OF SECTION I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 234000 122018 Page 1 of 1 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Air Cleaning Devices as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Materials characteristics and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Equipment Rating: In accordance with ASHRAE 52.2-2007. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for all manufactured materials. B. Submit operating and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR FILTERS A. Disposable Media, MERV 8 Rated: 1. Disposable, preformed 100%synthetic non-woven media, pleated 2"thick cartridge type with carrier board frames with diagonal and horizontal supports. Average ASHRAE test efficiency of MERV 8 per ASHRAE 52.2-2007 App J with initial pressure drop across the cle .n filter bank not exceeding 0.2" W.C. when operating at 500 FPM. The filter media shall have an Underwriters Laboratories UL 900 Class 2 listing. ' 2. Provide specified filters for temporary heat and testing during construction and replace filters with new clean, specified filters prior to acceptance of project by Owner (two complete sets of media are required). 3. Flanders or equal. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up. ' B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc. C. Filters: Install specified filters or accepted substitute temporary construction filters in supply units and systems prior to start-up or use for drying and/or temporary heat. Provide 2 sets of filters and replace prior ' to acceptance of project. D. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. END OF SECTION I TT SD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 237400 ' 122018 Page 1 of 5 CENTRAL STATION HVAC UNITS ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating Equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 230500, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled. ' B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and ARI labeled. C. Gas-fired Equipment: Design certified by American Gas Association. D. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 230500. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each HVAC unit. B. Submit operating and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFTOP HVAC UNIT-VAV UNIT A. Unit Performance ' 1. Unit cooling capacities shall be in accordance with and tested to ARI standard 210/240-89 or 360-85. 2. Units shall carry the ARI compliance label. 3. Unit MINIMUM cooling efficiency, including the standard supply air blower motor shall be as shown on the plans. ' 4. Units shall be safety certified in accordance with UL Standard UL1995, and ANSI Standard Z21.47. 5. Unit shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory. 6. Unit nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency. ' 7. Unit shall be shipped completely assembled by the manufacturer including all standard items and optional items. 8. Unit shall be 100% run tested by the manufacturer with a copy of the run test report shipped with the unit. B. Unit Construction: 1. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and shipped in one piece. 2. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weatherproof cabinet. 3. Unit design shall be dedicated bottom supply/return air style system for mounting on a roof curb. 4. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized metal with the exterior constructed of 18 gauge or heavier material and interior construction of 22 gauge or heavier solid liner. ' 5. The unit roof shall be cross-broken and/or sloped to assure drainage. 6. Access to compressor(s), controls, filters, blower, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with a quarter turn latch (door fastening screws are not acceptable). Provide with door hold backs to prevent over extention. ' 7. Air side service access doors shall be fully gasketed with rain break overhangs. 8. Air side access doors will have an internal metal liner to protect the door insulation. 9. Unit exterior shall be painted with polyurethane paint over a primer and a G90 type galvanized steel. 10. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2000 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. 11. All wiring shall be color-coded. 12. The interior airside of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels with 2"thick, 1.5- pound density, neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation or foam filled panels. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 237400 122018 Page 2 of 5 CENTRAL STATION HVAC UNITS 13. To guarantee no leakage of conditioned air from the cabinet all of the cabinet under positive pressure, downstream from the supply air blower, shall have a separate internal cabinet contained within, and separate from,the exterior cabinet by an air gap. The internal cabinet shall be guaranteed to hold a static pressure of up to 12 inches water column. 14. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2" in height around the opening through the base pan. 15. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting - rigging, service areas and caution areas. 16. Wiring diagrams shall be in color and marked to match the color and markings of the wires and shall be both "point-to-point" and "ladder"diagrams. 17. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently fixed to the control compartment door. 18. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit, located in a metal pocket in the control access compartment. 19. Supply fan and Exhaust fan shall be equipped with ECM motors or VFD's. 19. VFD equipped units shall have drives installed internally unless noted otherwise. The VFD may be installed in an environmentally controlled cabinet attached to the rooftop unit in a manner approved by the rooftop unit manufacturer. See Section 230500 for VFD specifications. C. Blowers: 1. Blower(s) shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced to comply with 0.10 in/second for supply air fans and 0.15 in/second for return air fans. Provide certification or field test in presence of engineer. D. Outside Air: Shall be 0-100%with a motor operated outside air damper constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blade with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 4 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 1"WG air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. Coordinate with airflow measurement station manufacturer for placement of device. E. Exhaust Fan Section: 1. Provide with unit mounted smoke detector, where specified on plans. Detector shall include contacts for fan shut-down per code and axillary contacts to allow connection to building fire alarm system with relay module provided by other division. F. Gas Heating Section: 1. Unit shall be provided with a gas-heating furnace consisting of stainless steel heat exchanger with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electric pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion air flow is established. Heat exchanger tubes with separate internal turbulators are not acceptable. 2. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic ignitor to a pilot system, which will be continuous when-the-heater is-operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required. 3. Unit shall have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through the curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping. 4. Unit shall be equipped with a Stainless Steel tubular heat exchanger with a 25-year non pro-rated warranty. 5. The completely factory mounted gas heating assembly shall be capable of operating at any firing rate between 100% and 30%of rated capacity. The discharge air set point shall be adjusted at the electronic controller within the rooftop unit control compartment. Burner control shall be a Honeywell 7800 series unit with digital read-out module. Heating control shall be capable of operation initiated by a 0 to 10 volt signal from a DDC control system. G. Power Option: 1. Unit equipment shall be provided with a single disconnect switch with fusing. 2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brownout protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10%out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage. 3. Unit shall be provided with single point electrical connection with disconnect. H. Filters: I TT SD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 237400 122018 Page 3 of 5 ICENTRAL STATION HVAC UNITS 1. Unless otherwise noted, unit to be furnished with 2"pleated throw away supply air filters, see I previous specification section. 2. Provide one complete extra set of filters for replacement once building flush out or construction is complete. II. Condensing Coil: 1. Condenser coil(s) shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. 2. Condenser coil(s) to be sized for a minimum of 10 degrees sub-cooling. J. Evaporator Coil: I1. Evaporator coil(s) shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. 2. Evaporator coils to have galvanized steel end casings. 3. Evaporator coils to have equalizing type vertical tube distributors with a top suction connection. I 4. Evaporator coils for multi-compressor units shall be circuited with one circuit and expansion valve per compressor. Evaporator coil(s) shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. I 5. Coils shall be interlaced where more than one compressor is connected to one coil. K. Refrigeration System: (DX Cooling System) 1. Compressor(s) shall be of the hermetic scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and I mounted on the compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators. Lead compressor in each circuit shall be a digital scroll compressor. 2. Units shall be factory piped to condensing section. 3. All units shall be variable capacity. I 4. Compressor(s) shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit without affecting airflow when the compressor compartment is open. 5. Compressor(s) shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise I from the compressor into the building area. 6. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve(s) type refrigerant flow control. 7. System shall be equipped with automatic re-set low pressure and manual reset high-pressure refrigerant controls. I 8. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low-pressure sides of the system. 9. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. 10. Unit shall be fully factory charged with HFC R-410A. 11. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses. 12. Unit shall be equipped with a 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each compressor. L. Controls 1 1. Terminal Strip: Provide factory terminal strip with wiring from unit mounted devices required for operation of all HVAC function from field installed controls. See Section 230923 and 230993 for control devices and operating sequences provided by Control Contractor. I 2. BACnet Controller: Provide factory installed native BACnet controller to operate all HVAC functions of the unit. Controller shall integrate directly with JCI Control System. See Section 230923 for device specifications. See Section 230993 for sequences that shall be available. Coordinate with Control Contractor for integration and operation. I M. Roof Curbs: Provide with seismically rated isolation type non-plenum elevated curb per drawings approved by manufacturer for all units. N. Approved manufactures: AAON with Control option#1, AAON, Daikin with Control option #2. 2.2 SPLIT CONDENSING UNIT (LARGER THAN 5 TONS) A. Air Cooled Condenser I1. The condensing section shall be open on the sides and bottom to provide access and to allow airflow through the coils. Condenser coils shall be constructed with 3/8"copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins for maximum heat transfer. Each condenser coil shall be factory leak tested with Ihigh-pressure air under water. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 237400 122018 Page 4 of 5 CENTRAL STATION HVAC UNITS 1 2. Condenser fans shall be direct drive, propeller type designed for low tip speed, vertical air discharge, and include service guards. Fan blades shall be constructed of steel and riveted to a steel center I hub. Condenser fan motor shall be direct drive, single phase, permanently lubricated "PSC" motors with inherent thermal overload. 3. Unit shall have standard pressure controls that cycle the condenser fan motors to maintain condensing pressures for operation down to 0°F ambient. 4. Condenser fan motor shall be direct drive, single phase permanently lubricated "PSC" motors with inherent thermal overload. 5. Unit shall be complete with liquid and suction line isolation valves. 6. Provide dual circuit unit. B. Scroll Compressors 1. Unit shall have heavy-duty Copeland scroll compressor(s). 2. Compressors shall be isolated with resilient rubber isolators to decrease noise transmission. 3. Provide VFD or digital scroll compressor as lead on each circuit. C. Capped connections shall be external to the unit providing for field connection of refrigerant piping. D. Unit shall have a liquid and suction line service valve. E. Approved manufactures: Carrier, Daikin, Trane, Aaon. Coordinate with DX Coil manufacturer. 2.3 CONDENSING UNIT 7.5 TONS OR LESS A. General: 1. Units shall be operable down to at least 40° F outdoor temperature. 2. Use R-410a refrigerant. 3. Only one liquid line, one suction line, and one power connection shall be made to each compressor. Provide charging valves with brass caps. Plastic will not be allowed. B. Condenser Coils: 1. Aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes or 'Spine Fin'trade mark system which has aluminum fins epoxy bonded to aluminum tubes or micro-channel. 2. Provide stamped louver coil guard for unit. C. Fans: 1. Direct driven propeller type. 2. Fan motor shall be single or two speed, thermostatically controlled, permanently lubricated, and designed with permanent protection. 3. Motors shall be resiliently mounted. 4. Each fan shall have a safety guard. D. Compressor: ' 1. Each condenser unit shall have only one compressor. 2. Design with following features: a. Externally mounted brass service valves with charging connections. b. Crankcase heater. c. Resilient rubber mounts. d. Compressor motor-overload protection. E. Controls: 1. Factory wired and located in separate enclosure. 2. Provide field installed safety devices: a. High and low pressure cutout. b. Condenser fan motor-overload devices. c. Anti-cycle timers to prevent units from starting up again for five minutes after any power interruption. d. Head pressure type low ambient kit. F. Casing: 1. Fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. Finish shall be weather resistant. 2. Panels shall be removable for servicing. 3. Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. G. Unit shall have rated efficiency of no less than specified on plan. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 237400 122018 Page 5 of 5 CENTRAL STATION HVAC UNITS H. Approved manufactures: Carrier, Daikin, Trane, Aaon. Coordinate with Coil manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Piping: Refer to applicable sections for piping, ductwork, insulation, painting, etc. 3.2 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically anchored on leveled, flashed and counterflashed curbs(vibration isolation curb for RTU-1) oanchored to resist seismic forces and ' suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12"above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section. B. Make all piping, electrical and duct penetrations for each piece of equipment within the curb unless shown ' otherwise on the Drawings. Piping and electrical conduit routed above and across the roof shall be supported on flashed and counterflashed curbs with pipe guides anchored to the curbs in "pitch pockets." Submit shop drawings on other arrangements for approval. 3.3 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up. B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up. C. Filters: Specified filters or approved temporary construction filters shall be installed in supply units prior to start-up or used for drying and/or temporary heat. See specifications related to ensuring ducts remain clean during construction for more information. 3.4 SMOKE DETECTOR INSTALLATION A. Provide duct-mounted smoke detector at return side of air handling units. Provide device compatible with Simplex fire alarm system or with addressable module to allow connection to Simplex fire alarm system. Detector to be wired to disable fan operation in accordance with Code requirements. ' B. Automatic Smoke Detector Fan Shutdown: Coordinate with Automatic Temperature Controls specified elsewhere in these specifications. 3.5 CONTROLS A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes. END OF SECTION I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page 1 of 8 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the I electrical work specified in this Section. B. The requirements of this Section apply to the electrical systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 26 sections. IC. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with I complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Electric distribution equipment. I 2. Complete lighting and power systems, including panelboards, branch circuits, devices, lighting fixtures, etc. 3. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. 4. Wiring to and connection of electrical equipment or appliances furnished outside of these I Specifications and Contract but described on the Electrical Drawings. 5. Special systems as specified herein. 6. Grounding. I E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements. F. Temporary electrical service, Division 1. I 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with II appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL label. B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or 1 standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: I1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. Federal Specifications (FS) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) I 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 7. Factory Mutual (FM) I 8. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments 9. National Electrical Code (NEC) with State and Local Amendments 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Ii 12. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments 13. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications I and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be 1 products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page 2 of 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1 E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. F. All disconnect switches, panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and equipment of like nature shall be of the same manufacturer. G. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. If Drawings and Specifications contradict each other, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification prior to the bid. If time constraints are such that this is not possible, then the more stringent of the conflicting requirements shall be included in the bid. The Specifications are not automatically more authoritative than the drawings. 111 H. General work practices for electrical construction shall be in compliance with NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. 1.3 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS I A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items, and include the wiring and/or devices shown on the Drawings or listed in other sections of this Specification. Also see "Equipment Connections." 1.4 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of work of other Divisions. B. Control devices (i.e. magnetic starters) and control wiring relating to the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and plumbing systems are specified under other Sections of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein. C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. I D. All sections of Division 26 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 26. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean • -.'. - • •• .- .` . •••• •. .- atmetal used D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. f Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans. G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic"change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract111 Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page 3 of 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve cover and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION A. Material other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted. B. The Architect reserves the right to require the submission of an actual sample of the specific item before the review and acceptance of any product as an equal to that specified. 111 1.7 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a set of record drawings as directed in Division 1. B. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. C. Record and accurately indicate the following: 1. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed conduits/cables. 2. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, addenda, obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information. 3. Exact routing of feeders and service conduits. 4. Exact location of junction boxes. 5. One-line diagram including sub-panels, and note Switchgear/panel locations by room number. 6. All switchgear and panel schedules. D. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. E. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents as indicated in Division 1. F. Use standards set in contract documents. Computer-aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. 1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Upon completion of Contract and after no further action is noted as being required on catalog data submitted for review, submit multiple sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for inclusion in Owner's Maintenance Brochure as specified in Division 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, service representatives, supplier for replacement parts, etc. Bind each set of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab marker for each classification of equipment or data. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of the project, at a time scheduled by the Owner, assemble key mechanics, subcontractors, vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the Owner's personnel. Instructions shall include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance. B. Systems Manual: Submit separate Systems Manual [30] days prior to scheduling the required Instruction Period. The Systems Manual shall be a hard copy binder with fold out full size drawings, and a CD with all data in electronic format. The Document shall contain at minimum the following: 1. Permit/Construction/Design Drawings. ' 2. Contractor As-Built Drawings. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page4of8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ' 3. A final version of the Basis of Design Document for LEED or Design Build projects. 4. Single line diagrams for all systems or components that require regular owner adjustment. 5. As-Built Sequence of Operations, Control Drawings, and Original Set Points for all equipment requiring contractor programming or set up, including but not limited to; a. Lighting Control Systems. b. HVAC DDC systems. c. HVAC Equipment. d. Plumbing/Pump systems. e. Emergency Power systems. f. All systems specifically required to be Commissioned. g. Minimum set point data to include 1) Seasonal System Adjustments 2) Normal settings for thermostats, fans, VFDs and other motor switching devices. 3) Normal Valve Settings. 4) Original settings for time clocks, schedules, and Lighting Control Panels. 6. Operating instructions for integrated building systems. 7. Programing instructions. 8. Recommended schedule of maintenance requirements and frequency. 9. Recommended schedule for retesting of commissioned systems with blank test forms from the original commissioning plan. 10. Recommended schedule for calibrating sensors and actuators. 11. Emergency measures and procedures for systems failures. 1.11 ALTERNATE BIDS A. Refer to Division 1 for possible effect of bid alternates upon Work of this Division. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a111 period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or be approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and ordinances. B. All material shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical characteristics and other identification, and shall be the standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of similar material. C. All materials shall be of manufacturer's latest design, and of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards listed under Quality Assurance. 2.2 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide panels of adequate size for equipment requiring service and installed above plaster or gypsum board ceilings, behind walls or in furring. Furnish complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Size, number and location of access panels is not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12"x 12"for simple manual access, nor smaller than 16"x 20"where personnel must pass through. Milcor Style A, K, L, or M panels or equivalent Bilco or Potter-Roemer as required by construction. Access panels shall maintain ceiling fire rating. 2.3 PAINTING I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page5of8 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL A. The work of this Division includes painting of the electrical items. All exposed conduits, boxes, surface raceways, etc. shall be painted per the Architect's direction. See Division 9 for additional painting requirements. 2.4 FIRE RATINGS A. Electrical items (light fixtures, boxes, etc.) recessed into fire rated walls or ceilings shall be alcoved in gypboard enclosures or be UL listed to maintain the fire rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without added cost to the Owner. B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect. C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents. E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment. F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration. G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's liability. H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to rough-in or demolition and notify the Architect of any discrepancies. I. Coordinate all work and trim with carpet installers. Provide carpet plates on all carpet surfaces, complete as required. J. Install equipment such that code-required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance. K. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies. 3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILL A. Provide trenching, backfilling, compaction, repaving or other site restoration as required by the work done in this Division. Minimum trench depth shall be 36" unless otherwise noted. Install 6"wide red vinyl tape with lettering "Caution: Buried Electric Line Below" 18" above all buried electric lines in this contract. B. Excavating and backfilling required for installation of electrical work shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified in Division 31. Backfill in excavations outside of building may be excavated material from site containing no rocks over 3/4" in diameter. C. Provide all necessary backfill materials, whether from site excavations or from off-site borrows, to completely fill excavations. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with the Owner. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page6of8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL I D. Bored Crossings: Casing shall be smooth steel pipe fabricated in sections for welded joints, of size sufficiently large to provide adequate working space to properly install conduits, continuous butt welded at joints for rigid, watertight encasement, minimum thickness of 0.188"for casing under 14"diameter, and 0.281"for casings 14" and larger diameter. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK ' A. Protect electrical work, wire and cable, materials and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. B. Switchgear, panels, light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect if damaged. C. Including products of other Sections, clean, repair and touch-up or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored or damaged. D. Provide for dehumidification of equipment during construction when directed by Architect. I E. Remove debris from project site upon completion or sooner if directed. 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS A. Provide raceways and conduits for all electrical system wiring as specified herein. Class II or III systems wiring installed per Article 725 of NEC will be required to be installed in raceway unless otherwise indicated. When open wiring is permitted, raceways will be required in insulated walls and in other inaccessible areas. Low voltage wiring installed in return air plenums shall utilize plenum rated cable. B. The extent of the branch circuiting and control wiring shown shall not be changed. C. Cross or hash marks on power and lighting conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 minimum copper branch circuit conductors unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear, provide conductors as required to provide an operable system, sized per local codes. D. Repair surfaces damaged during installation to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Surface preparation, including cleaning and priming, shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's requirements. E. Adjacent panelboards, component cabinets, terminal cabinets, trench duct, and wire gutter exposed in finished areas shall have matching trim and finish. F. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings or as listed below. Where no heights are indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing in. All dimensions are to the center of the device above finished floor unless specified otherwise. Lighting dimensions are to the bottom of suspended fixtures; mount panelboards 72"to top handle; mount devices above counters, 12" above counter or 4-1/2" above backsplash, whichever is greater;and receptacles in unfinished areas 48". G. All raceways and wiring shall be concealed where possible. All wiring devices, recessed light fixtures, etc., shall be flush mounted unless otherwise noted. H. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which they will operate. I. The Drawings do not indicate all items necessary. Provide associated equipment, materials, and labor as required for complete and operable systems. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items unless so shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect. I B. Cutting, patching and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified, including plastering, gypsum board, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting shall be performed by workers skilled in their respective trades. C. Follow requirements specified in Division 1. 3.6 SLEEVES AND CHASES I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS 00 S IMP ROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 121818 Page 7 of 8 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL A. Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to I pass through floors, ceilings or walls. Seal all openings around conduits against leaks and in a manner to maintain the fire rating of the structure penetrated. Prevent unnecessary cutting in connection with the finished work. Make all repairs and seals in a manner acceptable to the Architect. I 3.7 NOISE CONTROL A. The entire electrical system apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. B. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back-to-back, nor shall straight-through I boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note, to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces. C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise-producing devices shall not be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must I be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier Ithan other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS I A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Verify the rough-in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in. Check the I voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections shall be made for the proper direction of rotation. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. Minimum size flex for mechanical equipment shall be 1/2". I Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex. C. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may I be of a different brand with different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire and circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained from equipment nameplate and submittals. Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor. I D. Provide appropriate cable and cord cap for final connection unless equipment is provided with the same. Provide receptacle to match cord cap. E. Install disconnects and motor starters in readily accessible locations. I 3.9 TESTS A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of faults, I shorts, or unintentional grounds. B. Systems are not considered for acceptance until work is complete and demonstrated to meet contract documents. C. Acceptance by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), or City/State/County Inspectors does not demonstrate work meets contract documents. D. After the interior wiring system installation is completed, and at such time as the Owner may direct, the I Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or an authorized representative. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests, and the Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod, the resistance, and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. I3.10 DEMOLITION AND REMODELING NOTES A. Keep all systems functioning with minimum system interruptions. Power, telephone, and life-safety system interruptions shall be coordinated with the Owner. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260500 I 121818 Page 8 of 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL , B. The Contractor shall have the option to reuse existing raceways as far as practical, provided it remains code accessible, concealed by new work, and not in conflict with demolition. C. The Electrical Drawings are not wiring diagrams but schematic plans prepared to aid the Contractor in bidding the electrical revisions and additions shown. It is intended that the Contractor shall visit the job site prior to bidding to verify all existing conditions which will be affected by or will have affect upon the required revisions and additions, prepare a wiring diagram, secure all permits and accomplish the work, securing approval from the Architect for deviations from the schematic plan. II D. Remove all unused lighting fixtures from remodel area prior to completion of the work. E. All removed electrical equipment is the property of the contractor. Disconnect and remove such equipment from the project property. All equipment noted as "salvage"shall remain the Owner's property as specified in Division 2. Remove all debris resulting from the electrical work and sweep broom clean. F. Remove all existing fixtures, clocks, horns, switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices from surfaces scheduled for remodeling. Replace devices as required following application of remodeling finishes, installing box extensions where required. G. All lighting fixtures in the project area scheduled to be relocated shall be relamped, repaired as required, and cleaned. H. All relocated grid fixtures must be equipped with class "P" ballast protection. Those fixtures without class "P" ballasts shall be retrofitted with new external ballast fusing, complying with NEC 410. The contractor shall have the option to furnish new fixtures, matching the existing as approved by the Engineer or other new fixtures as approved by the Engineer. I. Unless shown otherwise, every attempt shall be made to retain existing 120 volt receptacle outlets in use (whether shown on the plan or not). Replace all existing non-grounded receptacles with grounded type. Prove existing conduit ground or provide green ground conductor which proves to the service entrance ground. New and existing 120 volt receptacle (re)wiring shall typically not exceed 6 duplex receptacles per 20 ampere circuit. J. If abandoned outlets serve as feed-through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, new conduit and wire shall be provided to bypass the abandoned outlets. If existing conduits pass through partitions, floors, or ceilings which are being removed or remodeled,new conduit and wire shall be provided to route around the removed area and maintain service to the existing load. K. Where devices are removed from a wall to remain, provide blank cover plate similar to other cover plates in that area. L. The contractor shall trace the remaining load on existing branch circuits, remove all unused wiring, make code approved circuit consolidations (where possible) to conserve and update use of existing capacity, and 1 provide new updated panel schedules. Provide copies of resulting panel schedules and transmit with the electrical record drawing set, on which the contractor shall also note "as-built"circuit number assignments. M. Where existing electrical items are scheduled for removal, also remove associated wiring, raceways, boxes, conduits, etc. as far as practical. Do not abandon in place. Any overeur--,en devices That become spare shall be labeled as such. N. Where replacement boxes are deeper than existing boxes being replaced (i.e. panelboard tubs), provide appropriate trim around box to provide for a neat and workmanlike appearance. Verify exact methods and materials with Architect. O. Where equipment is removed and/or replaced, patch and paint surface newly exposed to match surrounding surface finish. Verify exact methods and materials with Architect. END OF SECTION I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260519 121818 Page 1 of 3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all conductors, cables, connectors, lugs, cable ties, and terminations for all systems. 111 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All conductors shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and comply with Fed. Spec. J-C-30B and UL 83. Materials omitted here but necessary to complete the work are to be of comparable quality. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver conductors and cables in complete coils with UL label and bearing manufacturer's name, wire size, and type of insulation. B. Store and handle materials so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation. C. Deliver conductors No. 10 and smaller in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged cartons with labels legible and intact. 1.4 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors No. 18 AWG and larger shall be stranded, soft-drawn copper. Conductors installed in a manufacturer's standard assembly, such as a light fixture, may be solid wire. B. Insulation for new conductors installed in raceways shall be "THWN"or"THHN" unless approved otherwise by Owner. C. Where adverse conductor exposure exists, code-approved insulation suitable for the conditions encountered shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. All wire and cable for feeder circuits shall conform to the latest requirements of the current edition of the NEC and shall meet all ASTM Specifications. Wire and cable shall be new and have wire size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals. E. Sizes shall not be less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG. Class I remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 18 AWG. F. All insulation shall be rated 600 volts unless noted otherwise. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome Cable, Essex, Belden, West Penn, or approved. 2.2 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. All connectors shall be solderless pressure type per Fed. Spec. W-S-610, properly taped. All taped joints shall be with plastic tape, "Scotch 33," applied in half-lap layers without stretching to deform. B. Splices shall utilize Scotch "Hyflex"or "Ideal"wing nut connector installed properly. Splices for No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with tin or silver plated copper compression sleeves. 111 C. Splices made in handholes and manholes, or underground splices, shall be made water tight with epoxy resin-type splicing kits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulation shall be removed with a stripping tool designated specifically for that purpose. All conductors shall be left nick-free. B. UL listed pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. R TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260519 121818 Page 2 of 3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES I C. Raceway shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors. D. Wire shall not be left extending out of exposed conduit stubs or incomplete raceways where subject to mechanical injury. E. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding tensions, bending radii of the cable and compounds. F. Conductors shall be terminated as required. G. Conductor sizes for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except as noted. H. Stranded conductors shall not be terminated with post and screw unless compression spade/ring lug is utilized. I. 120-volt homeruns over 80 feet in length shall be minimum #10 conductor. 3.2 LABELING A. Provide color coding of building wiring consistent throughout the work as listed herein, unless required otherwise by local code authority. Band feeder conductors not available in colors where clearly visible at each termination, tape or splice using two full wraps of 3/4" adhesive vinyl tape or equally visible color marking corresponding to the following table. Less than 250V between phases 251 to 600V btwn phases Phase A- Black Phase A- Brown Phase B—Red (Orange in 240V) Phase B-Orange Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow Neutral -White Neutral - Gray Ground - Green Ground - Green B. Switch legs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the above phases to which they are connected or may be any other color distinctive from those listed above. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors but the identification shall be by labels throughout. Labeling shall be accomplished by using computer-generated heat shrink labels suitable for the wire size used. In no case will hand lettering or wraparound labels be accepted. C. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C left to right or A-B-C top to bottom. D. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. E. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable. 3.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices are to be made up completely promptly after wire installation. Single wire pigtails shall be provided 1 for fixture and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for fixture wire connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails. 3.4 CONNECTORS I A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool- applied, spade-flared lug when terminating at a screw connection. B. All screw and bolt-type connectors shall be made up tight and be retightened after an eight-hour period. C. All tool-applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness. D. Check terminations in all panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., six months after completion of installation. Supply a confirming letter to the Owner at completion of test. 3.5 TESTS I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260519 121818 Page 3 of 3 1 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all feeders and circuits over 100 A, 480 volt and below, with a 1,000 volt megger. The written test report listing the results of the test to be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall be disconnected prior to the test. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260521 121818 Page 1 of 1 METAL-CLAD CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Metal-clad cable may be used for all concealed branch circuit wiring other than homeruns, where permitted by local codes and NEC Article 330 except where otherwise noted. 1.2 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit catalog cut sheets of actual products being used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cable shall be steel jacketed, interlock armor with internal, fully insulated, green grounding conductor and multi-conductor, thermoplastic, insulated, color-coded stranded copper conductors No. 12 through No. 6 AWG, 600 volt. 1 B. Connections, terminations, and fasteners shall be malleable iron or steel saddle-type with anti-short insulated bushings. 2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. MC Cable: AFC/A Nortek Company, type MC, HCF-90. B. Fittings: T&B 3110 series connectors with 390 series bushings. C. Tools: Cable manufacturer approved type with controlled depth rotary cutter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Support horizontal and vertical cable 6 feet on center (maximum) and within 6" of boxes with approved cable clamps. B. Support cable above accessible ceilings; do not rest cables on ceiling tiles. Attach cables with metal clips or plastic cable ties to support wires from structure on 6-foot centers maximum. C. Cable shall be cut with manufacturer-approved devices. D. Splice conductors only in accessible junction boxes. E. Cable shall not be supported from or come into contact with mechanical ducts, water, sprinkler or gas piping; maintain 6-inch separation minimum. F. Provide junction box at all cable penetrations of wall, ceiling, or floor surfaces for equipment connections; cable shall not be run directly through finished surfaces. G. Voltage Drop: Conductors over 75 feet for 120-volt, and over 200 feet for 277-volt for branch or individual circuit home runs from equipment connection; receptacle or lighting fixture shall be No. 10 AWG minimum. H. Provide junction box at transition from concealed to exposed wiring. Exposed wiring shall conform to Section 16110 - Raceways. I. Where cable penetrates fire-rated walls or floors, provide mechanical fire stop fitting with UL-listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. J. Provide junction box at transition from interior to exterior wiring. Exterior wiring shall conform to Section 16110 - Raceways. END OF SECTION I I 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260526 121818 Page 1 of 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide ground system as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required by NEC and other rules and regulations pertaining to grounding. 1.2 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Equipment or grounding conductors shall be soft drawn copper, stranded per ASTM B8 and, if insulated, shall have green insulation. 2.2 GROUNDING BUSHINGS/WEDGES A. Sufficient ampacity with grounding conductor set screw connection. 2.3 CONNECTOR 111 A. Cast, set screw or bolted type. 2.4 GROUND RODS A. Copper-clad steel, not less than 3/4" in diameter, 8' long, driven full length into the earth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with Article 250, Tables 250.66 and 250.122 of the NEC. 1 B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flange connection. D. Where the metallic water service is used, it shall be grounded as described by Article 250.52 of the NEC. E. Generally, all supplemental grounding electrodes shall be ground rods. F. All ground wire connections below finished grade, cast in concrete, or bonding solid wire shall be l exothermically welded. G. Where there is no metallic water service to the building, ground connections shall be made to driven ground rods on the exterior of the building. H. The maximum resistance measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods shall be installed not less than 6' on centers, or if sectional-type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Engineer shall be notified immediately. I. Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing and to ensure low impedance. J. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. K. Where new circuits are to be served by existing panels with no ground bus, provide supplemental copper ground bus in panel. L. Install ground conductor in all metallic and non-metallic conduit. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260526 121818 Page 2 of 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I i I t I I I 1 I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260529 121818 Page 1 of 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all electrical equipment and wiring with adequate supports of specified type required for a complete installation. 1.2 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENERS A. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw-type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs, heat-treated or spring steel tension clamps on steel work;for new concrete installation use cast-in-concrete inserts. Kindorf D- 255 or approved. B. Hammer-driven and trigger-fired anchors may be used only after obtaining specific written authorization from the Architect. 2.2 OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS A. Wood Stud Walls: Adjustable bar hangers with "C"channel cross section Steel City 6010 series, or approved, or mounted on solid blocking. 4-inch square boxes adjacent to wood studs may be side nailed and back braced with Steel City No. 50 box brace. B. Light steel construction, bar hangers with 1-inch long studs between metal studs or metal stud "C" brackets snapped on and tab-locked to metal studs. C. Concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast in place. Flush anchors or concrete inserts. D. Flush Ceiling Outlets: Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers. 2.3 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. One Hole Malleable Straps: Steel City, Appleton, T&B, Diamond, Raco, or approved. B. Conduit Clips: Caddy, Raco, or approved. C. Nail-Up Straps: 1/2"through 1", Raco 2252, 2253, 2254, or approved. D. Adjustable Hangers for Conduits 1-1/2" and Larger: Steel City C-149 with threaded steel rod of proper size. E. Adjustable trapeze hangers to support groups of parallel conduits; Steel City B-905 steel channel, H-119 square washer, C-105 strap, threaded rod. Components of Unistrut, Globe Strut, Harvey Alstrut, Kindorf, Thomas & Betts, or approved. 2.4 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS A. Side Beam Connector, Kindorf E-244; 90 degree fitting, Kindorf B-916; clamp type anchor clips Kindorf Type "C," Unistrut P2675 or approved, spot type concrete insert Kindorf B-255 with "Gals-Krom"finish. 2.5 SUPPORT CHANNELS A. Conduit: Kindorf B-905 with Galv-Krom finish, and C-105 single bolt channel pipe straps. B. Lighting: Kindorf B-900 with G-969 closure strip and G-977 swing connector. C. Recessed in Concrete: Kindorf D-980 with D-982 anchored end caps and D-983 joiner clips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Every fastening device and support for electrical equipment (includes fixtures, panels, outlets, conduits, and cabinets) shall be capable of sustaining not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects. Fasten support to the building or a building structural member. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260529 121818 Page 2 of 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I B. Provide independent supports to the building or building structural member for electrical fixtures, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces and/or over the furred or suspended ceilings. Chain or additional ceiling wires may be used for light fixture supports. C. Other crafts'fastening devices shall not be used for the supporting means of electrical, equipment, materials, or fixtures. D. Supports and/or fastening devices shall not be used to support more than one particular item. E. Vertical support members for equipment and fixtures shall be straight and parallel to building walls. F. Examine all equipment locations to determine type of supports required. G. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures. H. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1-1/2" in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4" in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled. 3.2 BOXES A. Boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be supported independently of the ceiling supports. I B. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet metal boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. C. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box and the raceway shall be supported with an approved fastener not more than 24"from the box. 3.3 RACEWAYS I A. Support conduits within 18" of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, couplings, elbows, and deflections. Maximum distance between supports shall not exceed ten (10) foot spacing. B. Conduit up to and including 1" EMT may be supported from ceiling fixture wires by conduit clips or other approved devices only with written approval of the installer of the ceiling support system. All other conduit runs shall be secured to the structure by two-hole straps or supported on Kindorf or Unistrut hangers. Wire will not be permitted for supporting conduit. All visible conduit runs will be parallel to the building structural lines. C. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire. D. In partitions of light steel construction, sheet metal screws may be used, and bar hangers may be attached with saddle-suspended ceiling construction only. Lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. E. Support suspended feeder conduits by metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rods. Wire ties to I prevent displacement, using not less than No. 14 iron wire, may be used only for concealed runs in concrete for conduit up to 1-1/4". F. At main distribution and surface mounted branch panels and cabinets where conduit exits from the top, provide support channels on wall 24"above panel and at 6'-0" intervals from there on for support of conduits. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260533 121818 Page 1 of 4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all raceways, fittings, and boxes of specified type required for complete project. Install all systems in raceways unless specifically noted otherwise. Provide all outlet boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes and special boxes required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved. B. All boxes shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Where special fabrication is required, the work shall be performed by a listed facility in accordance with UL 50, and all products of manufacture shall bear a label. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements for"THHN"wire or as noted on Drawings. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver raceways with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label and bearing manufacturer's name on each length. B. Deliver fittings in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. 1.4 APPLICATION A. Areas of use: Underground GRC, PVC Within poured Concrete (except GRC, PVC slab-on grade) or CMU Dry concealed locations GRC, EMT Wet or Dry exposed locations, GRC subject to damage Dry exposed locations, not subject GRC, EMT to damage Hazardous Class I or II GRC 1 Rooftops GRC, EMT B. Underground conduit shall be minimum 1"trade size. PVC shall not be used above grade. Unless otherwise approved, all conduits shall be installed under reinforcing steel. C. Where the contractor elects to utilize PVC in lieu of GRC, the contractor shall provide supplemental ground bus in terminating switch and panelboards, and green ground wire in conduit according to code rules. D. For the purposes of this section, poured concrete slabs on grade and under-the-building slabs are not classified as dry locations. E. Flexible metal conduit will be permitted only where flexibility is necessary. Exceptions are connections to recessed light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to all equipment subject to movement or vibration such as motors, transformers, etc. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used when moisture may be present and for exposed motor and equipment connections. F. Surface raceway may be used only where specifically called for on the Drawings or in the Specifications. G. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. H. Feeder raceways shall be rigid conduit with threaded connections. I. Underground 90 degree bends shall be GRC. Treat GRC threads with a copper coat to avoid moisture and corrosion. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260533 I 121818 Page2of4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.5 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data for surface raceway and wireway. B. Submit product data for floor boxes. Submit shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Include layout drawings showing components and wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Allied Tube &Conduit,Western Tube & Conduit, Triangle, Bridgeport, AFC, Carlon,Western Plastics, Alflex, O'Kote, or approved substitute. Wiremold,Walker, or approved substitute. Raco, Thomas & Betts, or approved substitute. 2.2 CONDUITS A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) shall be hot-dip zinc, galvanized inside and out, mild steel pipe manufactured in accordance with UL-6 and ANSI C80.1. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel only and shall comply with UL-797 and ANSI C80.3. i Exterior shall be hot-dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating. C. Rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC) polyvinyl chloride shall be schedule 40 unless otherwise noted, and shall comply with UL-651 and NEMA TC 2. I D. Surface raceway shall utilize snap-in cover and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer and shall comply with UL 5 standard. Material and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. E. Flexible metal conduit shall be steel and comply with UL 1 and ANSI standards. Liquid-tight flexible metal I conduit shall comply with UL 360 and ANSI standards. 2.3 WIREWAYS A. Gutters: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knockouts on standard spacing, screw cover, suitable for environment. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system. I C. Exterior wireways and fittings/accessories shall be stainless steel. 2.4 FITTINGS A. GRC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed with insulating bushings equal to T&B 1220 or 1230 series. B. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight compression type or set screw type with insulated nylon throats on connectors. Cast EMT fittings are prohibited. 111 C. Conduits piercing a building waterproof membrane shall be provided with O-Z type FSR fittings. D. Flexible metal conduit shall utilize screw-in type connectors. Couplings and set-screw type connectors are not permitted. E. Seal-offs with filler fiber, compound, large removable cover. All components shall be of the same manufacturer. F. Expansion Couplings: 1. Exposed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be weatherproof with external bonding jumper, providing at least 4" longitudinal movement with bushed conduit ends. 2. Concealed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be water tight with an internal bonding jumper and neoprene construction. The fitting shall allow 3/4" movement in any direction or deflection of 30 degrees from normal. G. Locknuts shall be galvanized steel. I 2.5 BOXES A. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 4" square and 1-1/2" deep except where 11/ shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. B. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required. I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260533 121818 Page3of4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and walls above 14 I feet. D. Boxes shall be of the cast-metal hub type when located in normally wet locations and when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces. E. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings or plastic covers as required. F. Cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior surfaces shall be gasketed. G. Provide boxes suitable for the intended environment and sized as required to accommodate the equipment within. Exterior boxes shall be stainless steel. H. Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by the National Electrical Code shall be constructed of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified above. Boxes shall be furnished with screw-fastener covers. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. I. Exterior junction boxes located below 8 feet from grade shall be equipped with security screws. J. In-ground junction boxes/vaults to be concrete or stainless steel with security screws. Plastic is prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ends of metal conduits shall be reamed and left free of burrs. B. Provide pull boxes or vaults where shown or required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree bends, or to ease pulling tension. Use boxes of code-required size with removable covers, installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. C. Conceal all wiring in finished spaces so far as practicable. Exposed conduit shall be used only in the I following: 1. Mechanical and electrical rooms or spaces where walls and ceilings will not be covered with finish materials. 2. Existing walls that are concrete or CMU construction. D. Exposed raceways shall be parallel or at right angles to structural lines, and shall be neatly offset into boxes. Exposed raceways shall follow existing exposed piping/ductwork/conduit paths as far as practicable. E. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet mounted on a table or to supply a machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide plug where conduit is to be used in future. F. Keep conduit and raceway closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. G. Remove all foreign matter from raceways and pull mandrel through conduits larger than 1-1/2" prior to installing conductors. H. Where no conduit size is noted on the Drawings, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of type THHN conductors installed, but in no case smaller than 3/4"trade diameter. Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wire unless otherwise noted. Adjust conduit sizes accordingly. I. Where the contractor elects to combine branch circuit runs shown as separate runs on the Drawings, provide a minimum 3/4"conduit or increase raceway size to provide a minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future conductors. Feeder runs shall not be combined. J. All conduits installed in concrete construction, underground, or under the building slab shall be minimum 3/4", unless otherwise noted. K. Assemble, glue and seal PVC conduit in straight lengths prior to installation in trench. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260533 121818 Page4of4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I L. Seal-offs shall be installed in all conduits which route from warm areas into refrigerated areas. M. Install PVC conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cut the conduit ends square and apply an approved solvent to clean the joint. Apply an approved cement and allow to set 24 hours before installing conductors. N. Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by the National Electrical Code,where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box;otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may be used. O. A pull wire shall be inserted into each empty raceway in which wiring is to be installed by others. The pull wire shall be of No. 15 AWG zinc-coated steel, or of plastic having not less than 200-pound tensile strength. Not less than 10" of slack shall be left at each end of the pull wire. P. Raceway shall not be installed under the fire pits of boilers and furnaces and shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of flues, steam pipes and hot water pipes. >� Q. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Field-made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit-bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. R. Expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers shall be installed where raceways cross expansion joints, construction joints, sawed joints, and where shown. S. Where conduit is shown stubbed into a telephone, computer or communication terminal area, conduit shall be stubbed up 6" above floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings. T. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment. U. The end of a conduit stub shall have an insulated bushing. V. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating partitions. W. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating fire-rated barriers. An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk and/or putty form may be used. X. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use. Flush outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished surface lines. Y. Outlet boxes on flex connected fixtures shall be installed within five feet of conduit knock-out in fixture. Z. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment. AA. Surface raceway may be installed on the surface only if extensive repairs will be required for concealment. BB. Ivory or White surface raceway shall be used in labs, classrooms, and areas requiring numerous closely spaced outlets. 3.2 INSTALLING CONDUIT BELOW SLAB-ON-GRADE OR IN THE GROUND A. All electrical wiring below slab-on-grade shall be protected by a conduit system. B. No conduit system shall be installed horizontally within concrete slab-on-grade. For slab-on-grade construction, horizontal runs of rigid plastic shall be installed below the floor slab. C. Conduit passing vertically through slab-on-grades shall be coated rigid steel. D. Slope conduits away from terminal equipment;drain away from the building interior. E. Rigid steel or IMC conduits, metal boxes, and couplings installed below slab-on-grade or in the earth shall be field-wrapped with 0.010" pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlay, or shall have a factory applied plastic resin, epoxy, or coal-tar coating system. Zinc coating may be omitted from rigid steel conduit, or IMC which has a factory-applied epoxy system. All joints shall be threaded, sealed and wrapped with tape to prevent entry of water. Use 20 mil pipe wrapping tape to cover wrench marks,field cuts, or abrasions to the outer factory installed anti-corrosion covering. F. Provide duct seal at ends of all underground and under-slab conduits. I END OF SECTION I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260553 121818 Page 1 of 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work. 1.2 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Unless otherwise specified, all identification nameplates shall be made of laminated three-ply plastic in accordance with Fed. Spec. L-P-387 equal to "Lamicoid." Nameplates shall be minimum 1/16"thick, with black outer layers and a white core, red outer ply for all emergency applications. Edges shall be chamfered. B. Provide identification nameplates for starters, switchboards, safety switches, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, equipment (air handling units, exhaust fans, pumps, etc.), with a minimum of 1/4" high letters. C. Provide identification nameplates for control power transformers, control devices (relays, contactors, etc.), with a minimum of 1/8" high letters. D. Where switches control remote lighting, exhaust fans, or power outlets, or where switches in the same gang (two or more) serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc., or different areas, such as corridor and outlet, furnish engraved cover plates with 1/8" black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LABELING A. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be permanently marked with an identification nameplate to identify the equipment by type or function and specific unit number as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work, and not the designation on the construction drawings. Minimum panel schedule width shall be 4" with 1/4" height allowed for each circuit line. Panel schedules shall be the type which install in a metal frame or pocket. Panel schedules shall be of the odd/even sequence (1-3-5-7-9... and 2-4-6-8-10...). C. Identify service entrance and distribution switchboards with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans, mounted on the face of the switchboard. Identify each feeder, breaker, and switch with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans. D. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with the main or subdistribution panel labeling, mounted on the face of the door. No brand labels or other markings shall be on the outside of the panels. E. Label all disconnect switches, relays, contactors, starters and time switches indicating voltage, amperage, power panel source, circuit number and equipment served with laminated plastic label. F. Nameplates shall be secured with screws or pop rivets. Adhesive-only fasteners shall not be permitted. G. For wall switches and receptacles, utilize extra strength, laminated, adhesive tape, with 3/16" letters on clear background. H. Label all junction boxes to show circuit(s) with printed label. END OF SECTION I ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260923 121818 Page 1 of 5 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide lighting control equipment complete and operable as specified herein and as shown on the IDrawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All lighting control equipment shall be UL and CUL listed and labeled and shall comply with the NEC. IB. Comply with FCC Regulations of Part 15, Subpart J, for Class A. C. All equipment is this section to have a minimum 5 year warranty. I 1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data for lighting control equipment and systems components, including dimensions and data on features and components. Include elevation views of front panels of control and indicating I devices. Include data on ratings. B. Submit wiring diagrams detailing specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiating between factory-installed and field-installed wiring. IC. Submit maintenance data for lighting control equipment and systems components to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TYPE 1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS (AUTOMATIC WALL SWITCH) —LINE VOLTAGE A. Sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting infrared energy. Small 1 movements shall be detected, such as when a person is writing while seated at a desk. B. The sensor shall be a completely self-contained control system that replaces a standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay, compatible with electronic ballasts, compact I fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating devices shall not be allowed. Sensor shall have ground wire and grounded strap for safety. C. Sensor shall utilize advanced control logic based on RISC (Reduced Instruction-Set Circuit) microcontroller. ID. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, a technology shall be used to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. 1 E. The sensor shall utilize continuously adjusting Zero Cross Relay control. F. Sensors shall utilize `Smart Set'technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of Smart Set shall be selectable with a DIP switch. 1 G. Sensor shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically(with the Smart Set setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes, walk-through mode, or test mode, set by DIP switch. In walk-through mode, lights shall turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds. IH. Sensor shall have the choice of light flash alert and/or audible alert of impending light shutoff. I. Sensor shall have sensitivity adjustment that is set to either automatic or reduced sensitivity. I J. Sensor shall have a built-in light level feature selectable with DIP switch. K. Sensor shall have automatic-ON or manual-ON operation. L. Sensor shall operate at universal voltages. I M. Sensor shall be capable of switching 0-800 watts fluorescent/incandescent or 1/6HP @ 120VAC; 0 to 1200 watts fluorescent or 1/6 HP @ 230/277VAC. N. The sensor shall utilize a temperature-compensated dual element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. 1 O. Fresnel lens shall be made of hard, 1.0mm Poly IR 2 material for greater sensitivity and detection performance. Lens shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260923 121818 Page2of5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES I P. To assure detection at desktop level uniformly across the space, sensor shall have a two-level, 28- segment multi-element Fresnel lens system. Q. Sensor shall cover up to 300 square feet for walking motion, with a field of view of 180 degrees. R. The sensor shall not protrude more than 3/8"from the wall and should blend in aesthetically. S. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable, tamper resistant cover. T. Provide as dual relay model where indicated on drawings. U. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper PW-100/200 series, Lutron, Sensor Switch, or approved equal. 2.2 TYPE 2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS (CEILING MOUNT, 360 DEG, DUAL TECHNOLOGY) —LINE VOLTAGE A. The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes. B. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on. C. Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off. D. Sensors shall be mounted to the ceiling with a flat, unobtrusive appearance and provide 360deg of coverage. E. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. F. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, a technology shall be used to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. G. The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-element I Fresnel lens. The lens shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up. H. Sensors shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and utilize a power pack. I. Sensors shall utilize `Smart Set'technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of Smart Set shall be selectable with a DIP switch. J. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes set by DIP switch. K. Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds. L. _- Sensors shall have a built;• .•• - - •.. . • I e -i I footcandles. M. The sensors shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch. I N. Sensors shall have eight occupancy logic options that give the ability to customize control to meet application needs. O. The sensor shall have an additional single-pole, double-throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other control options. P. Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled for applications that require less sensor visibility. Q. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper DT-300 series, Lutron, Sensor Switch, or approved equal. I 2.3 TYPE 3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS (CEILING/WALL BRACKET MOUNT, DUAL TECHNOLOGY) —LINE VOLTAGE A. The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260923 121818 Page 3 of 5 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES B. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on. C. Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off. ID. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize a technology that automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. I E. Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside of controlled area. Coverage of both technologies must be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area. I F. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, a technology shall be used to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. G. Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and utilize a power pack. I H. The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens I shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception. I. The lens shall cover up to 2000 square feet for walking motion when mounted at 10 ft and 1000 sq ft of desktop motion. I J. DT-200 sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other control options. I K. Sensors shall utilize 'Smart Set'technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of Smart Set shall be selectable with a DIP switch. L. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the Smart Set setting) or shall have a I fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes. M. Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds. N. Sensor shall have an override-ON function for use in the event of a failure. O. Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to 300 footcandles. P. Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to verify I detection within the area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled. Q. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper DT-200 series, Lutron, Sensor Switch, or approved equal. 2.4 TYPE 4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS (CEILING MOUNT, ULTRASONIC)—LINE VOLTAGE IA. The ultrasonic occupancy sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in the floor area to be controlled by detecting Doppler shifts in a transmitted ultrasound. I B. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40KHz. It shall utilize a technology that automatically adjusts the detection threshold to compensate for changing levels of activity and airflow throughout the controlled space. I C. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, a technology shall be used to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. D. Sensors of varying frequencies shall not be allowed so as to prevent sensors from interfering with each I other and to assure compatibility in the event more sensors are added. E. The UT-300 sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and half-wave rectified and utilize a power pack. F. UT-355 shall incorporate a switching power supply for reduced power consumption; shall operate at 120/230/277 VAC, and shall not require a power pack. The UT-355 shall be utilized in areas with inaccessible ceiling spaces. G. Detection shall be maintained when a person moves only within or a maximum distance of 12 inches either in a horizontal or vertical manner at the approximate speed of 12 inches per second. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260923 121818 Page 4 of 5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES I H. The UT-300 sensor shall have a manual `on'function that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch. I. Sensors shall be mounted to the ceiling with a flat, unobtrusive appearance and provide 360 deg of coverage. J. Sensors shall utilize `Smart Set'technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns. The use of Smart Set shall be selectable with a DIP switch. K. Sensor shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after 30 seconds. L. UT-300 sensor shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other control options. M. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the Smart Set setting) or shall have a it fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes. N. The sensor shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled. O. Approved Manufacturer: Watt Stopper UT-300/UT-355, Lutron, Sensor Switch, or approved equal. 2.5 POWER AND AUXILIARY RELAY PACKS—LINE VOLTAGE A. Power pack shall be a self-contained transformer and relay module in a single small package. B. Power and auxiliary relay packs shall have dry contacts capable of switching 20 amp ballast load, 13 amp incandescent, 1 hp @120 VAC; 20 amp ballast @ 277VAC; 15 amp ballast, 1 hp @ 220-240 VAC. C. Power packs shall provide a 24 VDC, 150mA output/. I D. Power packs shall be capable of parallel wiring without regard to AC phases on primary. E. Auxiliary relay packs shall contain no transformer power supply and shall switch 120 VAC, 277 VAC or low it voltage. F. Power and auxiliary relay packs shall have low voltage Teflon coated leads, rated for 300 volts, suitable for use in plenum applications. G. Power pack shall be UL 2043 rated, use UL94 V-O plenum rated plastic, and have low voltage Teflon leads I for use in plenum applications. H. Power packs shall utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry. I. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper, Lutron, Sensor Switch, or approved equal. 2.6 EMERGENCY BYPASS RELAY—LINE VOLTAGE A. Manufacturer: L C & D GR2001 E/S. 2.7 DIGITAL OCCUPANCY SENSOR (AUTOMATIC WALL SWITCH, DUAL TECHNOLOGY, DIMMING ) A. Manufacturer: nLight nWSX PDT LV DX. 2.8 DIGITAL OCCUPANCY SENSOR (CEILING MOUNT, 360 DEG, DUAL TECHNOLOGY) A. Manufacturer: nLight nCM PDT 9. 2.9 DIGITAL SWITCH ( ON/OFF) I A. Manufacturer: nLight nPODM. 2.10 DIGITAL SWITCH ( ON/OFF SINGLE ZONE DIMMING ) A. Manufacturer: nLight nPODM DX. 2.11 DIGITAL SWITCH ( ON/OFF 4-ZONE DIMMING) A. Manufacturer: nLight nPOD GFX. 1 2.12 DIGITAL DIMMING MODULE (0-10V) A. Manufacturer: nLight nPP16D. 2.13 DIGITAL RAISE/LOWER INTERFACE MODULE A. Manufacturer: nLight nIO RLX. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 260923 121818 Page5of5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 2.14 DIGITAL EMERGENCY BYPASS RELAY ( NON DIMMING APPLICATION ) A. Manufacturer: nLight nPP16ER. 2.15 DIGITAL EMERGENCY BYPASS RELAY( DIMMING APPLICATION ) A. Manufacturer: nLight nPP16DER. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for a complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. The contractor shall provide the quantity of sensors necessary to properly and completely cover each room indicated to have occupancy sensing. B. The contractor shall provide power packs as required to accomplish the occupancy sensing indicated. C. Mount power packs on junction boxes in accessible locations and per the manufacturer's instructions. D. Mount the sensors with adapters and/or swivels per the manufacturer's instructions. E. It is the contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility,to verify placement of sensor and installation criteria. F. The contractor shall provide, at the Owner's facility, the training to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem-solving diagnosis of the lighting control equipment and systems. G. Digital lighting control devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard decora opening. Provide 1/2"conduit from switch box to accessible ceiling space. H. Provide CAT-5e low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors daisy-chained between nLight control devices and associated nLight fixtures located in the designated control zone. 3.2 TESTING A. The lighting control equipment and systems shall be thoroughly tested to confirm proper operation. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262200 121818 Page 1 of 2 ITRANSFORMERS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide dry-type energy efficient transformers per NEMA TP1, with primary and secondary voltages of I 600V and less and capacity ratings 15kVA through 750kVA.as specified herein and where shown on the Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION I A. Submit shop drawings indicating outline dimensions, connection and support points, weight, specified ratings, and materials. Include wiring diagrams of products, differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. I1.3 STANDARDS A. Transformers 750kVA and smaller shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. IC. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20. D. Transformers losses shall conform to NEMA TP1 requirements. JE. Transformers losses shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2 procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acme, Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, GE. 2.2 RATINGS INFORMATION IA. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220°C UL component recognized insulation system. I B. Transformers 15kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient. Transformers 25kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 4- 2.5%full capacity primary taps. Exact voltages to be as designated on the plans or the transformer schedule. C. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient. ID. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2. I Single Phase Three Phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 1 15 97.7% 15 97.0% 25 98.0% 30 97.5% 37.5 98.2% 45 97.7% $ 50 98.3% 75 98.0% 75 98.5% 112.5 98.2% 100 98.6% 150 98.3% 167 98.7% 225 98.5% 250 98.8% 300 98.6% I333 98.9% 500 98.7% 750 98.8% IE. The transformer(s) shall be rated as indicated on the drawings. F. Provide weather-shields on transformers exposed to weather. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262200 121818 Page2of2 TRANSFORMERS I 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. B. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. Cores for transformers greater than 500kVA shall be clamped utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to ensure proper pressure 1 throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards. D. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to I provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. 2.4 SOUND LEVELS A. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 15 to 50KVA- 45dB; 51 to 150kVA-50dB; 151 to 300kVA- 55dB; 301 to 500kVA- 60dB; 501 to 700kVA- 62dB; 701 to 1000kVA-64dB; 1001 to 1500kVA- 65dB; 1501 to 2000kVA- 66Db. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all transformers, make flexible conduit connections to housing, make all cable connections, make ground wire connections. B. Mount transformers on rubber sound/vibration isolators provided by manufacturer. Use mounting hardware and install according to manufacturer's instructions. C. No rigid connections shall be made to transformer. D. Provide support and bracing for transformers to comply with seismic requirements of the area. E. Leave a minimum clearance of 6" between transformer enclosure and non-combustible surfaces, and a minimum clearance of 12" between transformer enclosure and combustible surfaces. END OF SECTION I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262416 121818 Page 1 of 2 IPANELBOARDS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide at locations shown on the Drawings, panelboards of a type indicated and specified herein. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING is A. Protect against damage and moisture. Store materials off ground. Remove damaged materials from site immediately after detection. I B. Deliver with UL label and bearing manufacturers name. Panelboard exterior trim separately packaged to prevent damage during delivery and storage on site. C. Store and handle panelboards so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a I manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listing/approval. iB. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standards. 1. Panelboards - UL67. 2. Cabinet and Boxes - UL50. IC. National Electrical Code. D. NEMA Standard - PB1. I 1.5 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall panel dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid neutral shall be clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one-line diagrams with applicable voltage j' systems. Include copy of panel schedules in record documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panels shall be factory pre-assembled using tin-plated aluminum bussing and bolt-on circuit breakers. I Separate feeder lugs shall be provided for each feeder conductor. They shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machine drilling or tapping. B. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are Iindicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings. C. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral I bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A separate ground bus shall be included in all panels. There shall be a neutral and ground bus space for each breaker location listed as space. 1 D. Panelboard boxes shall be at least 20"wide, made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with National Electrical Code. Maximum panel depth shall be 5-3/4", unless otherwise shown or specifically approved by the Owner. Surface panel boxes shall be painted to match trim. I E. Switching device handles shall be accessible. Doors and panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. F. All panel doors shall be provided with a flush type combination catch and lock with two milled keys. On doors more than 48" high, a three point combination catch and lock shall be provided with a vault type I handle. All locks shall be keyed alike. All panel trims shall be "hinged front"construction, meaning trim has a piano hinge down one side, door opens by a single latch, and entire trim hinges open by removing two screws. I T 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262416 121818 Page 2 of 2 PANELBOARDS I G. Single pole breakers shall be full module size;two poles shall not be installed in a single module. Each breaker shall be securely fastened to prevent movement and trims shall fit neatly and tightly to the breaker a assembly. Interrupting capacity shall be minimum 10,000 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to Fed. Spec.W-C-375. All 15 or 20 ampere single pole breakers shall have"switching-duty" capability. H. Permanent numbers, engraved, stamped or painted shall be affixed to each pole next to breakers. Stick- on numbers are not acceptable. I. Panelboards shall be coated with a rust inhibiting phosphate primer and two coats of light gray enamel. Trims to be separately packed and protected from scratching and marring. J. Panelboards shall be tested, listed, and marked for use with a UL witnessed and recognized fuse/breaker combination. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS0 A. Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Breaker handle guards shall be provided on each circuit supplying obviously constant loads to prevent accidental shutting off. Such loads are contactor controlled circuits, freeze protection, etc. B. Provide typed schedules as in Section 26 05 53. C. Provide engraved laminated name plates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53. D. Provide one 3/4" spare conduit stubbed into an available accessible space above for every three single pole spare or space in new flush branch panels. END OF SECTION 1 I I 1 I 1 I I I I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARYH SC OOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262726 121818 Page 1 of 2 1 WIRING DEVICES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless specifically indicated otherwise. I1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved. B. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as noted on the Drawings. Should the 111 Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as specified below. C. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be from the same manufacturer and have identical appearance characteristics. 1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION IA. Submit product data for wiring devices and cover plates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC, quiet type, Hubbell HBL1221 Series, color shall be ivory. Single pole, double pole, 3-way, locking, or other type as indicated. Switches connected to emergency circuits shall be red. I B. Receptacles: Single and duplex receptacles shall be rated 20 amperes, 125 volts, two-pole, three-wire, grounded type, tamper resistant. Receptacles shall have nylon faces, one-piece brass mounting strap with I integral ground contacts and bypass power contacts; color shall be ivory. Tamper-resistant (child-proof) receptacles shall be a type which contains internal contacts which require the presence of both blades to energize the receptacle, and shall be UL 498 listed. Hubbell#HBLSG62H or equal. Receptacles connected to emergency circuits shall be red. 1 C. Receptacles with ground fault interrupters shall be in accordance with UL 943. D. Special purpose or heavy duty receptacles shall be of the type and of ratings and number of poles indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Contact surfaces may be either round or rectangular. I One appropriate straight or angle-type plug shall be furnished with each receptacle. Locking facilities, where indicated, shall be accomplished by the rotation of the plug. E. Device plates of the one-piece type shall be provided for all outlets and fittings to suit the devices installed. I Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel, or cast metal. Plates on finished walls shall be brush finish stainless steel. Plastic device plates are not acceptable. F. Receptacles in wet locations shall be in a weatherproof enclosure, the integrity of which is not affected I when the receptacle is in use. The enclosure shall be of high-impact polycarbonate construction, with a keyhole hinge without a spring and other metal parts, with a gasketless translucent lid that is lockable and tinted and has large cord openings. The enclosure shall be one or two-gang, and shall be securely secured to the receptacle box with tamper-proof fasteners through factory-drilled or field-drilled through factory- Iprepared drill points. Bell "Rayntite II", Intermatic WP1000 series, or equal. G. Designated computer outlets shall be isolated ground and Orange in color. H. Overhead pull-down cord reels shall have#12 AWG cord, be seismically braced. Reelcraft LG3040 Cord Reels, industrial grade, or District approved equal. Note: No plastic retracting rotators allowed due to durability issues. I. Multi-outlet assemblies shall not be used where individual receptacles cannot be replaced. I 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell, Bryant, P&S, Leviton, and Cooper. ii III PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 1 MPR TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262726 O 121818 Page2of2 WIRING DEVICES I A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish I plates and devices will not be accepted. C. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings unless otherwise specified. D. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. E. All outlets shall have a cover plate. Provide blank cover plate to match surrounding area if none other is specified. F. In general, lighting switches shall be installed on latch side of doorway. 3.2 TESTS I A. Test all receptacles for line to line, line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground, opens or shorts, and correct defective wiring. 3.3 LABELING A. See Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. END OF SECTION $ I 1 I I I I i $ I 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262800 121818 Page 1 of 4 1 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide overcurrent protective devices of a type as specified herein. I' B. Provide disconnect switches of a type as specified herein and where required by the National Electrical Code. Provide fused or unfused switches as required by equipment manufacturer or circuit requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. B. The circuit breaker(s) referenced herein shall be designed and manufactured according to the latest revision of the following standards. I 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches 2. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 3. UL 943- Standard for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 4. CSA C22.2 No. 5.1 - M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers ,11 5. NEC 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING IA. Deliver equipment with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label and bearing manufacturer's name. 1.4 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data for each disconnect switch, circuit breaker, and fuse type, including descriptive data, outline drawings with dimensions, time-current curves, let-through current curves for fuses with current limiting characteristics, and coordination charts and tables and related data. 11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 0 A. General Requirements 1. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area. 2. Circuit breakers shall have an over center, trip free, toggle operating mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of all poles. 3. The circuit breaker handle shall reside in a tripped position between ON and OFF to provide local trip indication. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked ON and OFF in addition to providing I International I/O markings. 4. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. 5. Each circuit breaker larger than 100A shall be equipped with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes. 6. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed with a hologram quality mark and shall have date code on I face of circuit breaker. 7. Branch circuit breakers exposed to fault currents higher than their AIC rating shall be series-rated with upstream feeder breaker, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Circuit breaker/circuit breaker in and fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL 11 as recognized component combinations. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end use equipment along with the statement"Caution - Series Rated System. A Available. Identical Replacement Component Required". I 8. Manufacturer shall provide electronic and hard copy time/current characteristic trip curves (and Ip & 12t let through curves for current limiting circuit breakers) for each type of circuit breaker. 9. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with UL Listed electrical accessories as noted on the Drawings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON and OFF J position. 10. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line and load markings and be suitable for mounting in any position. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262800 121818 Page 2 of 4 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 11. Circuit breakers shall have factory installed mechanical lugs. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to accept field installable/removable mechanical type lugs. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap in design not acceptable. All lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid (not larger than #8 AWG) and/or stranded copper conductors. 12. All circuit breakers shall be capable of accepting bus connections. 13. Circuit breakers used for motor disconnects and not in sight of the motor controller shall be capable of being locked in the open (OFF) position. 14. Acceptable Manufacturers: Siemens, Square D, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE. B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Thermal trip elements shall be factory preset and sealed. Circuit breakers shall be true rms sensing and thermally responsive to protect circuit conductor(s) in a 40 deg C ambient temperature. 3. Circuit breaker frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker. 4. Standard two-and three-pole circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed as HACR type. 5. Combination-type arc-fault circuit interrupter circuit breakers shall be UL 1699 listed. C. Equipment Ground Fault Protection (in Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers) 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be equipped with a Ground Fault Module. 2. Ground fault sensing system shall be modified zero sequence sensing type. 3. The ground fault system shall require no external power to trip the circuit breaker. 4. Companion circuit breaker shall be equipped with a ground-fault shunt trip. 5. The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on grounded systems. The ground fault sensing system shall be suitable for use on three-phase, three-wire circuits where the system neutral is grounded but not carried through the system or on three-phase, four-wire systems. 6. Ground fault pickup current setting and time delay shall be field adjustable. A switch shall be provided for setting ground fault pickup point. A means to seal the pickup and delay adjustments shall be provided. 7. The ground fault sensing system shall include a ground fault memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent arcing ground faults above the pickup point. 8. A means of testing the ground fault system to meet the on-site testing requirements of the NEC shall be provided. 9. Local visual ground fault trip indication shall be provided. 10. Where noted on Drawings, the ground fault sensing system shall be provided with zone selective interlocking communication capabilities compatible with other thermal magnetic circuit breakers equipped with ground fault sensing, electronic trip circuit breakers with integral ground fault sensing and external ground fault sensing systems. 11. The companion circuit breaker shall be capable of being group mounted. 12. The ground fault sensing system shall not affect interrupting rating of the companion circuit breaker. D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers 1. Where indicated on Drawings, provide electronic trip circuit breakers per the following. 2. Breakers shall have a microprocessor-based tripping system which consists of three current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 3. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed type as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed to carry 80%of their ampere rating continuously. 4. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based programmable time- current curve shaping adjustments. The short-time pick-up adjustment shall be dependent on the long-time pick-up setting. a. Programmable long-time pick-up. I TTSD ELEMENTARYH SC OOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262800 121818 Page 3 of 4 ICIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES b. Programmable long-time delay with selectable 12t and 14t curve shaping. $ c. Programmable short-time pick-up. d. Programmable short-time delay with selectable flat or let curve shaping and zone selective interlocking. e. Programmable instantaneous pick-up. f. Programmable ground fault pick-up trip or alarm. g. Programmable ground fault delay with selectable flat or 12t curve shaping and zone selective interlocking. I The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have a powered/unpowered selectable thermal memory to provide protection against cumulative overheating should a number of overload conditions occur in quick succession. 5. Means to seal the trip unit adjustments in accordance with the NEC shall be provided. 1 6. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences shall be provided. 7. An ammeter to individually display all phase currents flowing through the circuit breaker shall be $ provided. Indication of inherent ground fault current flowing in the system shall be provided on circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection. All current values shall be displayed in true rms with 2% accuracy. 8. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjusted ampere Irating of the circuit breaker shall be provided. 9. The trip system shall include a Long Time memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent overcurrent conditions above the pickup point. Means shall be provided to reset Long Time memory circuit during primary injection testing. 10. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with back-up thermal and magnetic trip system. 11. Circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with a Universal Test Set. Disassembly of the circuit breaker shall not be required for testing. Test set shall I be capable of verifying the operation of all trip functions with or without tripping the circuit breaker. 2.2 FUSES A. Fuses 0 through 600 amperes: i 1. Circuits protected with fuses 0 through 600 amperes shall be protected by current-limiting Class RK1 or J dual-element time-delay fuses. 2. All fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. I 3. Fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element that has a 284 degrees Fahrenheit melting point alloy. 4. The fuses shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. I 5. Peak let-through currents and i2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established for Class RK1 or J fuses. B. Fuses 601 through 6000 amperes. I 1. Circuits protected with fuses 601 through 6000 amperes shall be protected by current-limiting Class L time-delay fuses. 2. Fuses shall employ"O" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse I barrel. 3. Fuse links shall be pure silver (99.9% pure) in order to limit the short-circuit current let-through values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. 4. Fuses shall be time-delay and shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 11 times rated current in 0.01 seconds or less, with an interrupting rating of 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical, and be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 5. Peak let-through currents and i2t let-through energies shall not exceed the values established for J Class L fuses. s: 1. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall provide the owner with the following: II a. 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. b. Spare fuse cabinet(s) shall be provided to store the above spares. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Littelfuse, and Gould-Shawmut. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 262800 121818 Page 4 of 4 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES I 2.3 DISCONNECTS A. Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower rated in conformance with Table III or Fed. Spec. W-S-865. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors. B. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick-make, quick-break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock. Operating handles shall be located to side of switches. C. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use, unless specifically noted otherwise, NEMA 3R where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript"WP,"and explosionproof where designated with the subscript"EP" or as required by the environment. Exterior enclosures shall be stainless steel. D. Disconnects shall be fusible or non-fusible as required by function or code. Equip all fusible disconnects with dual element fuses required by the equipment served. Coordinate fuse sizes at the time equipment is connected. Adjust fuse sizes if necessary to accommodate actual equipment installed. In no case shall fuses be sized smaller than the starter heaters on motor circuits. E. For single-phase motors, a single-or double-pole toggle switch, rated only for alternating current will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating. F. All disconnects shall be of same manufacturer. G. Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. H. Switches used for motor disconnects and not in sight of the motor controller shall be capable of being locked in the open (OFF) position. I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE approved. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ,I A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. C. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. D. Inspect circuit breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary; adjust units for free mechanical movement. , E. Adjust all adjustable/programmable features of electronic trip circuit breakers in accordance with results of electrical power-system studies. - F. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the job site, or from water that may contact the I fuse before the equipment is installed. G. Install safety and disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. H. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of the controller position and within 25 feet. I. Circuit breakers shall be combination-type arc-fault circuit interrupter where serving dwelling unit areas as required by the NEC. 3.2 TESTING A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O TS SECTION 265000 121818 Page 1 of 3 ILIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of the type designated and appropriate 1 for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations. B. Provide lamps or LED modules for all fixtures. I C. Coordinate installation of fixtures with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and of orderly appearance. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Fixtures shall conform to the following specifications. B. Manufacturers specified are indicative of the general type and performance desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light I distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Architect prior to the bid. Digital IES files shall be provided as part of Submittal and Substitution Request processes upon request in order to properly evaluate proposed fixtures. C. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of performance, construction, installation ease, maintenance, Iand appearance. D. All light fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled. I1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data describing fixtures, lamps, LED modules, ballasts, drivers, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. 11 B. Include data on features and accessories and the following information. 1. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principle features. 2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps/LED modules and certified results of Ilaboratory tests. 3. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Submit shop drawings from manufacturers detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, Iweights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 LED FIXTURES A. General: 1. LED lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with IED, NFPA, UL, as shown on the Drawings and as in these Specifications. 2. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a. Power factor: > 0.9 nominal i b. Input Voltage: 120V—277V, 60 Hz c. Total Harmonic Distortion: < 20% d. Temperature Rating: 0 deg C—40 deg C e. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. 1 3. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. Minimum 80 CRI and color temperature 4000 deg K unless otherwise specified in Lighting I Fixture Schedule/List. c. Minimum Rated Life: 70,000 hours per IES L70, unless otherwise specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule/List. d. Light output initial lumens as specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule/List. J e. LED modules shall be field replaceable and contain quick-disconnects. 4. LED lighting fixtures shall have available digital IES files from a NVLAP accredited testing laboratory in accordance with IESNA LM-79, which specifies the entire luminaire as the source, resulting in an efficiency of 100%. Lighting fixtures that do not have these test results available will not be accepted. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 265000 121818 Page2of3 LIGHTING I 2.2 RECESSED FIXTURES A. In insulated ceilings, recessed fixtures to be equipped with "IC" rated housing or with a field fabricated fireproof box (metal, sheet rock, etc.), complying fully with all clearance requirements. B. Recessed troffers shall be as follows, unless specified otherwise: 1. Diffusers shall be pattern 12 extruded clear acrylic plastic, 0.125"overall thickness, unless otherwise specified in the fixture schedule by catalog number or remarks. Door shall be securely closed by use of enclosed cams. 2. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average reflectance of 85%on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. 3. Housing shall be 22-gauge minimum. Overall depth shall be 4-1/2" minimum. Spacing from bottom of lamp to top of lens shall be 1-7/8" minimum. 2.3 TRACK LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. Conform to UL 1574. B. Provide components, including track, fittings, and fixtures, from same manufacturer and as recommended by manufacturer for intended use. 2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Wall Packs: 1. Emergency wall packs shall comply with UL 924 and be self-contained units, complete with two adjustable lensed fixtures and LED modules, battery, and battery charger, suitable for 120V or 277V AC power supply as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Battery shall be sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium recombination type, 10-year life expectancy. Battery shall have 1-1/2 hour minimum capacity at rated wattage to 87-1/2%of rated DC voltage from a fully charged state. Shall carry a five-year pro-rata warranty. 3. Battery charger shall be solid-state, voltage regulated. Charge circuit shall react to the condition of the battery and alter the rate of charge in order to maintain peak battery capacity and maximum battery life. 4. A solid-state overload monitoring device in the DC circuit shall disconnect the lamp load from the battery should excessive wattage demands be made, and automatically reset when the overload or short circuit is removed. 5. A brownout circuit shall monitor the flow of AC current to the unit and activate the emergency lighting system when a predetermined reduction of AC power occurs. 6. The unit shall incorporate a solid-state switching system, not relays. The switching circuit shall detect a loss of AC voltage and automatically energize the DC lamps. Upon restoration of the AC power, the emergency lamps shall switch off and the charger shall automatically recharge the battery. 7. When the battery's terminal voltage falls below 80%of the rated voltage,the low voltage circuitry shall disconnect the lighting load. The disconnect shall remain in effect until normal utility power is restored, preventing deep battery discharge. B. LED Emergency Battery Backup: Emergency battery backup shall be capable of operating the LED modules at 20% light output in the emergency mode for a minimum of 90 minutes. C. Emergency Bypass Relay: Shall comply with UL 924 to allow switching of emergency fixtures along with normal fixtures, but automatically bypass switching in the emergency mode to fully illuminate the emergency fixtures. 2.5 OUTDOOR FIXTURES A. Outdoor fixtures shall be weatherproof, heavy duty types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat and safe cleaning and relamping. Ballasts shall be incorporated in the luminaire housings unless otherwise noted. Luminaires shall be sealed unless charcoal filters are provided. Lenses shall be heat and impact resistant, tempered glass. Lens gasket shall be heat and weather resistant. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be nonferrous metal or stainless steel. B. Reflectors on HID fixtures shall be secured with lock washers. C. Set screws on HID fixture reflectors shall be factory furnished in size and quantity to assure that reflector does not vibrate when touched or struck. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 265000 121818 Page3of3 RLIGHTING 2.6 POLES AND STANDARDS I A. Lighting standards, assemblies, and pole bases shall be designed and constructed to withstand a steady wind velocity of 100 miles per hour without permanent distortion or displacement. Where unusual soil or base installation conditions occur, the Contractor shall provide adequate reinforcement under the guidance of the Architect to assure the specified strength for 100-mile-per-hour wind. Generally poles/bases shall be Isuitable for installation in earth having an allowable bearing of 1800 pounds per square foot. 2.7 FIXTURES IA. See Drawings for Lighting Fixture List/Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION A. LED fixtures shall come from the factory fully operational with LED modules, drivers, etc. I B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean them. C. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the Architectural I reflected ceiling plan. The Drawings shall not be scaled. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment shall be made by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported and fastened to the ceiling system. I D. Verify all ceiling conditions and provide all lighting fixtures complete with factory furnished stems, balls, aligners, and canopies as required for a complete installation. E. Recessed troffers installed in suspended T-bar ceiling shall be independently supported on two opposite I corners by#12 gauge steel wire attached to structure, per UBC Standard#47-18. F. Surface mounted light fixtures shall be securely fastened to the building surface via factory-created holes in the fixtures. Attachment of fixture merely to recessed outlet box is not sufficient. I G. Where two switches are shown dedicated to an office, room, or area, provide two-level lighting. H. Lighting fixtures in any single enclosed room shall be connected using a common (one) circuit, except in cases where the loading requires a second circuit. I I. Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided for proper installation. J. Standards shall be plumb with arms aligned and square. Arms shall be perpendicular to the parking axis unless specifically shown otherwise. I K. Standards shall be in line such that sighting along straight lines of standards will show no standard out of line with the others. The Contractor is cautioned that some curbs or roadway edges may not be straight and, therefore, should not be used for alignment. I L. The Contractor shall erect the luminaires and pole assemblies complete on locations called out on the Architectural or Civil Drawings. M. The poles shall be installed with leveling nuts (galvanized). The space between the bottom of the pole II base flange and the top of the footing shall be grouted to present a finished appearance with a 1/2"drain hole. END OF SECTION I I 1 III TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270000 121818 Page 1 of 1 1 PROJECT OVERVIEW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification is for Byrom, Durham, and Woodward schools located in TTSD School District. B. The project is a remodel, relocating and extending existing systems. C. Area of work will be the Office, adjacent classrooms, and exterior CCTV cameras. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Plans B. Division 1 C. Division 26 D. Division 27 E. Division 28 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Requirements to submit on project 1. Meet requirements in Section 270100. 2. Additional requirements may be set by Architect. 1 3. A pre-bid walk through may be required always verify prior to bid. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refer to specific section of specifications P PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEMS A. Phone/Data B. Fire Alarm C. Paging and Intercom D. Access Control E. Security F. CCTV END OF SECTION I I I 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 1 of 8 IIBASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic design requirements and specifications for the Low Voltage Systems. B. This Section contains requirements that pertain to all 270000 series sections, and includes the design basis, as well as requirements for submittals, quality assurance, product handling, record documents, project conditions, installation, testing, demonstrations and training. C. Within the appropriate section will be more specific information necessary for the construction of the systems required for this project. ID. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. E. The work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Telephone service conduit, terminal boards, terminal cabinets, outlets, raceway systems, and grounding per utility requirements. I` 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings I 1. Symbols used on the drawings are defined in the symbols schedule of the drawings. Some of the symbols scheduled may not be required for the project. 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, symbols are shown on drawings as close as possible to the mounting location. Verify exact locations with the onsite Representative. I 3. Drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the extent, general arrangement and locations of the work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, access panels, cabinet sizes, sleeves, pull boxes, back boxes and junction boxes may not be shown. Include all items where required by code, other Sections, and for proper installation of the work. B. Provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. IC. All Division 27 Specifications 1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 111 A. BISCI TDMM, Latest Edition (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual) B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) C. National Electric Code (NEC) ID. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) IF. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. International Building Code (IBC) II H. International Fire Code (IFC) I. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) J. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) IK. TIA/EIA-568-B (and all addendums) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. I L. TIA/EIA-569-A (and all addendums) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard M. TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure N. TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 2 of 8 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS I O. TIA/EIA-758 (and all addendums) Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling P. TIA/EIA-TSB series of Guidelines 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer 1. Must provide an "End-to-End Solution"on the system being installed i.e., products of a single manufacturer for similar type equipment, i.e., cable,jacks, patch panel. 2. Have verified testing and documentation showing the parameters and abilities of the system as installed. 3. The system and its components must be manufactured by a company engaged in the manufacture of the specific equipment for a minimum of 3 years. 4. Must be listed in the approved manufacture listing within the appropriate section. B. Contractor 1. Documented successful work experience of at least 5 years of equivalent size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment proposed to be used. 2. Have a designated Project Manager for the site with documented experiences from at least 5 other projects of similar size and technical difficulty. 3. Have enough trained installers to meet the schedule of the project, without causing delay. 4. Must be Licensed and Bonded. C. System Installers 1. Shall have no less than 3 years of documented work experience on projects of equivalent size and technical difficulty. If you are using a Subcontractor their installers must meet the requirements, this is a requirement of the installer not the bidder. 2. "Experience" is defined as the completion of an operational system,with the system being successfully operated by the customer for its intended purpose for at least one year. 3. Must have current certification,from the Manufacturer, on the system to be installed so the customer , may benefit from the best warranty available from the manufacturer. D. Any errors made in the plans or specifications are to be brought to the attention of the architect to be resolved before construction begins. E. All work done is to meet the Codes and requirements listed above. The most stringent having precedence II over the others. F. The equipment and material being submitted for this project shall be an "End-to-End Solution"for compatibility and warranty by manufacturer. G. OR APPROVED EQUAL 1. In order to submit items for"approved equal"there must first be a request on the plans or 111 specifications stating "or approved equal" is being allowed for that item or system. 2. The submittal-for approved equal" must be received prior to bidding- with-enough-time to let ALL BIDDERS know a new item or manufacturer has been approved. This day and time will be at the architect discretion,they will determine the length of time prior to bidding that is required to share this information. 3. No items will be considered for"approved as equal" after bidding without the architect's written approval. 4. Items cannot and will not be approved as equal during the submittal process. If an item is submitted and approved during the submittal process that is not listed as approved on the bid documents and there is not a record of being approved prior to bid,that does not make this item or manufacturer approved. The contractor will be liable for providing the equipment requested in the bid documents or that was "approved as equal" prior to bidding. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES I A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. 1. Include dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, control sequences, and all other descriptive data necessary to describe the item proposed and its operating characteristics. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O MENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 3 of 8 IIBASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS 2. Shop drawings need to be submitted as hard copy and electronic format. Electronic format shall be ACAD 2007 or later, using the same scale as used on the bid set. 3. Symbols used on the Shop Drawings shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. 4. Coordinate with other applicable trades in submittal of shop drawings. 5. Shop drawings shall detail space conditions to accommodate other concerned trades, subject to final review by the Architect. Il B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. I C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used. I D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. I 1. Submit complete technical data necessary to evaluate the material and equipment. Include a complete technical specification for the submitted equipment, noting differences and adherence to this Section. 2. Submittals need to be clear and concise requiring no interpretation by the contractor to be clearly I understood. Products to be used, within a system, shall be grouped within the submittals so the system can be clearly understood. 3. Data sheets are to be submitted in a pdf format, separated by section and include all devices for a complete installation. I E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans. I G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic"change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. I. Samples 1. Provide Workstation outlet sample including faceplate,jacks, and proposed labeling. 2. Confirm acceptance of colors and design with architect prior to ordering. J. Submit a list of at least 5 facilities of equal size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment submitted. 1. For each facility, list: a. Name and location of facility. b. Date of Occupancy by customer. c. Representative to contact and telephone number. d. Construction Manager or General Contractor. e. Provide information on the installed locations with operational equipment. K. Certifications 1 1. Copies of certifications held by employees for the system to be installed. 2. Certificates shall be from the manufacturer or facility that provided the training listing the employee who has successfully passed the program. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 4 of 8 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS I 1.6 WARRANTY A. All work is to be performed in a manner so the customer may benefit from the most complete warranty available by the manufacturer. B. The installing company is to submit all paperwork, on behalf of the customer in the customer's name,to the appropriate manufacturer so the installed system is covered by warranty. C. A one-year warranty is to be provided by the installing contactor for hardware, cable and terminations. All work/cost required to replace a defective item is to be covered by the warranty. 1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA I A. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include: 1. Warranty information 2. Installing company name, address, and phone number 3. System operation manual 4. Manufacturers product information of all installed equipment, cable, etc 5. Cut sheets divided per system the device is associated. B. Operation and Maintenance "record drawings"shall include: 1. Floor plan drawings shall be provided showing location of equipment and routing of conduit and cable. 2. Elevations for all equipment installed 3. Plan indicating zones for paging systems 4. Port number voice and data outlets 5. Cable, port, or camera number as it relates to head-end equipment for CCTV system. 6. Diagrams clearly showing how the system was installed, interconnected, as well as connecting to111 other systems. 7. As-built plans will be completed by the contractor showing the location of all racks with elevation of rack layout. 8. As-built plans completed by contractor will show port number for all installed data outlets (wall, ceiling, Wireless Access Point, floor box, etc.) 9. As-built plans completed by contractor will show major cables routes used for low voltage cabling. 10. As-built plans completed by contractor will show cable route for tie cable and backbone cable at all locations (interior, exterior, or overhead). 11. As-built documents will be provided by the contractor in ACAD 2007 or later. 12. Symbols used shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. C. Maintenance and operating instructions on all systems. D. Control wiring diagrams for all locking systems with each system identified. E. Certification from system manufacturers that systems are installed in accordance with manufacturer's I recommendations and are functioning correctly at the time of final inspection. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11 A. Design Requirements 1. Provide and install all related devices, equipment and appurtenances necessary to complete the work as a complete and fully operational system. 2. All materials, hardware, and electronics are to be delivered to the site in the original packaging. Used or remanufactured material will not be allowed. 3. All cabling shall be routed through dedicated concealed raceways unless otherwise indicated. All raceways shall be a minimum 1 inch unless otherwise noted. Size raceways and install conductors in accordance with the NEC, NFPA, and TIA/EIA. a. EMT conduit with compression fittings may be utilized in all inaccessible areas unless otherwise required by code. b. Rigid metal conduit with Liquid-tight Fittings shall be used in exposed exterior applications. c. PVC conduits shall be used in underground applications; stub-ups shall be rigid metal conduit. d. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in all interior accessible areas where concealed conduit requirements cannot be met. Submit drawings, diagrams and information to Customer's Representative for review prior to work. e. All conduits shall terminate, whether in Pull-box or not,with the appropriate size End-fitting with a bushing to protect cable from abrasion. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 5 of 8 IBASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS 4. Mounting heights and accessibility to equipment requiring access by individuals with disabilities shall comply with ADA requirements. 5. Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 rated B. Equipment specifications may not deal individually with every part, control, or device, which may be I required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Include such items, as required, for a complete operational system, whether or not specifically indicated. C. If installation of equipment, raceways, cable trays and/or conduit is performed prior to coordination with I other trades, which interferes with work of other trades, make necessary changes to correct the condition at no additional cost to the customer. D. If R&I (Removal and Installation) of existing equipment is needed. The awarded contractor must test I systems PRIOR to any removal. If any component is not working it needs to be brought to the attention of the onsite representative. If this is not accomplished, any component not working after install that was part of R&I, will be replaced with a new unit at no additional cost to the customer. I E. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL 111 label. F. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. I G. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials and equipment are to be delivered in the original manufacturer packaging and shall be of the latest design available from manufacturer. 1 B. Provide and apply protective covering immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process. C. Protect materials stored on the job site, during construction, after installation, and until time of substantial completion. ID. Keep products clean and dry; elevate equipment above ground and floor. E. Any material damaged, before time of substantial completion, is to be replaced at no cost to the customer. F. Equipment shall not be delivered to site more than 2 weeks prior to install by cabling contractor. G. Location to store materials, on site, will be designated by General Contractor or Customer Representative idepending on the project. PART 2- PRODUCTS lif 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Manufacturer must provide an "End-to-End Solution"for the system to be installed. I 2. Product line must be conformance with the specifications. 3. Where manufacturers have been named, use one of those named. 4. Manufacturers may be designated in the appropriate Section for the system involved. I 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be of the proper designation and design for the area in which they are to be installed so as to be in compliance with all Standards and Codes i.e. plenum or OSP rated. li B. All anchors used for the support of any equipment are to be of the appropriate design and load rating for that area as set by manufacturer recommendations. 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 6 of 8 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without added cost to the Owner. B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect. C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents. E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment. F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration. G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's liability. H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to rough-in or demolition and notify the Architect of any discrepancies. I. Coordinate all work and trim with carpet installers. Provide carpet plates on all carpet surfaces, complete as required. J. Install equipment such that code-required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance. K. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Protect materials stored on the job site. Protect equipment until time of Substantial Completion. B. Provide and apply protective material immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process. C. Failure to protect materials constitutes sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material. D. Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations and until final acceptance. Restore finishes that become stained, scratched, or damaged. E. Protect existing equipment from any damage during the construction process. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1 A. Install all devices and equipment in accordance with standards set by industry practice and manufacturer's requirements. B. Use only highly skilled and experienced workers certified by the manufacturer of the system involved. C. When change in location or size is required, obtain approval of Architect before making change. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O MENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page7of8 IBASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS D. Do not make any changes without written approval of Architect. II E. Provide to Division 26 installer all non-standard electrical boxes. F. Fill percentage: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent. I G. Install conductors, control and communications cables, coaxial cables, etc., for the work of this division according to code, standard, or manufacturer recommendations which ever is the most stringent. H. Provide installation, including connections, cable pulling, testing and interfacing of systems. I. Execute all work described in this specification and shown on drawings and all work dependent upon, and necessary to, complete finish of the work so described or shown, in a workmanlike manner using materials best adapted to purposes where such work or material is not specifically mentioned. J. Fire stopping is to be completed on all penetration occupied by material installed by communications I contractor. Whether the penetration was made by the contractor or for the contractor, if your company is utilizing the sleeve or conduit you are responsible for the Fire-Stopping to meet the TIA/EIA Standards. I3.4 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Tests 1. Notify customer's representative in writing, in advance of testing to prevent delays in construction IIschedules. 2. Test all systems and place in proper and specified working order prior to demonstration of the systems. 3. Test system grounds to demonstrate that the ground resistance does not exceed the requirements of I the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) or the National Electric Code (NEC). 4. Perform tests, as required, by authorities having jurisdiction over the site. 5. Testing shall be inf the presence o the customer's designated representatives, Contractor, and I representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Verification of Performance 1. Prior to acceptance of the work, the System Integrator/Installer shall demonstrate to the customer, I designated representatives, Contractor, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction, all subsystems, features and functions of the system, and shall instruct the customer in the proper operation and event sequences of the system. 2. Demonstrate each system and subsystem. The demonstration is to consist of not less than the I following: a. Designate actual location of each component of a system or subsystem and demonstrate its function and its relationship to other components within the system. I b. Demonstrate the systems and subsystems operations by actual "START-STOP/ON- OFF/OPEN-CLOSE"cycling showing how to work controls, how to reset devices, how to replace fuses and emergency operating/operations procedures. II c. Demonstrate communication, signaling and door control equipment/devices by actual operation of such devices. C. Systems for training and demonstration may include but are not limited to. 1. Computer Rooms Access Control System. I 2. CCTV System. 3. Intercom/Paging System. 4. Entry System 5. Security 6. Telephone Systems. I D. Demonstration 1. System Integrator/Installer shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstration and instructions or arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives present to assist with the demonstrations. Training time shall include, as a minimum, the total time determined by the sum of the times specified in each Section, for performing the prescribed demonstrations/training. I 2. System Integrator/Installer shall arrange with the customer's designated representative the date and times for performing the demonstrations. The customer will select date and time for demonstration. 3. Comply with requirements for Systems Demonstrations in each Section. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270100 121818 Page 8 of 8 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS I 3.5 INSPECTIONS A. At the completion of the project and prior to final acceptance of the work, provide evidence of final inspections and approvals to the customer, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Il 3.6 CUSTOMER TRAINING A. Include 1. Train Operations and Maintenance Personnel in use and maintenance of systems provided under this section. 2. Train maintenance staff in troubleshooting and maintenance of each system. 3. Provide copies of technical manuals, including function and operational circuit and operational circuit characteristics and schematic diagrams, for each system and system components. B. Training sessions 1. Shall be conducted by instructors certified in writing by manufacturer of specific system 2. Conduct sessions for not less than four-hour periods during normal working hours, i.e., Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM. 3. Training session schedules shall conform to requirements of customer. 4. Submit schedules to the customer for approval not less than two weeks prior to training session. 5. Do not schedule training sessions for different systems concurrently. 6. Give 20 hours of instruction on each system to the customer to assure that personnel are fully trained. C. Instruct operating staff in proper operation, including hands-on training. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O ENTS SECTION 270130 121818 Page 1 of 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ' PART 1 - PRIOR TO PROJECT 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Plans and One-Line Drawing B. Product Data and Samples C. References and Certifications D. Name and Phone Number or Project Manager for project. E. Submit three complete sets of Submittals as described in Section 270100. 1.2 WALK-THROUGH A. Pre-bid walk-through may be mandatory for bidding. B. Your name must appear on the"Sign In Form"at the walk-through in order to bid. C. If you are using a Subcontractor and they do not attend the walk-though you will be responsible for them receiving the information. Only names on the list will receive updates on the project. ' 1.3 BIDDING A. All conditions in the Division 27 specifications must be met in order to bid on this project, in addition to conditions set in Division 1. ' B. Other Bidding requirements may be set by Architect. PART 2- DURING CONSTRUCTION ' 2.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. A Project Manager is to be present at ALL construction meetings to answer questions of progress, discuss ' scheduling and resolve any issues that may arise. B. When construction has started but the Contractor is not onsite actively working. The Project Manager, when requested, will be onsite within 24 hours from time of request. 1 C. The Project Manager will be the single point of contact, for the Architect, General Contractor, and Owner Representative, so the flow of information will be as efficient as possible. 2.2 MEETINGS A. Contractor is to have job-site meetings with technicians informing them of scheduling and any safety issues that may have come up in the construction meetings. Items to be covered are over-head dangers, open trenches, area's that may be off limits due to safety issues or work in progress, and locations of all items on job-site. B. Project Manager is to conduct all meetings with technicians. C. If the Project Manager needs to call a meeting with Architect, General Contractor, or Owner Representative allow 48 hours from time of notice before meeting is to begin. PART 3 - PROJECT COMPLETION 3.1 JOB SITE A. All materials, storage container,job shacks, and dumpsters must be removed from job-site by final or when customer begins to occupy the space which ever may come first. B. All labeling must be completed to customer's satisfaction by the final. ' C. All repairs must be completed by the final. 3.2 DOCUMENTATION A. As-Builts to be delivered within 2 weeks of final. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270130 121818 Page 2 of 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS B. Test results are to be delivered within 2 weeks from test date. C. All manuals and warranty information are to be delivered with the As-Builts. ' 3.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. As-built plans will be completed by the contractor showing the location of all racks with elevation of rack layout. B. As-built plans completed by contractor will show port number for all installed data outlets (wall, ceiling, Wireless Access Points, floor box, etc.) C. As-built plans completed by contractor will show major cables routes used for low voltage cabling. D. As-built plans completed by contractor will show cable route for tie cable and backbone cable at all locations (interior, exterior, or overhead). E. See Section 270100 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION 1 i 1 I 1 1 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270170 121818 Page 1 of 3 ' TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All testing and identification is to be complete 100%testing. 111 B. Documentation is to cover all parts of the cabling system, equipment, and locations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All labels are to match from cable to outlet to As-Builts. B. All labels are to be made by means of a permanent printable label. ' C. See Section 270100 for additional requirements. D. Code Requirements 1. BISCI TDMM, latest edition (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual) 2. TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure 3. TIA/EIA 568B.2-1 (all addendums) 4. TSB-72 5. ANIS/TIA/EIA-568-A (all addendums) 6. See Specification 270100 for additional 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for all equipment to be used for testing and labeling. B. Submit shop drawings indicating style of label you will be using in which situations and what numbering system you plan on using. C. As a part of the submittals you need to show a copy of the certification of the tester(s) you will be using to test the cables/fiber at the close of the project. The tester(s) must have been certified within one year of the project. The tester is to be certified for the level of cable that is to be tested. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Any manufacturer of tester that meets the most current test parameters. Electronic copy of tests shall be nonproprietary so they may be viewed on any PC based system with out having to load the test manufacturer's software. ' B. Fiber optic testers 1. Including but not limited to OTDR and Power Meter. ' PART 3 -TESTING AND ADMINISTRATION 3.1 TESTING ' A. Testing will be completed per Industry Standard for cable type to be tested. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (category 5e) and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (category 6) ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition (classes D, E and F). B. Structured cabling tests to include but not limited to: ' 1. NEXT, next @ remote 2. Wire map 3. Characteristic impedance 4. Length 5. DC loop resistance 6. Propagation delay 7. Return loss (rI), rl @ remote ' 8. Delay skew 9. Attenuation 10 Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (acr), acr @ remote. 11. Power sum acr, psacr @ remote 12. ELFEXT, elfext @ remote NT TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270170 121818 Page 2 of 3 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION ' 13. Power sum elfext, pselfext @ remote 14. Power sum next, psnext @ remote C. Tie Cable Testing 1. Wire-map 2. Length 3. Cable faults D. Fiber Testing 1. Power Meter One way 2. OTDR Bi-directional 3. Test at 850 & 1300 4. Must meet acceptance values as stated by ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 E. All Testing 1. All systems to be 100%tested 3.2 DOCUMENTATION A. Tests that generate a report 1. Will be printed and submitted in a 3-ring binder with plastic sleeves in numeric or alphabetic order. 2. Electronic copy on disk in a nonproprietary format. Tests can be viewed in Word Pad, Note Pad or some other word processing software. 3. Printed test page information will include but not limited to: a. NEXT, next @ remote b. Wire map c. Characteristic impedance d. Length e. DC loop resistance f. Propagation delay g. Return loss (rl), rl @ remote h. Delay skew i. Attenuation j. Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (acr), acr @ remote. k. Power sum acr, psacr @ remote I. ELFEXT, elfext @ remote m. Power sum elfext, pselfext @ remote n. Power sum next, psnext @ remote B. Tests that do not generate a report. 1. Give 1 week written notice, to the Owner Representative, of test day so they may witness the tests. 2. Test results are to be documented on a test form generated by the testing company and submitted With t other tests on testing company letterhead. The test results are to-be organized and typed in a professional manner that can be clearly understood by the owner without any interpretation by the testing company. 3.3 ADMINISTRATION A. Plans 1. Indicate for all systems a. Equipment list for all locations b. Connections c. Cable Routes d. Station Identification exactly as show on outlet. B. Record Documents 1. As-built plans will be completed by the contractor showing the location of all racks with elevation of rack layout. 2. As-built plans completed by contractor will show port number for all installed data outlets (wall, ceiling, I WiFi, floor box, etc.) 3. As-built plans completed by contractor will show major cables routes used for low voltage cabling. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270170 121818 Page 3 of 3 ' TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION 4. As-built plans completed by contractor will show cable route for tie cable and backbone cable at all ' locations (interior, exterior, or overhead). 5. See Specification 270100 for additional requirements. C. Documentation 1. Printed documents for each individual jack will be printed and submitted in a 3-ring binder with plastic sleeves in numeric or alphabetic order. Binder cover page will state testing company, date tested, project identification and system test results contained. One cable test per page. 2. Electronic copy on disk in a nonproprietary format. Tests can be viewed in Word Pad, Note Pad or ' some other word processing software. D. Labeling 1. Labeling will be done by means of a mechanical device i.e. printer, P-Touch, or other printing device, ' with 10pt black font. Hand written labels are not acceptable. If label holder is present on faceplate labels are to be placed into this area, if not they are to be securely attached to the faceplate. Labels will be black on white or as requested by architect, verify prior to labeling. 2. Labeling: Outlet locations: MDF/IDF Identification, Patch panel#, Room #, and Port number. Patch panels: Room #and Port#. 3. Examples: MDF.102.a.4, IDF2.204.b.3 4. All Speaker/Speaker Clock designated by location "S"of label: IDF1.204.s.1 ' END OF SECTION I 1 r 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 27 1 SECTION O 0 80 121818 Page 1 of 1 TECHNOLOGY DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1 1. Include dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, control sequences, and all other descriptive data necessary to describe the item proposed and its operating characteristics. ' 2. Shop drawings need to be submitted as hard copy and electronic format. Electronic format shall be ACAD 2007 or later, using the same scale as used on the bid set. 3. Symbols used on the Shop Drawings shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. 4. Coordinate with other applicable trades in submittal of shop drawings. ' 5. Shop drawings shall detail space conditions to accommodate other concerned trades, subject to final review by the Architect. B. Record Documents ' 1. Floor plan drawings shall be provided showing location of equipment and routing of conduit and cable. 2. Elevations for all equipment installed 3. Plan indicating zones for paging systems 4. Port number voice and data outlets 5. Cable, port, or camera number as it relates to head-end equipment for CCTV system. 6. Diagrams clearly showing how the system was installed, interconnected, as well as connecting to other systems. 7. As-built plans will be completed by the contractor showing the location of all racks with elevation of rack layout. 8. As-built plans completed by contractor will show port number for all installed data outlets (wall, ceiling, ' Wireless Access Point, floor box, etc.) 9. As-built plans completed by contractor will show major cables routes used for low voltage cabling. 10. As-built plans completed by contractor will show cable route for tie cable and backbone cable at all locations (interior, exterior, or overhead). 11. As-built documents will be provided by the Contractor in ACAD 2007 or later. 12. Symbols used shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. C. Data Sheets ' 1. Submit complete technical data necessary to evaluate the material and equipment. Include a complete technical specification for the submitted equipment, noting differences and adherence to this Section. 2. Submittals need to be clear and concise requiring no interpretation by the contractor to be clearly understood. Products to be used, within a system, shall be grouped within the submittals so the system can be clearly understood. 3. Data sheets are to be submitted in Pdf, form with all items being submitted clearly indicated. ' 4. Requirements listed in Division one could be more stringent then requested here always verify exact requirements with whomever you are placing the bid. D. Operation and Maintenance Data for the electronic systems shall include layout drawings of each panel with each item of equipment identified and cross referenced with equipment data sheet. Operation and Maintenance Data shall include complete terminal block schedule for each panel with the following data for each point: ' 1. Type of point, i.e., input, output, etc. 2. Schedule relating points, terminal block numbers, and signal source or destination. 3. Input and output schedule. 4. Location and type of input source device. 5. Location and type of output device controlled. 6. Project-specific, illustrated user's manual. 7. Provide detailed electrical schematics for all electrical/electronic components. ' END OF SECTION 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS O EMENTS SECTION 270190 121818 Page 1 of 1 SUPPORT AND WARRANTY ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All testing and documentation for the project is to be submitted to the manufacturer to ensure the owner get ' the full warranty offered by the manufacturer. B. Provide copies all information and warranty information to the owner at the close of the project describing in detail the coverage they have through which manufacturer for the systems installed. ' END OF SECTION 1 I I I r I I r I r ITTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270530 121818 Page 1 of 2 IINTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The interior communications pathways shall be in the most direct and efficient path possible. All conduits I are to be sized so the cable load does not go beyond 40%fill. Cable paths shall be capable of future use and a string is to be left after cabling has been completed. B. The Fire Rating of any structured penetrated during construction will be restored by the contractor who Imade the penetration. C. All conduit stubs shall terminate with an end connector and plastic bushing. No cable path will have a junction box in a location that is not accessible after the project is complete. Only factory ells (no more than Ithree) are allowed between junction boxes. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Industry standards permit the use of EMT for installation of conductors in circuits rated below and above 600 volts, nominal, and in accordance with Article 348 of the National Electric Code. B. The National Electric Code®(NEC®) establishes the minimum requirements for a safe electrical I installation. Because of the varied environments in which electrical equipment is installed, local amendments are often added. Always consult local codes prior to any installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit product data describing all equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Any Electric Metallic Tubing manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the following: I 1. American National Standards Institute - C80.3 2. Underwriters Laboratories Standard - UL 797 3. National Electric Code®2002 -Article 358 (NEC® 1999 Article 348) Federal Specification -WW-C- 563A B. Caddy J-Hooks and supports C. Cable Tray I1. FlexTray, Cablofil, Cable-Mgr or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 111 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Conduit 1. All conduits are to be installed with the most efficient route possible. No cable pathway will have more the 40%fill as recommended by the TIA/EIA Standards, verify cable load prior to installing conduit paths. 2. It is the responsibility of the contractor that is awarded the project to confirm the schedule for I installation with the General Contractor. 3. Conduit paths shall terminate with end connectors and plastic bushings whether in junction boxes or stubs in accessible ceiling space. 4. Any penetrations made for the cable paths is to be fire-stopped by the contractor who made the penetration. 5. Conduits will be installed and supported in a manner that meets or exceeds the requirements of the AHJ. I 6. All low voltage outlets shall utilize a 1"conduit and double gang extra deep junction box. Conduit shall stub to accessible ceiling space and terminate with an end connector and thread on plastic bushing. 7. Floor boxes with space allocated for low voltage cabling will be provided a minimum of (2) 1"conduits, unless otherwise noted on plans. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 270530 121818 Page 2 of 2 INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS B. Cable Tray 1. Cable tray is to be supported within 2' of each splice for each piece with no more than 6' between supports. C. J-hooks 111 1. For best cable support J-hooks should be placed every 5 feet maximum and at corners as required for a clean and professional install. D. Grounding 1. All interior pathways will be grounded per industry standard utilizing a continuous ground. If cable tray/ladder rack is painted a portion will have the paint removed to have the ground lug attached for metal-to-metal contact. END OF SECTION 1 I I I 1 ......_........... 1 1 1 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 271116 121818 Page 1 of 2 EQUIPMENT AND TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work will include rearranging and adding equipment to existing MDF and IDF spaces. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment shall be UL listed. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. C. Communication grounding and bonding shall be in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. It is recommended that the requirements of IEC, NEC, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-607 shall be observed throughout the entire space. D. Refer Section 270100 for additional requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Include shop drawings depicting wiring and connection diagrams in addition to the requirements in other parts of this Specification. B. The drawings submitted need to show the amount of space, mounting design, and power requirements needed for the systems. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 MATERIAL ' A. Equipment Rack 1. Floor Standing 2. Compatible with EIA 1 1/4'-1/2" hole pattern, both sides 3. UL Listed ' 4. Clear Finish 5. 7'x19" 6. CPI or approved equal B. Patch Panels for Structured wiring 1. Mounting pattern per industry standard 2. 48 port Universal Pin-out ' 3. Angled 4. 19" rack mountable 5. Match existing per location. ' C. Horizontal Cable Managers 1. Double sided 2. 2RMU 3. Finger design with covers ' D. Vertical Cable Managers Existing 1. Double sided 2. Pass through ports ' 3. Bolts to standard industry rack bolt pattern 4. Required to have some means of securing cable within the manager whether covers or latch. E. D-Rings F. Fire-Stop 1. Appropriate rating for wall penetrated. 2. Re-enterable G. Hilti HDI drop in anchors H. Velcro cable ties TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 271116 121818 Page 2 of 2 EQUIPMENT AND TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Patch Panel 1. Need to allow for 10%expansion at the close of the project. B. Horizontal Cable Managers 1. If no detail present on plans provide one horizontal manager above and below each patch panel. C. D-Rings 1. Every 2' 2. Placed at every turn in cable path to ensure a clean a professional install. 3. Rings shall used minimally to transition cable from wall mounted equipment to closest cable tray. D. Racks and cabinets to be plumb and level install per manufacturer recommendation. 1 3.2 CABLES A. All Cables within the Equipment room shall be routed to avoid any electrical interference. 111 B. D-rings if used for cable routing shall be sized to allow for future use. C. Cables will be supported and secured in a professional manner. END OF SECTION I 1 1 I 1 i 1 1 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS 121818 SECTION 271500 Page 1 of 2 HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cabling will consist be Category 6A cabling from MDF/IDF out to station outlet(s), camera(s), wall phone, or wall/ceiling-mounted devices. B. Provide all jumper management, D-Rings, J-hooks, voice blocks and accessories needed for a complete and professional installation. C. All equipment needed for a complete install whether specified directly or not to properly route, terminate, and test the Horizontal Cabling is to be part of the bid. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The vendor shall comply with the following standards and codes: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Refer Section 270100 for additional requirements. 3. UL Listed. B. Refer Section 270100 for additional requirements. C. System Installers 1. Shall have no less than 3 years of documented work experience on projects of equivalent size and technical difficulty. If you are using a Subcontractor their installers must meet the requirements, this is a requirement of the installer not the bidder. 2. "Experience" is defined as the completion of an operational system, with the system being successfully operated by the customer for its intended purpose for at least one year. 3. Must have current certification, from the Manufacturer, on the system to be installed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. AMP is the current manufacturer on site. Provide AMP or a manufacturer with an agreement with AMP to provide the longest warranty available. B. Cable manufacturer must comply with termination hardware, cabling submitted must provide and end-to- end solution. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cable 1. Category 6A 2. Part of the Structured Cabling 3. Blue jacket for Wifi, low and high wall outlets, IP clock speaker, video camera, projector, and all other IP drop locations. 4. Jacket type will be by ceiling space as required by code. B. Patch Panels 1. 48 port 2. Unpopulated 3. WiFi outlets will terminate on separate patch panel. C. Faceplates/Wall box 1. Will fit industry standard junction boxes whether single or double gang, style will be indicated on ' plans. 2. Grey faceplates. D. Jacks 1. Universally wired for 568A or 568B. 2. Must be compliant with TIA/EIA Requirements. 3. Match category of cable terminating. 4. Yellow for WiFi locations. 5. Blue for all other cabled locations. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 271500 121818 Page 2 of 2 HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 CABLES A. All Cables within the Equipment room shall be routed to avoid any electrical interference. Cable that route from wall-mount equipment shall utilize D-rings to get to the closest cable tray. All cables within Data/IT/Equipment Room shall be dressed and neatly bundled utilizing Velcro cable ties. B. If D-Rings are used be sure to size them leaving room for growth. C. Cables in ceiling space will be supported every 5' minimum and secured in a professional manner. If cable tray is available cables utilizing the tray will be separated by system and loosely bundled with Velcro cable ties. D. The interior communications pathways shall be in the most direct and efficient path possible. Cables are to be bundled and share a common path whenever possible. Size J-hooks for appropriate load and follow manufacturer recommendation for fill. Cables shall not be laying on ceiling tiles or using other systems i.e. electrical conduit, plumbing pipe, HVAC duct for support. E. Approx. 12"to 16"of slack left supported above ceiling before entering the conduit at the station end. F. Small slack loop left at the Equipment Room/IT/Data Room. G. Follow manufacturer recommendation for pulling tension and bend radius. , 3.2 TERMINATION A. Termination in IDF/MDF will be based on type of cable and system utilizing the cable. The termination equipment type and location shall be indicated on the plans. TTSD has standardized on 568B pin-out. B. Station side will be verify pin-out prior to termination. Termination of cables will be sequential as numbered for ease of outlet identification. Verify labeling style with plans or onsite Owner Representative. I END OF SECTION I I r 1 I 1 1 1 I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 275113 121818 Page 1 of 4 PAGING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The conditions of the General Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions) and the General ' Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. B. All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. C. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with these specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating integrated Intercom System consisting of Telephone, Intercommunication, Public Address System and Time Control System. D. The intercom system is an existing, to be modified during this project. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Refer Section 270100 for additional requirements. B. Submit outline drawing of system control cabinet showing relative position of all major components. C. Submit FCC registration number on separate documentation with the ringer equivalency of the proposed integrated telephone system. This documentation is mandatory; all submittals without FCC registration information will automatically be rejected. D. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment. E. Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training from the system manufacturer. 1.3 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE A. The contractor shall provide a one year warranty of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the owner/engineer. B. The contractor shall, at the owner's request, make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period. C. The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments capable of rendering advice regarding installation and final adjustment of the system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections. B. The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor that has had, and currently maintains, a locally run and operated business for at least five years. The contractor shall be a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied with full manufacturer's warranty privileges. C. The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system. The contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied. D. EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Electronics Industries Association Standards: 1. Sound Systems, EIA-160. 2. Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-A. ' 3. Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A. 4. Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, SE-101-A. 5. Speakers for Sound Equipment, SE-103. 1.5 SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 275113 121818 Page 2 of 4 PAGING SYSTEMS 1 A. Except where specifically noted otherwise, all equipment supplied shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer of known reputation and experience in the industry. The supplying contractor shall have attended the manufacturer's installation and service school. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the contractor's submittal. 1.6 SAFETY/COMPLIANCE TESTING I A. The communication system supplied shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories under UL Standard 1459. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor's submittal. 1.7 WIRING A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS , A. Existing system to be modified: 1. Bridgeport Elementary—Telecenter ICS 2. Byrom Elementary—Telecenter ICS 3. Durham Elementary The master system is a Simplex 5100 4. Woodward Elementary— Informacast IP based system and speakers 2.2 SYSTEM REQUIRMENTS A. Provide modification to existing system to accommodate relocated and new devices. 2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 1 A. Classroom, Office(s), Commons, Main Office and Admin areas 1. IP Based 8"speaker with 3"digital clock display 2. All speaker housings for recessed mounting. B. Cables: Category 6a PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with the Installer present,for compliance with requirements and other conditions ' affecting the performance of the Integrated Electronic Communications Network system. B. Do not proceed-untit unsatisfactory conaitions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Wiring Methods: 1. Install wiringin racewayexcept within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling P p spaces. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings. C. Impedance and Level Matching: , 1. Carefully match input and output impedance's and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required. D. Control Circuit Wiring: , 1. Provide number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or specified. 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 275113 121818 Page3of4 PAGING SYSTEMS 2. The contractor shall mount a main distribution frame behind the Integrated Electronic Communications Network console. All wires shall be laid down on terminal punch blocks and identified by the actual room location it serves. All the communications points shall be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and identified by which line it is on and the point position it serves. 3. All housings are to be located as specified and shown on drawings. 4. Make installation in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's drawings and instructions. E. Wiring Within Enclosures: I1. Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars. 2. Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum separation between conductors to speaker-microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other Integrated Electronic Communications Network system conductors. 3. All cabling to be labeled within 6"of the end of the cable with zone identification. Labels will be machine generated such as a P-Touch or other label making device. F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: 1 1. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction, pull, and outlet boxes,terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures, only. Midline splices are not acceptable. G. Identification of Conductors and Cables: 1. Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams. H. Weatherproofing: 1. Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to weather. I. Repairs: 1. Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation, repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance. J. Speakers will have a label on the grill indicating zone and speaker number if multiple speakers present in the zone. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for Integrated Electronic Communications Network systems as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. B. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. C. The contractor shall furnish and install a dedicated, isolated earth ground from the central equipment rack and bond to the incoming electrical service ground buss bar. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Provide services of a duly factory authorized service representative for this project location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system. B. Inspection: 1. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of paging speaker line matching transformers. C. Testing: 1. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 275113 121818 Page 4 of 4 PAGING SYSTEMS 1 3.5 COMMISIONING A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of 4 hours training. Operators Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training. B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven days advance notice. C. Labels to be completed per district standards. D. Provide owner with a list of clocks, zone controllers, model#, locations, MAC addresses, and closet termination location. 3.6 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS A. When requested by the Architect within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION I I I I I 11 r I t TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTSE TI N 2 1 S C O 800 0 121818 Page 1 of 8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic design requirements and specifications for the fire alarm replacement. B. This Section contains requirements that pertain to all 280000 series sections, and includes the design basis, as well as requirements for submittals, quality assurance, product handling, record documents, project conditions, installation, testing, demonstrations and training. C. Within the appropriate section will be more specific information necessary for the construction of the systems required for this project. l D. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes. 111 E. The work shall include but not be limited to removing existing system, cable, head-end, and installing a code compliant system. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings 1. Symbols used on the drawings are defined in the symbols schedule of the drawings. Some of the symbols scheduled may not be required for the project. 2. Because of the scale of the drawings, symbols are shown on drawings as close as possible to the mounting location. Verify exact locations with the onsite Representative. 3. Drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the extent, general arrangement and locations of the 1 work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, access panels, cabinet sizes, sleeves, pull boxes, back boxes and junction boxes may not be shown. Include all items where required by code, other Sections, and for proper installation of the work. B. Provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the work specified in this section. C. All Division 28 Specifications 1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) B. National Electric Code (NEC) C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) F. International Building Code (IBC) G. International Fire Code (IFC) H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) I. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) J. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer 1. Have verified testing and documentation showing the parameters and abilities of the system as installed. 2. The system and its components must be manufactured by a company engaged in the manufacture of the specific equipment for a minimum of 3 years. 3. Must be listed in the approved manufacture listing within the appropriate section. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page 2of8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS B. Contractor 1. Documented successful work experience of at least 10 facilities of equivalent size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment proposed to be used. 2. Have a designated Project Manager for the site with documented experiences from at least 5 other projects of similar size and technical difficulty. 3. Have enough trained installers to meet the schedule of the project, without causing delay. 4. Must be Licensed and Bonded. C. System Installers 1. Shall have no less than 3 years of documented work experience on projects of equivalent size and technical difficulty. If you are using a Subcontractor their installers must meet the requirements, this is a requirement of the installer not the bidder. 2. "Experience" is defined as the completion of an operational system, with the system being successfully operated by the customer for its intended purpose for at least one year. 3. Must have current certification, from the Manufacturer, on the system to be installed so the customer may benefit from the best warranty available from the manufacturer. D. Any errors made in the plans or specifications are to be brought to the attention of the architect to be resolved before construction begins. E. All work done is to meet the Codes and requirements listed above. The most stringent having precedence over the others. I F. The equipment and material being submitted for this project shall be an "End-to-End Solution"for compatibility and warranty by manufacturer. G. OR APPROVED EQUAL 1. In order to submit items for"approved equal"status there must first be a request on the plans or specifications stating "or approved equal"for that item or system. 2. The submittal for"approved equal" must be received prior to bidding with enough time to let ALL BIDDERS know a new item or manufacturer has been approved. This day and time will be at the architect discretion, they will determine the length of time prior to bidding that is required to share this information. 3. No items will be"approved as equal"after bidding without the architect's written approval. 4. Items cannot and will not be approved as equal during the submittal process. If an item is submitted and approved during the submittal process that is not listed as approved on the bid documents and there is not a record of being approved prior to bid, that does not make this item or manufacturer approved. The contractor will still be liable for providing the equipment requested in the bid documents or that was "approved as equal" prior to bidding. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. _ 1. Include dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, control sequences, and all other descriptive data necessary to describe the item proposed and its operating characteristics. 2. Shop drawings need to be submitted as hard copy and electronic format. Electronic format shall be ACAD 2007 or later, using the same scale as used on the bid set. 3. Symbols used on the Shop Drawings shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. 4. Coordinate with other applicable trades in submittal of shop drawings. 5. Shop drawings shall detail space conditions to accommodate other concerned trades, subject to final review by the Architect. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period. C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used. D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page 3 of 8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit complete technical data necessary to evaluate the material and equipment. Include a complete technical specification for the submitted equipment, noting differences and adherence to this Section. 2. Submittals need to be clear and concise requiring no interpretation by the contractor to be clearly understood. Products to be used, within a system, shall be grouped within the submittals so the system can be clearly understood. 3. Data sheets are to be submitted in a 3-Ring binder, separated by systems if a particular piece is to be used for multiple systems show it in each section. E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans. G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic"change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. I. Samples 1. Provide Workstation outlet sample including faceplate,jacks, and proposed labeling. 2. Confirm acceptance of colors and design with architect prior to ordering. J. Submit a list of at least 5 facilities of equal size and technical requirements utilizing the equipment submitted. 1. For each facility, list: a. Name and location of facility. b. Date of Occupancy by customer. c. Representative to contact and telephone number. d. Construction Manager or General Contractor. e. Provide information on the installed locations with operational equipment. K. Certifications 1. Copies of certifications held by employees for the system to be installed. 2. Certificates shall be from the manufacturer or facility that provided the training listing the employee who has successfully passed the program. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All work is to be performed in a manner so the customer may benefit from the most complete warranty available by the manufacturer. B. The installing company is to submit all paperwork, on behalf of the customer in the customer's name, to the appropriate manufacturer so the installed system is covered by warranty. C. A one-year warranty is to be provided by the installing contactor for hardware, cable and terminations. All work/cost required to replace a defective item is to be covered by the warranty. 1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include: 1. Warranty information 2. Installing company name, address, and phone number 3. System operation manual 4. Manufacturers product information of all installed equipment, cable, etc B. Operation and Maintenance"record drawings"shall include: TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page4of8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS 1. Floor plan drawings shall be provided showing location of equipment and routing of conduit and cable. 2. Elevations for all equipment installed 3. Plan indicating zones for paging systems 4. Port number voice and data outlets 5. Cable, port, or camera number as it relates to head-end equipment for CCTV system. 6. Diagrams clearly showing how the system was installed, interconnected, as well as connecting to other systems. 7. As-built plans will be completed by the contractor showing the location of all racks with elevation of rack layout. 8. As-built plans completed by contractor will show port number for all installed data outlets (wall, ceiling, Wireless Access Point, floor box, etc.) 9. As-built plans completed by contractor will show major cables routes used for low voltage cabling. 10. As-built plans completed by contractor will show cable route for tie cable and backbone cable at all locations (interior, exterior, or overhead). 11. As-built documents will be provided by the contractor in ACAD 2007 or later. 12. Symbols used shall match the symbols used on the Bid Set. C. Maintenance and operating instructions on all systems. I D. Control wiring diagrams for all locking systems with each system identified. E. Certification from system manufacturers that systems are installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and are functioning correctly at the time of final inspection. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Requirements I 1. Provide and install all related devices, equipment and appurtenances necessary to complete the work as a complete and fully operational system. 2. All materials, hardware, and electronics are to be delivered to the site in the original packaging. Used or remanufactured material will not be allowed. 3. All cabling shall be routed through dedicated concealed raceways unless otherwise indicated. All raceways shall be a minimum 1 inch unless otherwise noted. Size raceways and install conductors in accordance with the NEC, NFPA, and TIA/EIA. a. EMT conduit with compression fittings may be utilized in all inaccessible areas unless otherwise required by code. b. Rigid metal conduit with Liquid-tight Fittings shall be used in exposed exterior applications. c. PVC conduits shall be used in underground applications; stub-ups shall be rigid metal conduit. d. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in all interior accessible areas where concealed conduit requirements cannot be met. Submit drawings, diagrams and information to Customer's Representative for review prior to work. e. All conduits shall terminate, whether in Pull-box or not, with the appropriate size End-fitting with a bushing to protect cable from abrasion. 4. Mounting heights and accessibility to equipment requiring access by individuals with disabilities shall comply with ADA requirements. 5. Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 rated B. Equipment specifications may not deal individually with every part, control, or device, which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Include such items, as required, for a complete operational system, whether or not specifically indicated. C. All equipment contained in Division 28 Sections shall be compatible with current computer standards. D. If installation of equipment, raceways, cable trays and/or conduit is performed prior to coordination with other trades, which interferes with work of other trades, make necessary changes to correct the condition at no additional cost to the customer. E. If R&I (Removal and Installation) of existing equipment is needed. The awarded contractor must test systems PRIOR to any removal. If any component is not working it needs to be brought to the attention of the onsite representative. If this is not accomplished, any component not working after install that was part of R&I, will be replaced with a new unit at no additional cost to the customer. I TTSD S ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page 5 of 8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS F. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL label. G. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. H. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials and equipment are to be delivered in the original manufacturer packaging and shall be of the latest design available from manufacturer. B. Provide and apply protective covering immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process. C. Protect materials stored on the job site, during construction, after installation, and until time of substantial completion. D. Keep products clean and dry, elevate equipment above ground and floor. E. Any material damaged, before time of substantial completion, is to be replaced at no cost to the customer. F. Equipment shall not be delivered to site more than 2 weeks prior to install by cabling contractor. 111 G. Location to store materials, on site,will be designated by General Contractor or Customer Representative depending on the project. 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Electrical General Requirements provide complete schematic drawings depicting location of interface, number of conductors, types of connectors, and type of enclosure. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Product line must be conformance with the specifications. 2. Where manufacturers have been named, use one of those named. I 3R. Manufacturers may be designated in the appropriate Section for the system involved. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be of the proper designation and design for the area in which they are to be installed so as 1 to be in compliance with all Standards and Codes i.e. plenum or OSP rated. B. All anchors used for the support of any equipment are to be of the appropriate design and load rating for that area as set by manufacturer recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be made without added cost to the Owner. B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page6of8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS I C. Call to the attention of the Architect any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents. E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment. F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing,with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration. G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor's liability. H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to rough-in or demolition and notify the Architect of any discrepancies. I. Coordinate all work and trim with carpet installers. Provide carpet plates on all carpet surfaces, complete as required. J. Install equipment such that code-required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance. K. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT I A. Protect materials stored on the job site. Protect equipment until time of Substantial Completion. B. Provide and apply protective material immediately upon receiving the products and maintain throughout the construction process. C. Failure to protect materials constitutes sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material. D. Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations and until final acceptance. Restore finishes that become stained, scratched, or damaged. E. Protect existing equipment from any damage during the construction process. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install all devices and equipment in accordance with standards set by industry practice and manufacturer's requirements. B. Use only highly skilled and experienced workers certified by the manufacturer of the system involved. C. When change in location or size is required, obtain approval of Architect before making change. D. Do not make any changes without written approval of Architect. E. Provide to Division 16 installer all non-standard electrical boxes. F. Fill percentage: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent. I G. Install conductors, control and communications cables, coaxial cables, etc., for the work of this division according to code, standard, or manufacturer recommendations which ever is the most stringent. H. Provide installation, including connections, cable pulling, testing and interfacing of systems. I. Execute all work described in this specification and shown on drawings and all work dependent upon, and necessary to, complete finish of the work so described or shown, in a workmanlike manner using materials best adapted to purposes where such work or material is not specifically mentioned. 111 TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page 7 of 8 1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS J. Fire stopping is to be completed on all penetration occupied by material installed by communications I contractor. Whether the penetration was made by the contractor or for the contractor, if your company is utilizing the sleeve or conduit you are responsible for the Fire-Stopping to meet the TIA/EIA Standards. 3.4 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION I A. Tests 1. Notify customer's representative in writing, in advance of testing to prevent delays in construction schedules. I 2. Test all systems and place in proper and specified working order prior to demonstration of the systems. 3. Test system grounds to demonstrate that the ground resistance does not exceed the requirements of the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) or the National Electric Code (NEC). I 4. Perform tests, as required, by authorities having jurisdiction over the site. 5. Testing shall be in the presence of the customer's designated representatives, Contractor, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction. I B. Verification of Performance 1. Prior to acceptance of the work, the System Integrator/Installer shall demonstrate to the customer, designated representatives, Contractor, and representatives of the authorities having jurisdiction, all I subsystems, features and functions of the system, and shall instruct the customer in the proper operation and event sequences of the system. 2. Demonstrate each system and subsystem. The demonstration is to consist of not less than the following: I a. Designate actual location of each component of a system or subsystem and demonstrate its function and its relationship to other components within the system. b. Demonstrate the systems and subsystems operations by actual "START-STOP/ON- OFF/OPEN-CLOSE"cycling showing how to work controls, how to reset devices, how to replace I fuses and emergency operating/operations procedures. c. Demonstrate communication, signaling and door control equipment/devices by actual operation of such devices. I C. Demonstration 1. System Integrator/Installer shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstration and instructions or arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives present to assist with the I demonstrations. Training time shall include, as a minimum, the total time determined by the sum of the times specified in each Section, for performing the prescribed demonstrations/training. 2. System Integrator/Installer shall arrange with the customer's designated representative the date and times for performing the demonstrations. The customer will select date and time for demonstration. 1 3. Comply with requirements for Systems Demonstrations in each Section. 3.5 INSPECTIONS l A. At the completion of the project and prior to final acceptance of the work, provide evidence of final inspections and approvals to the customer, as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 CUSTOMER TRAINING I A. Include 1. Train Operations and Maintenance Personnel in use and maintenance of systems provided under this section. I 2. Train maintenance staff in troubleshooting and maintenance of each system. 3. Provide copies of technical manuals, including function and operational circuit and operational circuit characteristics and schematic diagrams, for each system and system components. I B. Training sessions 1. Shall be conducted by instructors certified in writing by manufacturer of specific system 2. Conduct sessions for not less than four-hour periods during normal working hours, i.e., Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM. I 3. Training session schedules shall conform to requirements of customer. 4. Submit schedules to the customer for approval not less than two weeks prior to training session. 5. Do not schedule training sessions for different systems concurrently. I6. Give 20 hours of instruction on each system to the customer to assure that personnel are fully trained. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 280010 121818 Page 8 of 8 BASIC REQUIREMENTS I C. Instruct operating staff in proper operation, including hands-on training. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 1 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL I1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Division. B. The requirements of this section apply to the Fire Alarm and Detection System. C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, include all design, labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with a complete system required by applicable codes. Provide all labor, materials, and perform such other services necessary and reasonable incidental to the design and installation of a monitoring system, required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. The fire alarm and detection system is a deferred submittal system, to be completed by the contractor in permit ready form. The fire alarm devices shown on the plans and described in the specification are provided to assist the contractor in their design process to provide a code compliant (at minimum) system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the National Fire Protection Association Standard Number 70, "National Electrical Code,"Standard Number 72, "National Fire Alarm Code,"and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. B. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or approved by Factory Mutual Laboratories and shall meet Federal Specification Standards. C. All material and equipment shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. D. Equipment shall be represented by a firm with a local service organization that is factory trained and certified. The name of this organization shall be furnished to the Owner. E. The contractor shall include in the basic bid all installation charges rendered by the supplier. F. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the system's integrity. G. The fire alarm and detection system is a deferred submittal system, to be completed by the contractor in permit ready form. The fire alarm devices shown on the plans and described in the specification are provided to assist the contractor in their design process to provide a code compliant (at minimum) system. H. Design Requirements 1. Comply with latest adopted edition of the NFPA 72. 2. Design, layout, and install a system based on the occupancy type and occupant load provided by the architect. 3. Provide all necessary design and materials for connection to: a. Mechanical devices per code. I. Code required fire alarm and detection, per occupancy and occupant load, will be the minimum of the design. Items requested above and beyond code J. Revisions to the Contractor's design, required by the Governing Agency/Authority Having Jurisdiction, shall be at the Contractor's expense. K. The system and all associated operations shall be in accordance with the following: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 2. National Electric Code (NEC) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6. International Building Code (IBC) 7. International Fire Code (IFC) TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS L IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 2of10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION I 8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 9. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 10. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) 1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The fire alarm system shall be fully functional at the close of the project. The fire alarm will be checked to verify the entire system, both modified and existing, is fully operational. B. System operation will remain as it was prior to system modification. The new components shall operate exactly as the system was originally designed, unless otherwise requested by the AHJ. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. 4. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop drawings. D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software installations, modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. E. Certifications: Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. �. F. Fire alarm documents are to be submitted together for review. G. Additional requirements maybe set by Architect verify prior to submittal. PART2 - PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 3 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION A. Modify existing system: 1. Bridgeport Elementary—Notifier AFP 400. 2. Byrom Elementary—Silent Knight 5820XL 3. Durham Elementary—Simplex 4002 4. Woodward Elementary—Silent Knight 5820XL B. Documentation from the manufacturer shall be presented to the Architect and Engineer certifying that the persons making the final connections, system programming, check-out and providing the warranty are factory trained technicians in the employ of the factory authorized representative. 2.2 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: A. The FACP shall be modified as required for additional circuits. 2.3 ANNUNCIATORS 1 A. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator: 1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located backlit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty(80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display. 4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. 5. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances up to 6,000 feet from the control panel. 6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA-485 interface. This is a two-wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000 feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel. 7. The system shall allow a minimum of 32 terminal mode LCD annunciators. Up to 10 LCD annunciators shall be capable of the following system functions:Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset, which shall be protected from unauthorized use by a key switch or password. 8. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide each of the features listed above. 2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS -ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices—General: 1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 0 to 9) type address switches. 2. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch, are not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. Detectors shall be supplied with dual auxiliary contacts for connection to air handlers, elevator controls, and other systems as required. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 4 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION I 9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 11. Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LEDs shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 12. Addressable devices shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 13. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100%of the alarm threshold. B. Addressable Pull Box (Manual Station): 1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. D. Intelligent Thermal Detectors: Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 deg. F (58 degrees C) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 deg. F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit. E. Duct Smoke Sensor:The detector is to be Photoelectric type. 1. If possible the detector and housing will be a one-piece design. The housing and detector separate is allowed if a one-piece unit is not available. a. The duct detector housing shall be supplied with a clear cover so the presence of smoke can be I monitored. b. Shall be supplied with either a magnetic test feature or an injection tube for device testing. c. Desiyrred lu operate with air velocity in the range of 300-4000fpm d. Coordinate with mechanical plans for duct size and provide the appropriate length of sampling111 tubes. e. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover. 2. Detectors of either design will be provided with relays to connect to the fire alarm panel and DDC panel, as well as connect to a remote status LED. 3. Remote status LED will display the detector status exactly the same as the detector. The remote status LED is to indicate the detector is operational, in trouble mode, or in alarm. a. The remote status LED is required if the duct detector is over 10' off the finished floor or is not visible because of a drop ceiling. b. Verify exact location to mount the remote status LED with the local AHJ prior to installation. F. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. 2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 5 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED. G. Two-Wire Detector Monitor Module: 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). 2. The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or with an optional surface backbox. 3. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. H. Addressable Control Module: I1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. 2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. 3. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation, or as a dry contact (Form-C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply. 5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC. I. Addressable Relay Module: Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100%of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 2.5 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES A. Horns shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these specifications. Wall mounted devices shall be mounted in such a way that the lens is not less than 80" and not greater than 96"above the finished floor. Locations where ceilings prevent the installation at 96"centerline, the centerline of the unit shall be 6" below the ceiling. B. Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of a least 60 seconds (whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupied area. The average ambient sound level is the root mean square, a weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. C. Strobes shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the UL 1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual notification appliances can be seen from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate. 1. Strobes shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the listed input voltage (20VDC - 31 VDC) range. 2. Strobes shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid- state circuitry. 3. Strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15/75, 30/75, 60/75, 75 or 110 Candela. Dual listing strobes of 15/75 intensity for UL 1971/near-axis requirements shall be used where acceptable. 4. Strobes shall be available for semi-flush or surface mounting and in conjunction with audible appliances as required. D. Provide manufacturer's standard wireguard where so indicated on the Drawings. TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 6 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 2.6 CONDUIT AND WIRE: A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit,junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29. 4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum. B. Wire: 111 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. In certain applications, the system shall support up to 2 SLCs 1111 with up to 1,000 feet of untwisted, unshielded wire. The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 OPERATION A. The fire alarm components (i.e. pull stations, smoke detectors, photoelectric smoke detectors, horns, magnetic door holders, fire alarm panel, batteries, chargers, fire alarm cable, etc.) will be supplied, installed and connected__• ,. .. .. . . . • ass. - .- • - e to installecivision 15 supplied and wired by Division 16. 1 B. The fire alarm system operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any pull station or automatic detection device shall be as follows: 1. Sound the building audible alarm devices. 2. Display on the control panel the English language description of the alarm and its location. 3. Print on the printer the alarm type, location, time and date. 4. Activate programmed output modules points. 5. Report the condition to the central station. 6. Log in the event buffer all system activity. 7. Recall the elevator if the alarm is activated from the lobby smoke detector(s). 8. Release magnetically held fire doors. 9. Deactivate the 120 volt smoke damper circuits. 10. Operate the elevator power module shunt trip switch to disconnect elevator power if the alarm is activated from the elevator heat detector(s). C. Zoning: Provide each initiating device with its own address. This includes all detectors, pull stations, sprinkler flow switches, tamper switches, low air switches and any other monitored point. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 7 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Boxes, Enclosures and Wiring Devices: 1. Boxes shall be installed plumb and firmly in position. 2. Extension rings with blank covers shall be installed on junction boxes where required. 3. Junction boxes served by concealed conduit shall be flush mounted. 4. Upon initial installation, all wiring outlets,junction, pull and outlet boxes shall have dust covers. Dust covers shall not be removed until wiring installation when permanent dust covers or devices are installed. 5. All junction box covers shall be painted fire department red and be affixed with a decal or silk- screened label "Fire Alarm System." 6. Wet or damp locations shall require a NEMA rated enclosure suitable for the environment in which an addressable field device or module are to be installed. (i.e. monitoring of sprinkler water flow, tamper switches and OS&Y valves) 7. Termination junction boxes shall be of adequate size and room to facilitate ease of accessibility to work on wiring and to provide ample space for proper identification labeling. Enclosure design shall incorporate the use of a back plate within the enclosure to provide ease of installation. Terminal blocks shall be affixed to a secured mounting rail. Terminal enclosures shall be painted fire department red and stenciled "Interior Fire Alarm System." 8. Electrical conduits shall enter only at the side or the bottom of control cabinets, unless designed and approved for entry on the top. 9. All conduits shall be grounded to a water main by approved ground clamps with a conductor equal in size to the largest conductor used in the system; but in no case shall the ground conductor be smaller than no. 10 AWG. B. Conductors: 1. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at terminal points. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible. 2. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer-wiring guides. 3. Wiring in accessible locations (i.e. above removable ceiling tiles) may be open fire alarm cable. The cabling is to be supported off the ceiling grid by means of D-rings, J-Hooks, or other products manufactured for the purpose. The cable is to be supported at least every 5' and will not share a cable path with any other system. Cable shall not be attached to conduit, pipe, or ceiling stringers used by any other trade. 4. Wiring in inaccessible locations (i.e. walls, above gyp ceilings) shall be in a conduit raceway system. The contractor has the option to re-use the existing fire alarm raceway system if applicable and found to be in good condition. All conductors installed in existing raceway shall be THHN. Verify wiring with equipment supplier and increase conduit size where required. 5. Wiring for analog loop circuits, conventional detection circuits, speaker circuits and telephone circuits shall be based on the fire alarm manufactures wiring guidelines, but shall not be smaller than#18 AWG. 6. Splices shall be made with UL listed wire nuts of the appropriate size for the cable gauge and count. 7. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors. 8. A consistent color code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation shall be provided. The installation contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed color code for system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types. 9. All nominal voltage branch circuit power feeds (120/220 VAC) shall be identified "labeled"at both ends of the circuit to indicate its source and purpose. 10. Wiring within system control panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance and to isolate nominal voltage wiring from system low voltage wiring. 11. Splices in electrical conductors in vertical risers are prohibited. 12. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. 13. Communication circuits give off RF noise. Maintain at least an eighteen-inch distance from all other communication circuits, where possible. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 8 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Certificate of Compliance: Complete and submit to the project engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, paragraph 1.7.2. B. Field-Testing General: 1. Prior to any testing or programming verify numbering scheme, room names, and other means of identifying addressable devices prior to testing and labeling. The owner will be given a minimum of one week notice prior to the contractor requiring to have the numbering scheme requested by the owner. 2. Each addressable analog smoke detector shall be individually field tested prior to installing the device at its designated location to ensure reliability after shipment and storage conditions. A dated log indicating correct address, type of device, sensitivity and initials of the technician performing test- using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose - shall be prepared and kept for final acceptance documentation. After testing,the detection devices and base shall be labeled with the system address, date and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be visible after installation is complete. 3. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Tests shall check for stray voltage not to exceed 1 volt AC/DC unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses. 4. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be made available by the installing contractor. 5. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance inspector. C. Final Acceptance Testing: I 1. Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA72 and this specification. 2. A final As-built Function Matrix shall be prepared by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm, trouble or supervisory condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any," "or," "not,""count," "time,"and "timer"statements;the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix. 3. The installing contractor prior to testing shall prepare a complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers. 4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the tests, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following: a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of: 1) Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling line circuit. 2) Open, shorted-and-grounded network signaling line circuit. 3) Open, shorted and grounded conventional initiating device circuits. 4) Intelligent device removal. 5) Primary power or battery disconnected. 6) Incorrect device address. 7) Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. 8) Loss of data communications between system control panels. 9) Loss of data communications between system annunciators. b. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. 111 2) Audibility and visibility at required levels. c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) Correct message display for each alarm input, at the control panel, each remote alphanumeric LCD display. 111 2) Correct annunciator light for each alarm input, at each annunciator and color graphic terminal. 3) Correct printer logging for all system activity. d. System on-site and/or off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows: I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 121818 Page 9 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION 1) Correct alarm custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted for each alarm input. 2) Correct trouble custom message display, address, device type, date and time transmitted for each alarm input. 3) Trouble signals received for disconnect. e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified. 2) System primary power shall be restored for forty-eight hours and system-charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank. 3) System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display. 5. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed at the discretion of the acceptance inspector,the test shall be terminated. a. The installing contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the acceptance inspector. b. In the event that software changes are required during the testing, the system manufacturer to compare the edited program with the original shall furnish a utility program. This utility shall yield a printed list of the changes and all system functions, inputs and outputs affected by the changes. The items listed by this program shall be the minimum acceptable to be retested before calling for resumption of the testing. The printed list and the printer log of the retesting shall be submitted before scheduling of the testing. c. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete testing to be performed again if modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete retesting. D. Notify owner representative one week prior to all system testing days so they may witness tests. E. Documentation: 1. System documentation shall be furnished to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Provide cut sheets for all equipment installed during construction. If multiple items are shown on one page indicate exactly which item was installed. Provide this information in hard copy and on CD with the record drawings. b. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible hard copy, as well as, drawings on CD (compact disks) in a both CAD (or compatible program) and PDF. c. System operation, installation and maintenance manuals. d. Written documentation for all logic modules as programmed for system operation with a matrix 1 showing interaction of all input signals with output commands. e. Documentation of system voltage, current and resistance readings taken during the installation and testing. f. System program "hard copy"showing system functions, controls and labeling of equipment and devices. Also provide a CD with system file. F. Test Equipment: The contractor shall furnish to the owner all test equipment as required to program the field analog devices, specifically an intelligent device programmer-tester or a calibrated smoke generator with power source. G. Warranty/Services: The contractor shall warrant the entire system against system hardware and electrical defects including programming software defects for a period described in the contract general conditions, but not less than one year. This period shall begin upon satisfactory completion and certification of final acceptance testing of the system. Contractor shall provide to owner a letter stating the start-date and end- date of warranty period. In addition, the contractor shall also provide an updated list of name(s) and phone number(s) for normal and off-hours contacts necessary to respond to warranty issues. Response to warranty notification shall require a reply within 24 hours of initial contact. 3.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Complete maintenance instructions for all devices including trouble-shooting procedures shall be provided to the owner. Owner's personnel shall receive a minimum of six hours of hands on system training. I TTSD ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 283110 I 121818 Page 10 of 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATION I 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide manuals in accordance with Section 280010. Manuals are to contain as-built drawings on disk utilizing Autocad, spare parts list, operating procedures, trouble shooting guide, operating system data file print out, operating system data file on disk, a one year service proposal on the system and a copy of the completed NFPA"Record of Completion." END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1